To update the repeater list,

click here!

ADVANCED MANUAL INTRODUCTION

1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

2 USING A MICROSD CARD

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

4 BATTERY CHARGING

VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVER 5 BASIC OPERATION

ID-51A 6 BC RADIO OPERATION

ID-51E 7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

10 GPS OPERATION

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

12 MEMORY OPERATION

13 SCAN OPERATION

14 PRIORITY WATCH

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

Instructions for advanced operations and additional
details are described in this manual.
See the Basic manual to begin D-STAR, especially for
16 MENU SCREEN
new users.
17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

18 OPTIONS

19 SPECIFICATIONS

TROUBLESHOOTING

INDEX

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

 Previous view

INTRODUCTION
Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

About these Advanced Manual (PDF format)

Duplex operation
These Advanced Manual describe the details of the ID-51A/E features. This PDF formatted manual provides you
with convenient functions, as follows. The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
up or down from the receive frequency by an offset
amount.

Move to the previously readq Dpage.

Setting the frequency
Shows offset
a term description
Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
Click Previous view at the left top on [MENU]
w Push an When
. the mouse cursor is moved over a term which
each page, to move back to the e Push D-pad() tois select
previ- highlighted
the root in
itemyellow,
(“DUP/ the description of the term is
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
ously read page. D-pad
displayed.
(Ent)
( )
Previous view
r Push D-pad() to select the “Offset Freq,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
15 REPEATER
t RotateAND DUPLEX
[DIAL] OPERATIONS
to set the frequency offset to be-
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and then push
D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
Previous view • The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used when
setting the frequency offset. The current frequency
15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS Duplex operation
• Pushing [V/MHz]
below.
toggles the tuning digit, as shown offset

TS* 1 MHz 10 MHz

The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
Rotate [DIAL], then
up or down from
*The the receive
frequency frequency
changes accordingby an preset
to the offsettuning push D-pad(Ent).
amount. steps. (p. 5-8) Previous view

ShowsDuplex operation
the location of keys y Push [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.
15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

When the cursor is moved over aDterm withthe

Setting a red
frequency offset [DIAL]
The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
underline, a red circle appears q Pushthe
around [V/MHz] to select the VFOoperation
mode.
by an appro-
Duplex
up or down from the receive frequency offset
w Push [MENU] . The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
priate key(s) on the illustration ofethe
amount. transceiver.
Push D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
up or down from the receive frequency by an offset
amount.

TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).

D Setting the frequency offset
D Setting the frequency offset q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
w Push [MENU] .
D-pad
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. e Push D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Ent)
w Push [MENU] . D-pad
( ) (Ent)

e Push D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/ ( )

TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent). r Push D-pad() to select the push
r Push D-pad() to select the “Offset Freq,” and then
“OffsetD-pad(Ent).Freq,” and then
t Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency offset to be-
D-pad push D-pad(Ent). tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and then push Push [QUICK]
D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
Example:
(Ent) When the cursor istmoved
 Rotate [DIAL]over
To resettotoset the frequency
the default value.
• The offset
selected tuning step in the VFOto
setting the frequency offset.
mode be-
is used when
The current frequency
( )
[V/MHz] tween 0.000.00
in the description, Push a and 59.99500
[QUICK] MHz,
• Pushing
in step
[V/MHz] and togglesthen
below.t as described above, then
push
the tuning digit, as shown offset

D-pad(Ent). (Setting
push D-pad(Ent) example:
to reset to the
TS* 1.000.00
default
1 MHz 10 MHz
value. MHz)
red circle
r Push D-pad() appears
to select around
the “Offset •Freq,” the
and ap-
The selected then
tuning step in the *VFO mode is used when
The frequency changes according to the preset tuning
Rotate [DIAL], then
push D-pad(Ent).
steps. (p. 5-8)
propriate key(s).
push D-pad(Ent). setting the frequency offset. y Push [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.
NOTE: The current freque
t Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency• Pushingoffset to be-
[V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as [DIAL]shown offset
• The frequency offset cannot be changed while using
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and below.then the
push DR function.
Push D-pad(Ent)
D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00
TS* • MHz)
The1 MHz 10 MHz
Auto repeater function uses the preset frequen-
• The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used cy when
offset. Depending on the frequency offset value, Rotate [DIAL], the
setting the frequency offset. *The frequency
the offchanges according
band indication, to appears
“OFF,” the preset
on tuning
the display
The current frequency push D-pad(Ent).
• Pushing [V/MHz] toggles the tuning steps. (p.shown
digit, as 5-8) [PTT] is pushed. (p. 15-5)
when offset
below. y Push [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen. Push [QUICK]
To reset to the default value.
TS* 1 MHz 10 MHz Push [QUICK] in step t as described above, then
[DIAL]
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.
Rotate [DIAL], then
*The frequency changes according to the preset tuning The current frequency
Move to the page, if clicked.
steps. (p. 5-8)
NOTE:
• The frequency offset cannot be changed while using push D-pad(Ent). Push D-pad(Ent) offset
the DR function.
y Push [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen. • The Auto repeater function uses the preset frequen-
cy offset. Depending on the frequency offset value,
15-4

(p. 15-5)
the off band indication, “OFF,” appears on the display
when [PTT] is pushed. (p. 15-5)
[DIAL]
The current frequency
offset
15-4

Push [QUICK]
The screen shots at the right column, correspond
To reset to the default value.
to the operating instructions and procedures
Push [QUICK] in step t as described
showsabove,
boththen
setting and operating example.
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.
Push [QUICK]
Icom, Icom Inc. to
To reset and
thethe Icomvalue.
default logo are registered
NOTE: trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the
United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, • Russia,
The Australia,
frequency New Zealand,
offset cannot be changedand/or
whileother
using countries.
Push [QUICK] in step t as described above, then Push D-pad(Ent)
Adobe, push
Acrobat, and Reader are either registered
the DR
D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value. trademarks
function. or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries. • The Auto repeater function uses the preset frequen-
products or brands are registeredcytrademarks
All otherNOTE: offset. Depending on the frequency
or trademarks of their offset value,holders.
respective
the off band indication, “OFF,” appears on the display
• The frequency offset cannot be changed
whenwhile using
[PTT] is pushed.i (p. 15-5) Push D-pad(Ent)
the DR function.
• The Auto repeater function uses the preset frequen-
cy offset. Depending on the frequency offset value,
 Previous view

INTRODUCTION

Functions and features of Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®

The following functions and features can be used with Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®.

• Keyword search
Click “Find” (Ctrl+F) or “Advanced • Find screen
Search” (Shift+Ctrl+F) in the Edit
menu to open the search screen.
This is convenient when search-
ing for a particular word or phrase
in this manual.
*
The menu screen may differ, de- • Advanced search screen
pending on the Adobe® Acrobat®
Reader® version.

Click to open the find or search

screen or advanced search screen.

• Printing out the desired pages. • Read Out Loud feature.

Click “Print” in File menu, and then select the paper The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in
size and page numbers you want to print. this Instruction Manual.
*The printing setup may differ, depending on the  efer to the Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® Help for the
R
printer. Refer to your printer’s instruction manual details.
for details. (This feature may not be usable, depending on your
*Select "A4" size to print out the page in the equal- PC environment including the operating system.)
ized size.

*The screen may differ, depending on the Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®

version.
ii
Previous view

Section 1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

■■ Antenna............................................................................... 1-2
■■ Battery pack........................................................................ 1-2
■■ Belt clip................................................................................ 1-3
■■ Hand strap........................................................................... 1-3

1-1
 Previous view

1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

■■Antenna
Antenna
Insert the antenna connector into the antenna base
and tighten the antenna.

NEVER carry the transceiver by holding only the an-

tenna.

TIP: Third-party antennas may increase transceiver

performance. An optional AD-92SMA antenna con-
nector adapter is available to connect an antenna
that has a BNC connector. (p. 18-3)

■■Battery pack
To attach or detach the battery pack:
Attach or detach the battery pack or battery case, as To attach To detach
illustrated to the right.
See page 4-2 for details of the battery pack.

NOTE: Even when the transceiver power is OFF, a

small current still flows in the transceiver. Remove the
battery pack or case from the transceiver when not w q
using it for a long time. Otherwise, the battery pack or q
installed batteries will become exhausted. q
The battery protection function automatically sets w
transceiver to Low1 power (0.5 W) when the temper-
ature is around 0°C (+32°F) or below. In this case, Battery pack
transmit power selections (High, Mid and Low2) are or battery case
disabled.
Illustration shows the
battery pack is attached.

1-2
 Previous view

1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

■■Belt clip
To attach the belt clip:
qqRemove the battery pack from the transceiver, if it is To attach To detach
attached. (p. 1-2) q
wwSlide the belt clip in the direction of the arrow until the w
belt clip locks in place, and makes a ‘click’ sound.
Tab
To detach the belt clip:
Belt clip
qqRemove the battery pack from the transceiver, if it is
attached. (p. 1-2) Battery pack
wwLift the tab up (q), and slide the belt clip in the direc- or battery case
tion of the arrow (w).

■■Hand strap
To facilitate carrying the transceiver, slide the hand
strap through the loop on the top of the rear panel, as
illustrated to the right.

Hand strap

1-3
Previous view

Section 2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ About the microSD card...................................................... 2-2
■■ Saving data onto the microSD card..................................... 2-2
■■ Inserting the microSD card.................................................. 2-3
DD Formatting the microSD card.......................................... 2-4
■■ Removing the microSD card................................................ 2-5
■■ Saving data onto a microSD card........................................ 2-6
■■ Saving with a different file name.......................................... 2-8
■■ Loading the saved data files that are on the microSD card.. 2-10
■■ Backing up the data stored on the microSD card onto a PC... 2-12
DD About the microSD card’s folder.................................... 2-12
DD Making a backup file on your PC................................... 2-13
■■ Importing or Exporting a CSV format file........................... 2-14
DD Importing....................................................................... 2-14
DD Exporting....................................................................... 2-15

2-1
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■About the microSD card

The microSD and microSDHC cards are not available NOTE:
from Icom. User supplied. • Before using the microSD card, read the microSD
card instructions thoroughly.
A microSD card of up to 2 GB or a microSDHC of up to • If you do any of the following, the microSD card data
32 GB, can be used with the ID-51A/E. may be corrupted or deleted.
Icom has checked the operation with the following mi- - Remove the microSD card from the transceiver
croSD and microSDHC cards. while accessing the microSD card.
- Change the external power source voltage while
(As of September 2016) accessing the microSD card.
Brand Type Memory size - Start the vehicle engine while accessing the mi-
microSD 2 GB croSD card.
4 GB -D  rop, impact or shake the microSD card.
SanDisk® 8 GB •D  o not touch the contacts of the microSD card.
microSDHC • The transceiver takes a longer time to recognize a
16 GB
32 GB high capacity microSD card.
• The above list does not guarantee the card’s perfor- • The microSD card will get warm if used continuously
mance. for a long period of time.
• Through the rest of this document, the microSD and • The microSD card has a certain lifetime, so data
a microSDHC cards are simply called microSD cards reading or writing may not be possible after using it
or the cards. for a long time period.
• Icom recommends that you format all microSD cards • When reading or writing data is impossible, the
to be used with the transceiver, even preformatted mi- microSD card’s lifetime has ended. In this case,
croSD cards for PCs or other uses. purchase a new one. We recommend that you oc-
casionally make a backup file of the important data
TIP: Occasionally saving the data is recommended. onto your PC.
Insert the card into the transceiver’s slot, and then • Icom is not responsible for any damage caused by
enter the Menu screen. data corruption of a microSD card.
(MENU > SD Card > Save Setting) (p. 16-95)

■■Saving data onto the microSD card

The following data can be stored onto the card:

• Transceiver data • Voice audio for the Voice TX function

Memory channel contents, Repeater List, Your (UR) Voice audio to use with the Voice TX function.
call sign memory and GPS memory that are stored in
the transceiver. • Position data from the GPS receiver
Position and time data from a GPS receiver that is in a
• Communication audio log file as a route.
The transmitted and received audio.
•V
 oice Recorder
• Communication log The microphone audio.
The communication and receive history log.

• Automatic answering voice audio in the DV mode

Voice audio to use with the Auto Reply function in the
DV Mode.

2-2
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Inserting the microSD card

qqTurn OFF the transceiver.
wwLift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel. NEVER forcibly or in-
eeWith the terminals facing the front, insert the card versely insert the card.
into the slot until it locks in place, and makes a ‘click’ It will damage the card
sound. and/or the slot.
DO NOT touch the terminals.
[micro SD] slot
rrCompletely close the [micro SD] slot cover.
Close the cover,
CAUTION: leaving no gap.
After a microSD card is
inserted, completely close
the [micro SD] slot cover microSD card
as shown to the right.
Terminals facing Slot cover
the front

Correct Wrong

NOTE:
• If you use a brand new microSD card, format it, by
doing the steps below.
• Formatting a card erases all its data. Before for-
matting any card with data on it, make a backup file
on your PC.

2-3
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Inserting the microSD card (Continued)

DDFormatting the microSD card

qqTurn ON the transceiver.
wwPush [MENU] .
Appears
eeP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
when the
and then push D-pad(Ent). microSD card
D-pad is inserted.
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select “Format,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
• The dialog “Format OK?” appears.
ttPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to format.
• The formatting starts and the display shows the format-
ting progress.
•N  EVER turn OFF the power while formatting.
yyAfter formatting, the display automatically returns to
the SD CARD menu.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

Shows the
formatting
progress

2-4
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Removing the microSD card

qqTurn OFF the power.
wwLift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel.
eePush in the microSD card until a click sounds, and
then carefully pull it out.
• DO NOT touch the terminals.
rrCompletely close the [micro SD] slot cover.
Close the cover,
CAUTION: leaving no gap.
After a microSD card is
inserted, completely close
the [micro SD] slot cover
as shown to the right.

Correct Wrong
Slot cover Slot cover
Push the microSD card Pull the microSD
until a click sounds. card out.

To remove the microSD card while the transceiver’s

power is ON, do the following steps.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Unmount,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The dialog “Unmount OK?” appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to unmount.
ttWhen unmounting is completed, “Unmount is com-
pleted.” is displayed, and then the screen automati-
cally returns to the SD CARD menu.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
uuLift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel.
iiPush in the microSD card until a click sounds, and
then carefully pull it out.
• DO NOT touch the terminals.
ooCompletely close the [micro SD] slot cover.

2-5
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Saving data onto a microSD card

Memory channels, item settings in the menu screen,
and Repeater List can be saved on the microSD card.
Saving data on the microSD card allows you to eas-
ily restore the transceiver to its previous configuration,
even if an All reset is performed.

TIP: Data is saved in the “icf” file format that is used in

the CS-51PLUS2 cloning software. The saved data on
the microSD card can be copied onto a PC and edited
with the cloning software. Data can be saved as a new
file or to overwrite an older file.

Saved as a new file

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The FILE NAME screen is displayed.
• The file name is automatically named in the following for-
mat; Setyyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day,
xx: serial number)
Example: If a 2nd file is saved on October 1, 2016, the
file is named “Set20161001_02”.
• If you want to change the file name, see page 2-8 for
entry details.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save the file name.
• The confirmation screen “Save file?” appears.
yyPush D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to save.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2-6
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Saving data onto a microSD card (Continued)

Overwriting a file
(Example: Overwriting the “Set20161001_01”)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired file to be over-
written, and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: Selecting “Set20161001_01”)
• The confirmation screen “Overwrite?” appears.
ttPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to overwrite the setting file.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2-7
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Saving with a different file name

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The FILE NAME screen is displayed.
ttPush [CLR] to delete the previously entered
character.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
When the cursor does not select a character, the previ-
ous character is deleted.
If [CLR] is held down, all the characters are delet-
ed.
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
• The selected character blinks.

About text entry

• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to a upper case or lower case letter.
•W  hile selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the in-
put mode selection window.
-P  ush D-pad() to select the desired upper case letter,
lower case letter, number or symbol.
- To enter symbols, select “!”#,” and then push D-pad(Ent)
to open the symbol character selection window. Rotate
[DIAL] to select the desired symbol character, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
•M  ove the cursor, then rotate [DIAL] to insert a character.
•A  space can be selected in any input mode.
•P  ush D-pad() to enter a space.
• If you make a mistake, push [CLR] to delete the se-
lected character, or hold down [CLR] to continuously erase
the characters, first to the right, and then to the left of the
cursor.

☞☞Continued on the next page

Input mode selection window
2-8
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Saving with a different file name (Continued)

uuPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second

digit.
iiRepeat steps y and u to enter a name of up to 15
characters, including spaces.
(Example: My Data)
ooAfter entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).
• After pushing D-pad(Ent), “Save file?” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!0 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-

pad(Ent) to save the file.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen appears after the save is completed.
!1 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2-9
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Loading the saved data files that are on the microSD card
The saved memory channels, item settings the in menu
To update the Repeater
list and Repeater List can be copied to the transceiver.
List, click here!
This function is convenient when copying the saved
data, such as memory channels, or Repeater List, to
another ID-51A/E and then operating with the same
data.

Saving the current data is recommended before load-

ing other data in the transceiver.

 oading all the data in the

(Example: L
“Set20161001_01” file)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Load Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrP ush D-pad() to select the desired file to be load-
ed, and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: Selecting “Set20140801_01”)
• The LOAD FILE screen appears.
ttPush D-pad() to select the desired loading con-
tent, as shown below.
• ALL:
Loads all memory channels, item settings in the menu
list and the Repeater List into the transceiver.
• Except My Station:
 Loads all memory channels, item settings in the
menu list except MY call signs and the Repeater List
into the transceiver.
• Repeater List Only:
Loads only the Repeater List into the transceiver.

(☞ Continued on the next page)

2-10
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Loading the saved settings file that are on the microSD card (Continued)

yyPush D-pad(Ent) to select the file, and then the “Keep

'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

uuPush D-pad() to select “YES” or “NO.”

• When “YES” is selected, the skip settings of the Repeater
List are retained. (p. 9-39)
iiPush D-pad(Ent), “Load file?” appears.
ooPush D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to start the file check.
• While checking the file, “CHECKING FILE” and a prog-
ress bar are displayed.
!0 After checking, settings data loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-
played.
!1 After loading, “COMPLETED! Reboot the ID-51.” ap-
pears.
To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.

2-11
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Backing up the data stored on the microSD card onto a PC

wwCsv eeGpsMemory
A backup file allows easy restoring even if the data on
the microSD card is accidentally deleted. yyGps rrRptList
Depending on your PC, a memory card reader (user
uuQsoLog ttYourMemory
supplied) may be required to read the microSD card.
qqID-51
iiReply

DDAbout the microSD card’s folder ooRxLog

The folders contained in the microSD card are as fol- !0 Setting
lows:
qqID-51 folder !1 Voice !2 yyyymmdd
The folders created in the ID-51A/E are in this ID-51
folder. !2 yyyymmdd
wwCsv folder
Contains the GPS Memory, Repeater List and Your !3 VoiceRec !2 yyyymmdd
(UR) call sign memory folders.
eeGpsMemory folder !4 VoiceTx !2 yyyymmdd
Stores the GPS Memory in the “csv” format to im-
port. (Example: Selecting the setting data)
rrRptList folder When the microSD card is inserted into the microSD card
Stores the Repeater List in the “csv” format to im- drive of the PC or the microSD card reader, the screen below
port. appears.
ttYourMemory folder
Stores the Your (UR) call sign memory in the “csv”
format to import.
yyGPS folder
GPS logging data is stored in the “log” format.
uuQsoLog Click
QSO log data is stored in the “csv” format.
iiReply folder
Automatic reply data is stored in the “wav” format.
ooRxLog
RX record log data is stored in the “csv” format.
!0 Setting folder
The transceiver’s setting data is stored in the “icf”
format.
Click
!1 Voice folder
The recorded QSO audio date folders are created in
the Voice folder.
!2 yyyymmdd folder
Recorded audio file is stored in the “wav” format.
The folder name is automatically created in the fol-
lowing format:
yyyymmdd (yyyy:Year, mm:month, dd:day)
!3 VoiceRec
The recorded Voice recorder audio date folders are Click
created in the VoiceRec folder.
!4 VoiceTx
Recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX function
is stored in the “wav” format.

The setting
data
2-12
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Backing up the data stored on the microSD card onto a PC (Continued)

DDMaking a backup file on your PC

Windows 7 is used for these instructions.
qqInsert the microSD card into the microSD card drive
on your PC.
• If no microSD card drive is built-in, connect a memory
card reader (purchase separately) and then insert the
microSD card into it. Click
wwClick the “Open folder to view files” option to access
the card.

eeSelect “Removable disk” and then right click.

rrClick “Copy.”

Click

Right click

ttOpen the desired folder to copy to, then right click,

and then click “Paste” to copy the data that is in the
microSD card onto the hard disk.
(Example: Copying into the “Backup” folder in C
drive) Click

yyWhen removing the microSD card from the PC, click

the microSD card icon in the task bar. (“ ” icon in Click
the screen shot as shown to the right.)
• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is
connected.

uuRemove the microSD card from the PC when “Safe

To Remove Hardware” appears.
• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is
connected.

2-13
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Importing or Exporting a CSV format file

Please read this section before importing or exporting a
Comma Separated Values (CSV) format file to or from
the microSD card.
You can import or export the following data:
• Your Call Sign Memory
• Repeater List
• GPS Memory

DDImporting
TIP: Before importing, make a backup file of all the
transceiver’s data to the microSD card in case of data
loss.
Example: Importing the Your Call sign memory.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > SD Card > Import/Export > Import > Your

Call Sign)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the CSV file to import.
(Example: Selecting “Your20161001_01”)
ttPush D-pad(Ent).
• “Import file?” appears.
yyPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• Starts to import.
• After importing ends, “COMPLETED! Reboot the ID-51.”
appears.
uuTo complete the importing, reboot the transceiver.

TIP: To import a Repeater List, see step t on page

2-10 for details.

NOTE: The transceiver cannot display a file that has a

file name longer than 16 characters.
In this case, rename it using 15 characters or less.
When you export the data in a CSV format file using
the CS-51PLUS2 (contained in the CD), make sure to
name it using 15 characters or less.

2-14
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Importing or Exporting a CSV format file (Continued)

DDExporting
You can export Your Call Sign Memory, Repeater List
and GPS Memory.

Example: Exporting the Your Call sign memory.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

( MENU > SD Card > Import/Export > Export > Your

Call Sign)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>.”
• The FILE NAME screen appears.
• The file name is automatically named in the following for-
mat; Your*yyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day,
xx: serial number)
*“Rpt” is displayed for a Repeater List, and “Gps” is dis-
played for a GPS memory.
• If you want to change the file name, see page 2-8 for
entry details.
ttPush D-pad(Ent).
• “Export file?” appears.
yyPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
•S  aves the data.
• While exporting, “EXPORTING” and a progress bar are
displayed.
•A  fter exporting ends, the EXPORT screen appears.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

[Overwriting a file]
➥➥Select the desired file to be overwritten in step e to
the left.

2-15
Previous view

Section 3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Front, top and side panels................................................... 3-2
■■ Function display................................................................... 3-5

3-1
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■Front, top and side panels

q
w

Function
e
display (p. 3-5)

r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
Speaker
Internal
microphone

q ANTENNA CONNECTOR (p. 1-2) u MENU • LOCK KEY [MENU ]

Connect the antenna here. ➥ Push to enter or exit the Menu screen.
• An optional AD-92SMA adapter (p. 18-3) is available to (p. 16-2)
connect an antenna with a BNC connector.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to toggle the Key
w TX/RX INDICATOR [TX/RX] (pp. 5-7, 5-11) Lock function ON or OFF. (p. 5-12)
Lights red while transmitting, lights green while re-
i MODE • SCAN KEY [MODE•SCAN]
ceiving a signal or when the squelch is open.
➥ Push to select the operating mode.
e PTT SWITCH [PTT] (p. 5-11) (p. 5-9)
Hold down to transmit, release to receive. •
Selectable operating modes are AM, FM,
For ID-51E only FM-N or DV.
Push briefly and release, then hold down to transmit ➥ Hold down for 1 second to enter the scan
a 1750 Hz tone burst. type selection mode. (pp. 13-5, 13-9)
• Push again to start the scan.
r CD (RX CALLSIGN DISPLAY)/D-PAD (LEFT) KEY •P  ush to stop the scan.
[CD]/D-pad()
➥ While in the DV mode, hold down for o MAIN • DUAL KEY [MAIN•DUAL]
1 second to open the received calls record. ➥ Push to toggle the main band between A
(p. 9-5) and B bands. (p. 5-3)
➥ While in the DR screen, or with the Menu ➥ Push and hold for 1 second to toggle the
screen or Quick Menu screen is displayed, Dualwatch function ON or OFF. (p. 5-3)
push to select an upper tier menu. (p. 16-2) !0 microSD CARD SLOT [micro SD]
t SQUELCH KEY [SQL] Insert a microSD card of up to 32 GB SDHC.
➥➥ Hold down to temporarily open the squelch and !1 ENTER KEY [ENT]
monitor the operating frequency. When the DR set screen, Menu screen or Quick
➥➥ While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to ad- Menu screen is displayed, push to set the selected
just the squelch level. (p. 5-8) item or option. (p. 16-2)
y POWER KEY [ ]
Hold down for 1 second to turn the transceiver power
ON or OFF. (p. 5-2)
3-2
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Front, top and side panels (Continued)

Function
display (p. 3-5)

!7

!6
!5
!4
!3
!2
Speaker
Internal
microphone

!2 DR (D-STAR REPEATER)/D-PAD (DOWN) KEY !6 MEMORY/CALL • SELECT MEMORY WRITE KEY
[DR]/D-pad() [M/CALL•S.MW]
➥ Hold down 1 second to display the DR ➥ In the VFO mode, push once to enter the
screen. (p. 8-3) Memory selection mode, push again to en-
➥ While in the DR screen, or with the Menu ter the Call channel mode. (p. 8-3)
screen or Quick Menu screen open, push For ID-51A only
to move the value or option selector bar In the Call channel mode, push once to
down. (p. 16-2) enter the Weather channel mode.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to enter the Select
!3 EXTERNAL DC IN JACK [DC IN]
Memory Write mode. (p. 12-4)
➥➥ 
Connects to the supplied battery charger (BC-
167S) to charge the attached battery pack. (p. 4-3) !7 VFO/MHz • CLEAR • OUTPUT POWER KEY
➥➥ Connect an external DC power source through [VFO/MHz•CLR•LOW]
the optional CP-12L or CP-19R cigarette lighter ➥P  ush to select the VFO mode. (p. 5-10)
cable or OPC-254L DC power cable for external ➥ While in the VFO mode, push to select
DC operation. (p. 4-6) 1 MHz or 10 MHz tuning steps. (p. 5-8)
➥ With the Menu screen or Quick Menu screen
!4 DATA JACK [DATA]
open, push to return to the operating mode
Connects to a PC through the optional data com-
before displaying the Menu screen. (p. 16-2)
munication cable, for data communication in the DV
➥ While in the Memory Name or Call Sign
mode, or for cloning. The jack is also used to connect
Programming mode, push to delete a char-
an external GPS receiver.
acter. (p. 12-11)
See page 9-14 or 17-17 for more details.
➥ While scanning, push to cancel a scan.
!5 QUICK MENU • SPEECH KEY [QUICK SPCH] (pp. 13-5, 13-9)
➥Push to enter or exit the Quick Menu ➥ Hold down for 1 second to select the out-
screen. (p. 5-6) put power. (p. 5-11)
• The Quick Menu is used to quickly select vari- • Select the transmit output power of High, Mid,
ous functions. Low2, Low1 or S-low.
➥
Hold down for 1 second to audibly an- • While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to
nounce the displayed frequency, operating select the desired output power.
mode or call sign. (p. 17-6)

3-3
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Front, top and side panels (Continued)

@2
@1

Function
display (p. 3-5)

@0

!9
!8

Speaker
Internal
microphone

!8 CS (CALL SIGN SELECT)/D-PAD (RIGHT) KEY @0 EXTERNAL MICROPHONE/SPEAKER JACK

[CS]/D-pad() [MIC/SP]
➥ Hold down for 1 second to enter the oper- 
Connect a cloning cable, optional speaker micro-
ating call sign select mode. phone or headset, if desired.
➥ While in the DR screen, or with the Menu See Section 18 for a list of available options.
screen or Quick Menu screen open, push TIP: Be sure to turn OFF the power before connect-
to select a lower tier menu. (p. 16-2) ing or disconnecting optional equipment to or from
!9 RXÚCS (RX CALL SIGN CAPTURE)/D-PAD (UP) the [MIC/SP] jack.
KEY [RXÚCS]/D-pad()
➥
While in the DV mode, hold down for @1 VOLUME CONTROL [VOL]
1 second to display the RX History list. Rotate to adjust the audio volume level. (p. 5-2)
When “[RX>CS] Key” item is set to “Call @2 CONTROL DIAL [DIAL]
Sign Capture,” the latest received call ➥➥ Rotate to select the operating frequency. (p. 5-8)
signs (station and repeaters) is set as the ➥➥ While in the Memory mode, rotate to select a
operating call signs after releasing this key. memory channel. (p. 12-3)
(p. 16-64) ➥➥ While scanning, rotate to change the scanning
• While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to direction. (p. 13-3)
select another call sign in RX History.
➥➥ Hold down [SQL], and rotate to adjust the squelch
When “[RX>CS] Key” item is set to “RX>CS level. (p. 5-8)
List,” you can select a call sign (station and ➥➥ While in the DR screen, or with the Menu screen
repeaters) from the RX History list. or Quick Menu screen open, rotate to select a de-
➥ While in the DR screen, or with the Menu sired option or value.
screen or Quick Menu screen open, push
to move the value or option selector bar up.
(p. 16-2)

3-4
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■Function display
e t
q w r y u io !0

BC Radio setting pop-up

window (Tuning mode)

Dual band display

Single band display

q BATTERY
ᐜ㔞⾲♧ ICON t DUPLEX ICON (p. 15-5)
➥➥ Shows the capacity of the attached battery pack “DUP+” appears when plus duplex is selected, and
in four levels. (p. 4-2) “DUP–” appears when minus duplex is selected.
Icon Battery status y BC RADIO ICON (p. 6-2)
The battery has sufficient capacity. Appears when the BC radio is ON.
The battery is exhausted a little.
u GPS/GPS ALARM ICON
The battery is nearing exhaustion.
➥➥ Appears while GPS function is in use. (p. 10-2)
The battery is almost fully exhausted.
Stays ON when the GPS receiver is activated and
➥➥ “ ” appears when the optional battery case is valid position data is received.
඘㟁⾲♧
attached. (p. 4-4)  Blinks when invalid position data is being re-
ceived.
w VOX ICON (p. 18-6)
• GPS icons can be turned OFF in the Menu screen.
Appears when the optional headset is connected (p. 16-33)
with the OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable, and the ➥➥ “S” blinks instead of the GPS icon, when the
VOX function is ON. GPS alarm beeps. (p. 10-21)
e OPERATING MODE ICONS (p. 5-9) i RECORD ICON (p. 11-2)
Shows the selected operating mode. Appears while recording.
•D  V, AM, FM and FM-N are selectable.
• “ ” appears while the transceiver is recording.
• “DV-A” or “DV-G” appears when D-PRS (DV-A) or NMEA
• “ ” appears while the recording is paused.
(DV-G) transmission is selected in the DV mode. (p. 10-
31) o microSD ICON (Section 2)
➥➥ “ ” appears when a microSD card is inserted.
r EMR/BK/PACKET LOSS/AUTO REPLY ICON
➥➥ “ ” and “ ” alternately blinks while accessing the
➥➥ “EMR” appears when the Enhanced Monitor Re-
microSD card.
quest (EMR) mode is selected. (p. 9-8)
➥➥ “BK” appears when the Break-in (BK) mode is se- !0AUTO POWER OFF ICON (p. 16-93)
lected. (p. 9-7) Appears when the Auto power OFF function is ON.
➥➥ “L” appears when Packet Loss has occurred.
(p. 9-14)
➥➥ “ ” appears when the Automatic Reply function
is selected. (p. 9-11)

3-5
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Function display (Continued)

!1
!2

BC Radio setting pop-up

window (Tuning mode)

Dual band display

Single band display

!1 TONE ICONS
 While operating in the FM or FM-N mode: • D-TSQL (“D” blinks):
(pp. 17-13, 17-15) When you transmit, the selected DTCS
• TONE: Enables the subaudible tone encoder. code is superimposed on your normal
• TSQLS:  Enables the tone squelch with the signal.
Pocket Beep function.  When you receive, the tone squelch
• TSQL: Enables the Tone Squelch function. opens only for a signal that includes
• DTCSS:  Enables the DTCS squelch with the a matching tone frequency. (Audio is
Pocket Beep function. heard)
• DTCS: Enables the DTCS Squelch function. • T-TSQL (“T” blinks):
• TSQL-R:  Enables the Reverse Tone Squelch When you transmit, the selected sub-
function. audible tone is superimposed on your
• DTCS-R:  Enables the Reverse DTCS Squelch normal signal.
function.  When you receive, the tone squelch
• DTCS (“DTCS” blinks): opens only for a signal that includes
When you transmit, the selected DTCS a matching tone frequency. (Audio is
code is superimposed on your normal heard)
signal. While operating in the DV mode: (pp. 9-20, 9-21)
When you receive, the function is OFF. • DSQLS: Enables the Digital Call Sign squelch
• T-DTCS (“T” blinks): function with the Pocket Beep function.
When you transmit, the selected sub- • DSQL: Enables the Digital Call Sign squelch
audible tone is superimposed on your function.
normal signal. • CSQLS: Enables the Digital Code squelch func-
When you receive, the DTCS squelch tion with the Pocket Beep function.
opens only for a signal that includes a • CSQL: Enables the Digital Code squelch func-
matching DTCS code and polarity. (Au- tion.
dio is heard) !2 CLOCK DISPLAY (p. 16-92)
Displays the current time.

3-6
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Function display (Continued)

@3 !3

@2
!4
@1 !5 BC Radio setting pop-up
!6 window (Tuning mode)
@0 !7
!9 !8

Dual band display

Single band display

!3 PRIORITY WATCH ICON (p. 14-5) !9 S/RF METER

Appears when Priority Watch is in use. ➥➥ Shows the relative signal strength of the receive
signal.
!4 WEATHER ALERT ICON (p. 5-14)
➥➥ Shows the output power level of the transmit signal.
Appears when the Weather alert function is ON.
(p. 5-11)
!5 ATTENUATOR ICON (p. 5-12)
@0 POWER ICONS (p. 5-11)
Appears when the attenuator is ON in the AIR band.
➥➥ “SLO” appears when S-low power is selected.
!6 SKIP ICON (pp. 13-7, 13-8) ➥➥ “LO1” appears when low 1 power is selected.
➥➥ “SKIP” appears when the selected memory chan- ➥➥ “LO2” appears when low 2 power is selected.
nel is set as a Skip channel. ➥➥ “MID” appears when mid power is selected.
➥➥ “PSKIP” appears when the displayed frequency ➥➥ No icon appears when high power is selected.
is set as a Skip frequency in the Memory mode.
@1 MEMORY NAME DISPLAY (p. 12-12)
➥➥ “PSKIP” appears while the Frequency Skip Scan
While in the Memory mode, the programmed mem-
function is ON in the VFO mode.
ory or memory bank name is displayed.
!7 MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER
@2 FREQUENCY READOUT
➥➥ Displays the selected memory channel or bank
number. (p. 12-3) Displays a variety of information, such as the operat-
ing frequency, menu contents and so on.
➥➥ “C0” to “C3” appears when the Call channel is se-
• The decimal point blinks during a scan.
lected. (p. 12-3)
@3 MAIN BAND ICON (p. 5-3)
!8 MEMORY ICON (p. 12-3)
Shows the selected band (A or B) is the Main band.
Appears when the Memory mode is selected.
➥➥ Shows the selected band (A or B) is the Main
band.
➥➥ “ TM” appears while in the Terminal mode.
➥➥ “ AP” appears while in the Access Point mode.
TIP: See “About the DV Gateway function” that can be
downloaded from the Icom website, for details.

3-7
Previous view

Section 4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■ Battery information.............................................................. 4-2
DD Battery life....................................................................... 4-2
DD Battery icon .................................................................... 4-2
■■ Charging through the [DC IN] jack....................................... 4-3
DD Battery icon..................................................................... 4-3
DD Charging note.................................................................. 4-3
■■ Optional battery case.......................................................... 4-4
DD Battery life....................................................................... 4-4
DD About the battery replacement........................................ 4-4
■■ Charging with the optional desktop charger........................ 4-5
DD Charging note.................................................................. 4-5
■■ External DC power operation.............................................. 4-6
DD Operating note................................................................. 4-6

4-1
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Battery information
DDBattery life
The approximate battery life (operating time) as shown The approximate battery life:
to the right is calculated under the following assump- Battery pack FM mode DV mode
tions: BP-271 4.5 hours 4.5 hours
• Power save setting: Auto (Short) BP-272 8 hours 7 hours
• Duty cycle: TX : RX : Stand-by = 1 : 1: 8 (based on
operating style)

TIP: See page 4-4 for the optional BP-273 battery

case battery life.

DDBattery icon
ᐜ㔞⾲♧
The “ ” battery icon appears when the BP-271 or Icon Battery condition
BP-272 Li-ion battery pack is attached to the trans-
ceiver. The battery has sufficient capacity.
The battery is exhausted a little.
NOTE:
• When the BP-273 battery case is attached to the The battery is nearing exhaustion. Charg-
transceiver, the battery icon cannot display the bat- ing is necessary. (The transceiver can be
tery capacity of the alkaline batteries. The battery operated for a short time.)
icon stays “ ,” and it does not reflect with the true The battery is almost fully exhausted.
඘㟁⾲♧
battery capacity. Charging is necessary. (The transceiver
• Without disconnecting the battery charger or ex- quickly becomes impossible to operate.)
ternal DC power, the battery icon does not appear
when turning power ON after charging is completed.

4-2
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Charging through the [DC IN] jack

Prior to using the transceiver for the first time, the bat-
tery pack must be fully charged for optimum life and
operation.
BE SURE to turn OFF the power while charging with
the supplied battery charger. Otherwise the attached
battery pack cannot be charged. (see page 4-6 for de-
tails)

DDBattery icon
While charging, the charging icon “ ” sequentially
shows eleven level steps along with the word “Charg-
ing...”.
The icon disappears when the battery pack is com-
pletely charged.

While charging

DDCharging note
• When using the supplied battery charger (BC-167S), • Charging period: BP-271 approximately 3.0 hours
be sure to turn OFF the transceiver power. Otherwise BP-272 approximately 4.5 hours
the battery pack will not be charged completely, or it
will take much longer to charge.
Transceiver • BC-167S
• When using an optional CP-12L, CP-19R or OPC-
254L, the battery pack can be charged with the
power ON. But by default, the battery pack cannot be
to AC outlet
charged with the power ON, so you should turn OFF
The BC-167SA,
the power before charging. (p. 16-79) BC-167SD and
• Even if rechargeable batteries, Ni-Cd or Ni-MH, are BC-167SV have
installed in the optional BP-273 battery case, they • CP-12L (Optional) different shapes.
cannot be charged.
to
[DC IN]
BE SURE to replace the battery pack with a new one
approximately five years after manufacturing, even if to cigarette lighter
it still holds a charge. The material inside the battery socket (12 V DC)
BP-271
cells will become weak after a period of time, even • CP-19R (Optional)
with little use. The estimated number of times you can Turn OFF the power
while charging the
charge the pack is between 300 and 500. Even when battery pack.
the pack appears to be fully charged, the operating
time of the transceiver may become short when:
• Approximately five years have passed since the pack • OPC-254L (Optional)
was manufactured.
• The pack has been repeatedly charged. to 12 V DC
(power source)

Black: _

White: +

BE SURE to attach the battery pack

before connecting the DC cable.

4-3
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Optional battery case

When using the BP-273 battery case, install three AA DDBattery life
(LR6) size alkaline batteries, as described below. The approximate battery life (operating time) as shown
below is calculated under the following assumptions;
qqRemove the battery case if it is attached. (p. 1-2) • Power save setting: Auto (Short)
wwInstall three AA (LR6) size alkaline batteries. • Duty cycle: TX : RX : Stand-by = 1 : 1: 8 (based on
• Install only alkaline batteries. operating style)
• Be sure to observe the correct polarity.
eeAttach the battery case. (p. 1-2)
FM mode DV mode
Approx. 7.5 hrs. Approx. 7 hrs.

NOTE:
• The battery life may differ, depending on the operat-
ing style or the installed alkaline batteries.
• The batteries may seem to have low capacity when
used in low temperatures, such as –10°C (+14°F) or
below. Keep the batteries warm in this case.
TIP: A built-in step-up converter in the BP-273 in-
creases the voltage to 5.5 V DC.
Approximately 100 mW of output power is possi-
ble with the BP-273 operation. Also, the transmit
DDAbout the battery replacement
When the alkaline batteries are almost exhausted,
output power selection is disabled.
“LOW BATTERY”
ᐜ㔞⾲♧is displayed and the battery icon
starts to blink. After 10 seconds, the transceiver power
CAUTION: is automatically turned OFF.
• When installing batteries, make sure they are all the In that case, replace all batteries with new alkaline bat-
same brand, type and capacity. Also, do not mix new teries.
and old batteries together.
• Keep the battery terminals clean. It’s a good idea to TIP: When the BP-273 battery case is attached to
occasionally clean them. the transceiver, the battery icon cannot display the
• Never incinerate used battery cells since the internal battery capacity of the alkaline batteries. The battery
battery gas may cause them to rupture. icon stays “ ,” and it does not reflect with the true
• Never expose a detached battery case to water. If ඘㟁⾲♧
battery capacity.
the battery case gets wet, be sure to wipe it dry be-
fore using it.
• Never use batteries whose insulated covering is
damaged.
• Remove the alkaline batteries when battery case is
not used. Otherwise the installed alkaline batteries
will exhausted due to built-in step-up converter.

4-4
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Charging with the optional desktop charger

The optional BC-202 rapidly charges of the BP-271 • Charging time: BP-271 approximately 2.0 hours
and BP-272 Li-ion battery packs. BP-272 approximately 3.5 hours

DDCharging note Transceiver

(with battery pack)
• Be sure to turn OFF the transceiver power. Battery pack
When the transceiver power cannot be turned OFF, Power Adapter
(A different type, or
detach the battery pack from the transceiver. Then no power adapter is
charge the battery pack by itself, or charge the bat- supplied, depending
on the version.)
tery using regular charging. Otherwise the battery
pack will not be charged (the charging indicator on
the BC-202 blinks orange about 10 second after the Turn OFF the power
battery pack is installed in BC-202).
• The BC-202 desktop charger can only charge BP- BC-202 (optional)
271 or BP-272 Li-ion battery packs. Other types of Desktop charger
rechargeable batteries, Ni-Cd or Ni-MH cannot be
charged.
Screws*
• If the charging indicator blinks orange, there may be (Self tapping screws:
a problem with the battery pack or charger. If this oc- 3.5 × at least 30 mm)
curs, try charging the battery pack alone, without the *Purchase separately.
Using screws is
transceiver, or try using the standard (non-rapid) char- recommended to
The optional OPC-515L
ger. Contact your dealer if you have problems charg- (for DC power source) secure the charger.
ing a new battery pack. or CP-23L (for 12 V Charging indicator
cigarette lighter socket) • Lights orange : While charging
• NEVER place the transceiver with the battery pack can be used instead of • Lights green : Charging is completed
to the desktop charger when the transceiver is con- the power adapter. • Blinks orange : A charging error has
nected to the DC power source. This may cause the occurred
charger’s malfunction and the charging indicator of
the charger lights red. In that case, disconnect the
power adapter from the charger, and then reconnect IMPORTANT: Battery charging caution
the power adapter to the charger. Ensure the guide rails on the battery pack are cor-
• The optional CP-23L and OPC-515L can be used in- rectly aligned with the tabs inside the charger.
stead of the supplied power adapter. Connect one of
these to the [DC 12-16V] jack.
Guide rail

CAUTION: When using the OPC-515L DC power ca-

ble, NEVER connect the OPC-515L to a power source
using reverse polarity. This will ruin the battery char-
ger. White line: + Black line: –

NOTE: If the charging indicator blinks orange for 10 Tabs

seconds or more with the battery pack installed in the

transceiver, try charging the BP-271 alone. You can
also try regular charging the BP-271 attached to the
transceiver.

4-5
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■External DC power operation

An optional CP-12L or CP-19R cigarette lighter cable, Transceiver
for a 12 V cigarette lighter socket, or an OPC-254L ex- • CP-12L (Optional)
ternal DC power cable can be used for external power.
The attached battery pack will not be charged while op-
erating the transceiver if “Charging (Power ON)” is set
to the factory default setting. If the setting is set to ON in
the MENU screen, the battery pack can be charged. to a cigarette lighter
socket (12 V DC)
• The external DC power source voltage must be between • CP-19R (Optional)
10~16 V, and the current capacity must be more than 2.5 A
to
to charge the battery pack when operating.
[DC IN]

qqConnect the DC cable as shown to the right.

wwPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen. BP-271
eeP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Function), • OPC-254L (Optional)
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
to a 12 V DC
D-pad (power source)
(Ent)
() Black: _

( MENU > Function > Charging (Power ON)) White: +

rrRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D- BE SURE to attach the battery pack
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last before connecting the DC cable.
screen is displayed.
ttPush D-pad() to select “ON.” • “Charging (Power ON)” setting screen
• OFF : The transceiver cannot be charged when the power
is ON.
• ON : The transceiver can be charged even if the power
is ON.

TIP: When the transceiver power is ON, the battery

icon sequentially shows “ ,” “ ,” “ ” and “
” while charging, and the icon disappears when the
battery pack is completely charged.
NOTE: Up to 5 W (approximately) of maximum out-
put power is possible when using external DC power.
However, when the supply voltage exceeds 14 V, the
built-in protection circuit activates to reduce the trans-
mit output power to approximately 2.5 W.

DDOperating note
• The power source voltage must be between 10.0~ • The power save function is automatically deactivated
16.0 V DC. when using an external DC power source.
NEVER CONNECT OVER 16 V DC directly into the [DC • Be sure to observe the correct polarity of the OPC-
IN] jack of the transceiver. 254L supply connection.
• BE SURE to use a CP-12L, CP-19R or OPC-254L • When external power is used, the power save func-
when connecting a regulated 12 V DC power source. tion is automatically turned OFF.
Use an external DC-DC converter to connect the transceiv- • ID-51A/E’s charging circuit may generate certain
er through an optional CP-12L, CP-19R or OPC-254L to a spurious signals; the S-meter appears, or noise may
24 V DC power source. be heard.
• The voltage of the external power source must be When you operate the transceiver while charging, and
between 10~16 V DC when using either CP-12L, CP- if you cannot receive signals correctly, set “Charging
19R or OPC-254L, otherwise, use the battery pack. (Power ON)” in the MENU screen to OFF.
• Disconnect the power cables from the transceiver
when not using it. Otherwise, the vehicle battery will
become exhausted.
4-6
Previous view

Section 5 BASIC OPERATION

■■ Power ON............................................................................ 5-2
■■ Adjusting the audio level...................................................... 5-2
■■ Dualwatch operation............................................................ 5-3
DD MAIN band selection....................................................... 5-3
DD Single watch operation.................................................... 5-3
DD Audio mute during Dualwatch operation.......................... 5-4
DD Setting the volume for Dualwatch.................................... 5-5
■■ Selecting the operating band............................................... 5-6
■■ Selecting a tuning step........................................................ 5-7
DD Tuning step selection....................................................... 5-7
■■ Setting a frequency............................................................. 5-8
■■ Setting the squelch level...................................................... 5-8
■■ Selecting the operating mode.............................................. 5-9
■■ Monitor function................................................................... 5-9
■■ Selecting the Mode............................................................ 5-10
DD VFO mode..................................................................... 5-10
DD Memory/Call channel/Weather channel mode.............. 5-10
DD DR (D-STAR Repeater) function................................... 5-10
■■ Transmitting....................................................................... 5-11
DD About transmit power levels.......................................... 5-11
■■ Key Lock function.............................................................. 5-12
■■ ATT (AIR) function............................................................. 5-12
■■ Band Scope function......................................................... 5-13
DD Sweep operation........................................................... 5-13
■■ Weather channel operation
(USA version transceivers only)........................................ 5-14
DD Weather channel selection............................................ 5-14
DD Weather alert function................................................... 5-14

5-1
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Turning ON power
➥➥Hold down [ ] for 1 second to turn ON power.
•H  old down [ ] for 1 second to turn OFF power.
• After the opening message and power source voltage
are displayed, the operating frequency or repeater name
appears.

TIP: The opening message and power source volt-

age display options can be turned ON or OFF in the
Display menu.
When “JA3YUA/ID51” is set as
(MENU > Display > Opening Message) (p. 16-84)
your own (MY) call sign and note.
(MENU > Display > Voltage (Power ON)) (p. 16-84)

[ ]

■■Adjusting the audio level

➥➥Rotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.
• If the squelch is closed, hold down [SQL] while adjusting
the audio level.
• The display shows the volume level while adjusting.

TIP: The beep level is adjusted in the Sounds menu.

(MENU > Sounds > Beep Level) (p. 16-89)

[VOL] Volume level display

No audio

Maximum audio
5-2
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Dualwatch operation
The ID-51A/E has two independent operating bands, A Frequency range on the A/B bands:
band and B band. 108.000 MHz to 174.000 MHz
The transceiver can simultaneously monitor two fre- 380.000 MHz to 479.000 MHz
quencies, on A band and B band. This is called the Du-
alwatch. In the Dualwatch mode, the display shows A • Some frequency ranges may be blocked, depending on the
transceiver’s version.
band in the upper half and B band in the lower half.

DDMAIN band selection

You can make a call only on the MAIN band.
Band selection, operating frequency input using [DIAL],
operating mode selection, Memory channel selection,
memory write and band scope function can be made
on the MAIN band.
Upper: A band
➥➥Push [MAIN] to alternately select the upper band
(A band) or lower band (B band) as the MAIN band.
• “MAIN” appears on the MAIN band. Lower: B band

DDSingle watch operation

You can select the Single watch operation by turning
OFF Dualwatch.
During Single watch operation, the display shows only
the MAIN band.

➥➥Hold down [DUAL] for 1 second to toggle be-

tween the Dualwatch and Single watch operation.
➥➥Push [MAIN] to alternately select A band or B
band as the MAIN band.

Single watch operation Dualwatch operation

(Dualwatch OFF) (Dualwatch ON)

Selecting A band Selecting upper half as MAIN band

MAIN band
(A band)
Hold down

SUB band
(B band)

Push Push

SUB band
(A band)
Hold down

MAIN band
(B band)

Selecting B band Selecting lower half as MAIN band

5-3
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■ Dualwatch operation (Continued)

DDAudio mute during Dualwatch operation
Dualwatch operation simultaneously monitors two fre- ❍ SUB band mute status
quencies. MAIN band SUB band
The ID-51A/E has two independent receiver circuits, A DV mode
band and B band. DV mode
FM-N mode
Depending on the operating band or mode, as shown DV mode
to the right, the SUB band audio signal is muted. In FM-N mode
FM-N mode
such case, “ ” appears.
During Dualwatch operation, the audio output may be AIR band AIR band
interrupted when the frequency is changed while scan-
ning, or by other factors.
Example: MAIN band is in the FM-N mode.
SUB band is in the DV mode.

MAIN band

SUB band

Appears when the SUB band

audio signal is muted.

A/B band selection in the DR screen

The DR screen can be displayed on A band (upper)
or B band (lower).
When the DR screen is displayed on A band, and the
DR screen is selected in B band, the previously dis-
played frequency or memory before entering the DR
screen is displayed on A band.

• Display image of the DR screen

DR screen

A A
ba ba
nd nd
B
B ba
ba nd
nd

5-4
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■ Dualwatch operation (Continued)

DDSetting the volume for Dualwatch
The volume setting for Dualwatch can be simultane-
ously set for both bands or separately for each band, in
the MENU screen.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Sounds), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

( MENU > Sounds > Volume Select)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired option.
• All: The audio output level for the BC
Radio, A band and B band are ad-
justed at the same time.
• BC Radio Separate: The audio output level for the BC
Radio is independently adjusted.
The audio output level for A band
and B band are adjusted at the
same time.
• Separate: The audio output level for the BC
Radio, A band and B band are inde-
pendently adjusted.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

When “All” or “BC Radio Separate” is selected:

➥➥Rotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.
• The audio output levels for A band and B band are ad-
justed at the same time:

When “Separate” is selected:

qqPush [MAIN] for 1 second to select A band or B
band for the MAIN band.
wwRotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.
• You can adjust the audio output level of the selected
band.
For example, even if you adjust the audio output level for
A band, B band’s audio level stays at the original level.

[VOL]

5-5
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the operating band

The transceiver can receive the AIR, 144 MHz or 430
MHz bands.
You can transmit on only the 144 MHz and 430 MHz
bands.

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode, if neces-

sary.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Band Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select the desired frequency

band.
•
Selectable frequency bands differ, depending on the
transceiver version. See the specifications for details.
(p. 19-2)
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save the setting and exit the
Quick Menu screen.

AIR band
144 MHz band
430 MHz band

5-6
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the tuning step

The following tuning steps are selectable. (kHz)
5.0 6.25 8.33* 10.0 12.5 15.0 20.0
25.0 30.0 50.0 100.0 125.0 200.0
*Appears only when the AIR band is selected.

When 10 kHz tuning steps

is selected, the frequency
changes in the 10 kHz steps.

DDTuning step selection

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TS,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select the desired tuning step.

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to save the setting and exit the
Quick Menu screen.

5-7
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Setting a frequency Blinks

qqWhen the VFO mode is selected, push [V/MHz]

to select the 1 MHz or 10 MHz Quick Tuning function
step, or turn it OFF.
• When the 1 MHz step is selected, the frequency changes in
1 MHz steps.
• When the 10 MHz step is selected, the frequency changes
in 10 MHz steps.
wwRotate [DIAL] to set the desired frequency.
• The frequency changes according to the selected tuning
steps. See page 5-7 for details.
When the frequency changes
in 1 MHz steps.
[DIAL]
Blinks

When the frequency changes

in 10 MHz steps.

■■Setting the squelch level

The squelch function mutes the noise or received au-
dio signal, depending on the signal strength and the
squelch control setting.

➥➥While holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] to select the

squelch level.
• While holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] one click to dis-
play the squelch level.
• “LEVEL1” is loose squelch (for weak signals) and “LEV-
EL9” is tight squelch (for strong signals). Automatic squelch
• “AUTO” automatically adjusts the level using a noise
pulse counting system.
• “OPEN” keeps the squelch open. (This option is not se-
lectable in the DV mode.)

[DIAL]

[SQL]
Maximum level

NOTE: An independent squelch level can be set for

the A band and B band.
You can set the MAIN band’s squelch level.

5-8
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the operating mode

AM mode is selected
Operating modes are determined by the modulation
of the transceiver signals. The transceiver’s operating
modes are AM, FM, FM-N and DV.

➥➥Push [MODE] one or more times to select the

operating mode.
• The AM mode can be used for only the AIR band (108.000
MHz to 136.995 MHz) and AM BC radio (0.520 MHz ~
1.710 MHz). FM mode is selected
• When the GPS TX Mode is selected, “DV-G” or “DV-A”
appears instead of “DV.” (p. 10-31)

FM-N mode is selected

DV mode is selected

■■Monitor function
Using this function, you can listen to weak signals with-
out disturbing the squelch setting, or having to manu-
ally open the squelch, even when using mute functions
such as tone squelch.

➥➥Hold down [SQL] to monitor the operating frequen-

cy.
• The 1st segment of the S-meter blinks.

TIP: The [SQL] key can be set to ‘sticky’ operation in

the Function menu.
(MENU > Function > Monitor) (p. 16-73) The first segment
blinks

[SQL]

5-9
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the Mode

DDVFO mode
The VFO mode is used to set the operating frequen- VFO mode
cies.
Push to select
qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. DR function
Memory mode
• In the VFO mode, push [V/MHz] then rotate [DIAL] to Hold down Call channel mode
change the frequency in 1 MHz steps. Or push [V/MHz]
WX channel* mode
again for 10 MHz steps.
to select Push
wwRotate [DIAL] to set the operating frequency.
to alternately select

DDMemory/Call channel/
• VFO mode
Weather channel* mode
• Memory mode
The Memory mode is used to operate on Memory
channels, which stores various operating parameters.
• Call channel mode
Call channels are used to quickly recall most-often
used operating channels.
• Weather channel mode*
Weather channels are used to monitor weather broad- • Memory mode
casts from the NOAA (National Oceanographic and At-
mospheric Administration).

qqIn the VFO mode, push [M/CALL] to select the

Memory mode.
• “ ” and the selected Memory channel number appear. Appears
wwIf desired, push [M/CALL] again to select the
Call channel mode, and then push again to select
• Call channel mode
the Weather channel mode.
•The Memory mode, Call channel mode and Weather
channel mode* are alternately selected.
• While in the Call channel mode, the selected Call chan-
nel number (“C0” to “C3”) appears.
• While in the Weather channel mode*, the selected weath-
er channel number (“WX-01” to “WX-10”) appears. Appears
eeRotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel.
• Only programmed Memory channels can be selected.
• See page 12-4 for memory entry details. • Weather channel mode*

*Appears in only the USA version transceivers.

DDDR (D-STAR Repeater) function

The DR (D-STAR Repeater) function is used for D-
STAR repeater operation. With this function, you can
easily select the programmed repeaters and UR call • DR screen
signs by rotating [DIAL].
See sections 7 to 9, or Basic manual for details of the
D-STAR operation with the DR function.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired access repeater.

5-10
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Transmitting
CAUTION: Transmitting without an antenna will dam- R WARNING! NEVER transmit for long periods of time.
age the transceiver. During prolonged transmissions at high power or mid
power, the transceiver radiates heat to protect itself
NOTE: To prevent interfering, hold down [SQL] to lis- from overheating. The transceiver’s chassis will be-
ten on the channel before transmitting. come hot and may cause a burn.
• To prevent overheating, the default setting of the time-out
timer function is set to 5 minutes (p. 16-75). Be careful
qqSet the operating frequency. (p. 5-8) when the time-out timer function is turned OFF, or set to a
• You can transmit only when the 144 MHz or 430 MHz
long time period, and you transmit for long periods.
amateur band is selected on the MAIN band.
wwRepeatedly hold down [LOW] for 1 second to DO NOT operate the transceiver where heat dissipa-
set the transmit output power to S-Low, Low1, Low2, tion will be obstructed if the transceiver is also being
Mid or High to suit your operating requirements. charged with an external power source. Poor heat dis-
• Or while holding down [LOW] , rotate [DIAL] left or sipation may cause a burn, warp the casing or dam-
right to select the output power. age the transceiver.
• Lower output power during short-range communications
may reduce the possibility of interference to other sta- NOTE: When the transceiver becomes hot, the trans-
tions, and will conserve battery power. ceiver’s heat protection function gradually reduces
• “SLO”/“LO1”/ “LO2”/“MID” appears when S-low/low 1/low the output power to approximately 2.5 watts, then it
2/mid power is selected. stops transmission after that. This is done to protect
•N  o icon appears when high power is selected. the transceiver itself until it can cool down.
eeHold down [PTT] to transmit.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red. CONNECT to only the rated voltage range when us-
• The S/RF meter displays the output power level. ing an external power source.
rrSpeak at your normal voice level.
• Holding the transceiver too close to your mouth or speak-
ing too loudly may distort your speech.
ttRelease [PTT] to receive. TX/RX
indicator [DIAL]

[PTT]

Microphone

DDAbout transmit power levels

• Transmit power level display
❍ When an external DC power cable (13.5 V DC) is
connected, or a BP-271/BP-272 is used: High power (5 W)
5 W (High), 2.5 W (Mid), 1.0 W (Low2),
0.5 W (Low1), 0.1 W (S-Low) (approximately)
Mid power (2.5 W)
❍ When the BP-273 is used:
Approximately 0.1 W (S-LOW) (fixed) Low2 power (1.0 W)

NOTE: When using the BP-273 battery case, “SLO,”

“LO1,” “LO2,” “MID” or no icon (high power) appears Low1 power (0.5 W)
on the display by holding down [LOW] for 1 sec-
ond. But “SLO” appears while transmitting, and the
S-Low power (0.1 W)
output power is limited to approximately 0.1 watts.

5-11
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Key Lock function

Activate to prevent accidental frequency changes and
unnecessary function access.
➥➥Hold down [LOCK] for 1 second to turn the Key
Lock function ON or OFF.
• When the Key Lock function is ON and the locked key or
dial is pushed or rotated, “LOCK ON” appears.
• [ ], [LOCK] , [PTT], [SQL] and [VOL] can be used
while the lock function is ON. The function is ON

TIP: Either or both the squelch control and volume

control can also be locked in the Function menu.
(MENU > Function > Key Lock) (p. 16-75)

The function is OFF

■■ATT (AIR) function

The attenuator reduces signal levels to prevent audio
distortion. This is useful when the transceiver receives
a very strong air band signal, or it is in very strong elec-
tromagnetic fields such as from a broadcasting station
near your location.
The attenuation is about 30 dB, and usable only in the
AIR band.
qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “ATT (AIR),” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “30dB.”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to set, and exit the Quick Menu
screen.
• “ATT” appears.

5-12
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Band Scope function

The Band Scope function allows you to visually check a spec- About the sweep steps: The specified tuning step (in VFO
ified frequency range around the center frequency. mode) or programmed tuning step (in memory mode) is
used during a sweep. If the tuning step is set to wide, the
present signal may not be displayed (may be skipped),
Example: The tuning step is set to 10 kHz, and a even if it is strong signal. Thus we recommend to set the
strong signal is received on 146.060 MHz. tuning step to 20 kHz or less to use the Band Scope func-
Strong level tion. See page 5-7 for Tuning step selection details.

TIP:
• For the single watch operation within the 144 MHz or 430
Weak level MHz band, the displayed frequency’s audio can be heard
The signal on the during a sweep.
146.060 MHz
- In the AIR band, the displayed frequency’s audio can-
Band Scope display
not be heard during a sweep, even if the single watch
Center frequency (Example: 146.010 MHz)
operation is selected.
Sweep marker • The audio output during a sweep can be turned OFF in
the MENU screen.
MENU > Sounds > Scope AF Output (p. 16-91)

DDSweep operation Example: Continuous sweep on 146.010 MHz

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad(E) to select “Band Scope,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad($) to select the option between “Single

Sweep” and “Continuous Sweep.”
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to return to the frequency display
and start sweeping.
• A single Sweep checks the specified frequency range
only one time.
• A continuous Sweep repeatedly checks the specified fre-
quency range.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to stop sweeping and push again to
restart it.
• When the sweeping stops, rotate [DIAL] to move the
sweep marker to a detected signal; you can hear the sig-
nal audio.
• When the sweeping stops, push [CLR] to cancel the
Band Scope function.

While continuously
sweeping

When the sweeping stops,

rotate [DIAL] to move the
sweep marker to a detect-
ed signal. Depending on
the presetting, you may
hear the signal audio.

5-13
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Weather channel operation (USA version transceivers only)

You can listen to NOAA (National Oceanographic and
Atmospheric Administration) weather broadcasts on
one of 10 weather channels.

DDWeather channel selection

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Weather channel mode
weather channel mode.
• “WX” and the weather channel number appear.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the desired weather chan-
nel.
eePush [V/MHz] or [M/CALL] to return to the
previous frequency or Memory channel.

[DIAL]

DDWeather alert function

NOAA broadcast stations transmit weather alert tones
When the alert signal is detected
before important weather announcements.
When the weather alert function is turned ON, the se-
lected weather channel is monitored every 5 seconds
for the announcement.
When the alert signal is detected, “ALT” and the WX
channel number are alternately displayed, and a beep
tone sounds, until the transceiver is operated.
The previously selected (used) weather channel is
checked periodically during standby or while scanning.

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad(E) to select “Weather Alert,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “ON” or “OFF.”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to save the setting and exit the
Quick Menu screen.
ttSet the desired standby mode.
• “WX” appears when “ON” is selected in step e.
• Select the VFO, a Memory or Call channel.
• Scan or priority watch operation can also be selected.

5-14
Previous view

Section 6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation.................................................................... 6-2
DD Description...................................................................... 6-2
DD Turning ON the BC Radio................................................ 6-2
DD Listening to the BC Radio while monitoring
two ham bands................................................................ 6-3
DD Selecting the BC radio mode........................................... 6-3
DD Selecting the bank in the Memory bank mode.................. 6-4
DD Selecting the AM/FM radio mode.................................... 6-5
DD Searching for a BC Radio signal..................................... 6-5
DD Using the Attenuator function.......................................... 6-6
DD Setting the squelch level.................................................. 6-7
DD Using the Monitor function............................................... 6-7
DD Setting a tuning step (AM Only)...................................... 6-8
■■ Adding or editing a BC Radio memory................................ 6-9
DD Using the BC Radio Memory........................................... 6-9
DD Add a BC Radio memory................................................ 6-9
DD Deleting a BC Radio memory........................................ 6-12
DD Editing a BC radio memory........................................... 6-13
DD Rearranging the display order of the
BC Radio memory......................................................... 6-14
■■ Skip setting for the BC radio memory................................ 6-15
■■ Using the BC Radio Mode................................................. 6-16
■■ BC Radio settings.............................................................. 6-17
DD FM Antenna................................................................... 6-17
DD Power Save (BC Radio)................................................. 6-17
DD Auto Mute...................................................................... 6-18
DD Volume Select............................................................... 6-19
DD BC Radio Level.............................................................. 6-20

6-1
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Basic operation
DDDescription
You can listen to AM or FM radio broadcast (BC).
When the transceiver is set to amateur frequencies on Frequency range for the BC Radio
the MAIN band and SUB band, you can still listen to the FM 76.0 MHz* to 108.0 MHz
AM or FM radio on the pop up window.
AM 520 kHz to 1710 kHz
Up to 50 BC Radio memory channels can be pro-
grammed into each bank for easy memory manage- *The usable frequency range differs, according to the trans-
ment. ceiver's version.
You can standby listening to the BC Radio. Also, the
transceiver can be used as just AM or FM Radio. In this
case, the other modes are in a sleep state.

TIP: The BC radio memory channel contents, de-

scribed in this manual, may differ from your trans-
ceiver’s preprogrammed memory.

NOTE: This transceiver does not have a built-in bar an-

tenna for AM broadcast band reception. If you have dif-
ficulties receiving depending on your environment, we Example: While listening to FM-A Station
recommend that you try a different location, or use an of the Memory bank A.
antenna which better suits the AM broadcast band.

DDTurning ON the BC Radio

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<BC Radio ON>>,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eeThe BC Radio pop up window appears, and exits the

Quick Menu screen.
•“ ” appears.

TIP: To turn OFF the BC Radio, push [QUICK] ,

and then select “<<BC Radio OFF>>,” as described
above.

Appears

6-2
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDListening to the BC Radio while monitoring two ham bands
When the transceiver is set to amateur frequencies on
the MAIN band and SUB band, you can still listen to
the BC Radio. Appears

BC Radio pop
qqPush [QUICK] . up window
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<BC Radio ON>>,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
•“ ” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush [CLR] to turn OFF the BC Radio pop up

window. BC Radio pop up
• You can standby listening to the BC Radio. window is OFF
(BC Radio is ON)
NOTE: To show the BC Radio pop up window again,
push [QUICK] , and push D-pad() to select
“<<BC Radio>>,” then push D-pad(Ent).

To show the BC Radio

pop up window again,
DDSelecting the BC radio mode select “<<BC Radio>>.”
qqWhen the BC Radio pop up window is displayed,
push [M/CALL] to select between the Tuning
mode and the Memory bank mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a frequency or a memory
channel. Tuning mode

• Tuning mode
The BC Radio Tuning mode is used to set the desired
BC Radio frequency.
To save the selected frequency, hold down [S.MW]
for 1 second to program it into the lowest memory chan-
nel of the selected bank.

• Memory bank mode

The BC Radio Memory bank mode is very useful to Memory bank mode
quickly select often-used frequency settings.
When the Memory bank mode is selected, “ ” and
the selected memory channel number appear.

NOTE: Push [QUICK] , and select “VFO” to select

the Tuning mode, or select “MR” to select the Memory
bank mode.
6-3
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDSelecting the bank in the Memory bank mode
Up to 50 BC Radio memory channels can be assigned Memory bank mode
to each bank for easy memory management. (Bank A)
If you change the bank, other area channels can be
selected.

qqPush [M/CALL] to select the Memory bank

mode.
• “ ” and the selected memory channel number appear.
wwPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select the desired bank, and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrThe memory channel in the selected bank appears,
and the transceiver exits the Quick Menu screen.
•R
 otate [DIAL] to select a memory channel.
 ush [MODE]
•P to select the FM or AM mode.

Select “Bank C”

[DIAL]

The channel assigned

to Bank C is displayed

6-4
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDSelecting the AM/FM radio mode
➥➥Push [MODE] to select the AM or FM radio FM mode
mode.

AM mode

DDSearching for a BC Radio signal

While in the Tuning mode, hold down or to start
searching the broadcast signal.
• When is held down, a down scan starts, and when is
held down, an up scan starts.
• When a signal is received, the scanning stops on the fre-
quency.
While search-
• To cancel scanning, push , or [CLR] . ing a signal

When a signal
is received

6-5
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDUsing the Attenuator function
The attenuator reduces signal levels to prevent audio
distortion.
This is useful when the transceiver receives a very
strong AM or FM BC Radio signal, or it is in very strong
electromagnetic fields, such as from a broadcasting
station near your location.
The attenuator can be set in both the AM and FM
modes.

qqPush [MODE] to select the desired AM or FM

mode.
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “ATT (FM),” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• When the AM mode is selected in step q, select “ATT
(AM).”
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select the attenuator.

• ATT (FM)
OFF: The attenuator is OFF.
30dB: The attenuation is about 30 dB.
• ATT (AM)
OFF: The attenuator is OFF.
Auto: The attenuation is automatically switched be-
tween OFF and 30 dB (maximum), depend-
ing on the received signal strength level.
30dB: The attenuation is set to 30 dB.
50dB: The attenuation is set to 50 dB.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save and exit the Quick Menu
screen.
• When the attenuator is ON, “ATT” appears in the BC Ra-
dio pop up window. Appears

6-6
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDSetting the squelch level
The squelch level can be set for only the BC radio.

qqWhile holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] one click to

display the squelch level. (Default: AUTO)
wwWhile holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] to select the
squelch level.
• “LEVEL1” is loose squelch (for weak signals) and “LEV-
EL3” is tight squelch (for strong signals).
• “AUTO” shows automatic level adjustment by a noise
pulse counting system.
• “OPEN” shows a continuously open setting. When “AUTO” is selected.

[DIAL]

[SQL]

When Level 3 (Maximum)

is selected.

DDUsing the Monitor function

This function is used to listen to weak BC Radio sig-
nals without disturbing the squelch setting, or having to
manually open the squelch.

➥➥Hold down [SQL] to monitor the operating frequen-

cy.
• The 1st segment of the S-meter blinks.
Blinks
TIP: The [SQL] key can be set to ‘sticky’ operation in
Function menu.
(MENU > Function > Monitor) (p. 16-73)

[SQL]

6-7
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDSetting a tuning step (AM Only)
If you select the BC Radio frequency by rotating [DIAL]
in the Tuning mode, the frequency changes in the se-
lected tuning step.

qqPush [MODE] to select the AM mode.

wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “TS,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select the desired tuning step be-

tween 1.0 kHz, 9.0 kHz and 10.0 kHz.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save and exit the Quick Menu
screen.

When the 10.0 kHz

step is selected.

The frequency changes in the

selected tuning step.

6-8
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Adding or editing a BC Radio memory

DDUsing the BC Radio Memory BC Radio Memory
A total of 26 banks are selectable for BC Radio Mem-
ory. You can assign up to 50 BC Radio memory chan- A: Area 1 FM FM-A Station
nels to each bank, for easy memory management. (A
B: Area 2 FM-B Station
maximum of 500 memories can be assigned to the BC
Radio Memory.) FM-C Station
Some area stations are preloaded into the BC Radio C: Area 3
memory for easy memory management.
D: Area 4
AM AM-A Station
TIP: The BC radio memory channel contents, de-
scribed in this manual, may differ from your trans- AM-B Station
ceiver’s programmed memory.
Z: AM-C Station

(Example)

DDAdd a BC Radio memory

1. A
 dding a BC Radio Memory and entering the edit
mode
q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

e Push D-pad() to select a desired bank, and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rP  ush D-pad() to select the desired radio mode (AM
or FM) to be programmed.
t Push [QUICK] . BC RADIO MEMORY
yP  ush D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D- screen is displayed.
pad(Ent).
• The BC RADIO MEM EDIT screen is displayed.

When no memory is
entered, “-- Blank --”
appears.

Select “Add”

☞☞Continued on the next page

6-9
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

2. Entering a BC Radio Memory name

u Push D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

iR
 otate [DIAL] to select the first character.
•S  electable input characters are upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward and back-
ward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
o Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second Character
digit. type selection
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a BC Radio Memory screen
name of up to 16 characters, including spaces.
!1 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

(Example)
When entering
“FM-K Station”

☞☞Continued on the next page

6-10
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

3. Entering a frequency
!2 Push D-pad() to select “FREQUENCY,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• A cursor appears and blinks.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!3 Rotate [DIAL] to enter the frequency.

•A
 M: 520 to 1710 kHz
•F
 M: 76.0 to 108.0 MHz*
*Frequency range differs, depending on the transceiver’s
(Example)
version.
When entering
!4 Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or back- “88.9”
ward to edit the frequency.
!5 Repeat steps !3 and !4 to enter the frequency.
!6 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

4. Selecting the skip setting

!7 Push D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
!8 Push D-pad() to select whether or not to use the
channel in the BC Radio memory.
• OFF: You can select the channel in the BC Radio
memory.
• Skip: The channel does not appear in the BC Radio
memory.
!9 After selecting, push D-pad(Ent).

5. Writing BC Radio Memory

@0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• If a previously added BC Radio memory is edited, select
“<<Overwrite>>.”
@1 Push D-pad(#) to select “YES,” and then push D- Select
pad(Ent).

To cancel the entered data:

qqTo cancel the entered
data, push [CLR] to
display “Cancel edit?.”
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select (Example)
“YES,” and then push D- When “FM-K Station” is
pad(Ent) to cancel enter- assigned to Bank K.
ing and return to the BC
Radio Memory’s channel The list of BC Radio Bank K
list screen. is displayed.

6-11
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

DDDeleting a BC Radio memory

All the contents of a BC Radio memory can be delet-
ed.
Please note that deleted memory cannot be restored.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (BC Radio),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio group that
includes the memory you want to delete, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the memory channel to be
deleted.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then D-
pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The selected BC Radio memory is deleted.

Select the channel

to be deleted.

Select

“FM-K Station” is
deleted, and “-- Blank --”
is displayed in Bank K.

6-12
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

DDEditing a BC radio memory
This function edits BC radio memory data. This is useful
when already-entered data is incorrect, has changed or
new data should be added to the list.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio bank that in-
cludes the memory you want to edit, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
ttP
 ush D-pad() to select the memory to be edited.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Edit.”
iiPush D-pad() to select the desired item, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• See pages 6-9 to 6-11 for entering details.
ooAfter editing, the display returns to the BC RADIO
MEM EDIT screen.
!0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Overwrite>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent). Example:
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- “FM-K Station”
is edited.
pad(Ent).
• The previous memory contents are overwritten, and the
transceiver returns to the BC Radio bank screen.

6-13
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

DDRearranging the display order of the BC Radio memory
You can move the BC Radio memories to rearrange
their display order in the selected BC Radio memory
bank.
The BC Radio memories cannot be moved out of their
assigned memory bank.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory
bank that includes the BC Radio memory you want
to move, and then push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory to
be moved.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
iiPush D-pad() to select the location to insert the
memory you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The selected memory contents are inserted above the
destination memory name. Select the memory
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected memory to be moved.
contents are moved to the bottom of the BC Radio mem-
ory bank.

Blinks

Select the
destination

“FM-A Station”
is moved to the
bottom.

6-14
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Skip setting for the BC radio memory

You can set the undesired frequency as skip targets.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory bank
that includes the BC Radio memory you want to set
the skip setting on, and then push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory to
be skipped.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “SKIP” appears on the selected memory.
• Push [QUICK] and select “SKIP” again, then push
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the skip setting.

TIP: In the BC radio win-

dow, push [QUICK] ,
and select “SKIP” also set Select the memory
the skip setting. to be skipped.

Appears

6-15
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Using the BC Radio Mode

The transceiver has an exclusive BC Radio mode
where only the BC Radio functions.

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<BC Radio Mode>>,”
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

• BC radio mode screen is displayed.

TIP:
• To cancel the BC Radio mode, push [QUICK] ,
and select “<<Normal Mode>>.”
Select
• In the exclusive BC Radio mode, the other modes
are in a sleep state. To operate the transceiver in
a normal way, push [QUICK] , and then select
“<<Normal Mode>>.”

Appears

BC Radio Mode screen

6-16
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■BC Radio settings

DDFM Antenna
Select the desired antenna for FM radio.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > BC Radio > BC Radio Set> FM Antenna)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired antenna to use
for the FM radio
• External: An external antenna is used.
• Earphone: An earphone antenna is used.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDPower Save (BC Radio)

Set the power save function to reduce current drain and
conserve battery power when the BC Radio is ON.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > BC Radio > BC Radio Set> Power Save

(BC Radio))
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to set the power save function when
the BC Radio is ON.
• OFF: The power save function is OFF.
• ON: When the BC Radio is ON, and no signal is
received for 5 seconds, this function is acti-
vated in:
FM mode: 1:3 ratio (300 : 900 milliseconds)
AM mode: 1:1 ratio (2000 : 2000 milliseconds)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

NOTE: This function is disabled when an external

power source is used.

6-17
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ BC Radio setting (Continued)

DDAuto Mute
Enable this setting when you listen to the BC Radio in
the background.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > BC Radio > BC Radio Set> Auto Mute)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the Auto Mute timer to
between 0 and 10 seconds (in 1 second steps), or
OFF.
• OFF: The Auto Mute function is OFF.
The BC Radio audio is not muted even
if the transceiver receives a signal on
the MAIN or SUB band.
The BC Radio audio is muted when the
transceiver transmits.
• 0 to 10sec: The BC Radio audio is automatically
muted when the transceiver transmits
or receives on the MAIN or SUB band.
After transmitting or receiving, the Auto
Mute timer starts. After the timer period
ends, you can listen to the BC Radio
again.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6-18
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ BC Radio setting (Continued)

DDVolume Select
Select to adjust the audio output level of all bands to-
gether, all separately, or just the BC Radio separately.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Sounds”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Volume Select,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select whether or not to indepen-
dently adjust the audio output level.
• All: The audio output level of the BC Radio,
A band and B band are adjusted at the
together.
• BC Radio Separate:
The audio output level of the BC Radio is
separately adjusted.
The audio output level of A band and B
band are adjusted together.
• Separate: The audio output level of the BC Radio,
A band and B band are separately ad-
justed.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6-19
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ BC Radio setting (Continued)

DDBC Radio Level
Set the initial audio output level difference between the
BC Radio and the A and B bands when “All” is set in
“Volume Select.” (p. 16-88)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Sounds”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Level,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrRotate [DIAL] to adjust.
• +5 to +1: The BC Radio audio output level is higher
than the A and B bands audio.
• 0: The BC Radio audio output level is same
as the A and B bands audio.
• –1 to –5: The BC Radio audio output level is lower
than the A and B bands audio.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6-20
Previous view

Section 7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

■■ D-STAR Introduction............................................................ 7-2
■■ About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) function......................... 7-2
■■ Ways to Communicate using the DR function..................... 7-3

To begin the digital mode communication except in the DR function

To begin the digital mode communication in other than For a Local area call or Gateway call:
the DR function, you can use the VFO mode, Memory qqSet the access repeater’s frequency. (p. 15-2)
mode and Call channel mode. wwSet the frequency offset. (p. 15-4)
This manual describes focuses on the DR function op- eeSet the Duplex direction. (p. 15-5)
eration which can be set up easily, and if you want to rrSet the call signs. (p. 16-51)
use in other than the DR function, see the procedures
as described to the right. For a Simplex call:
qqSet the operating frequency.
wwSet the call sign. (p. 16-51)

IMPORTANT!
• The Repeater List, described in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.
• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are dif-
ferent from other country’s.
Be sure to add a repeater node letter in the 8th digit of the call sign, according to the frequency band as shown
below.
1200 MHz : A (B in Japan)
430 MHz : B (A in Japan)
144 MHz : C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)
7-1
 Previous view

7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

Before starting D-STAR, the following steps are needed.

STEP 1 Entering your call sign (MY) into the transceiver.
STEP 2 Registering your call sign (MY) to a gateway repeater.
IMPORTANT! STEP 3 Entering your D-STAR equipment into your registration form.

You have completed the steps!!

See the Basic manual for details.

■■D-STAR Introduction
• The D-STAR repeater enables you to call a HAM sta-
tion near you, or around the world.
• You can transmit and receive digital voice, including
lowspeed data, at the same time. You can transmit and
receive position data from the built-in GPS receiver.
• You can make a transceiver to transceiver call (through
no repeater) in the DR screen.

■■About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) function

You can easily use the D-STAR repeaters with the DR
(D-STAR Repeater) function. With this function, you Destination
can select the preprogrammed repeater or frequency (Repeater/Station)
in “FROM” (the access repeater or simplex), and UR
call sign in “TO” (destination), as shown to the right. Access repeater
or Simplex
NOTE: If the repeater set in “FROM” (Access Re-
peater) has no Gateway call sign, you cannot make
a gateway call.
In the DR screen

7-2
 Previous view

7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

■■Ways to Communicate using the DR function

With the DR function, the transceiver has three ways to
communicate, as shown below.

• Local area call : To call through your local area (ac-
cess) repeater.
• Gateway call : To call through your local area (ac-
cess) repeater, repeater gateway and
the internet to your destination re-
peater or individual station’s last used
repeater, using call sign routing.
• Simplex call : To call another station not using a re-
peater.

Local area call Access repeater

Hamacho
repeater

Hamacho area

Gateway call
Hirano Sapporo
repeater repeater

INTERNET

Hirano area Sapporo area

Simplex call

NOTE:
• Using the Repeater List is required to use the DR function. (pp. 9-24 to 9-34)
• Before operating in the duplex mode, be sure to check whether the repeater is busy, or not. If the repeater is busy,
wait until it is clear, or ask for a “break” using a method acceptable to your local procedures.
• The transceiver has a Time-Out Timer function for DV operation. The timer limits a continuous transmission. Warn-
ing beeps will sound approximately 30 seconds before time-out and then again immediately before time-out.

7-3
Previous view

Section 8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “FROM” (Access repeater)...................................... 8-2
DD Using the preloaded Repeater List.................................. 8-3
DD Using the DR scan.......................................................... 8-4
DD Using the Repeater Search function............................... 8-5
DD Using the TX History....................................................... 8-7
■■ Setting “TO” (Destination).................................................... 8-8
DD Using “Local CQ” (Local Area call).................................. 8-9
DD Using “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call).............................. 8-10
DD Using “Your Call Sign”.................................................... 8-11
DD Using RX History........................................................... 8-12
DD Using TX History........................................................... 8-13
DD Directly inputting (UR)................................................... 8-14
DD Directly inputting (RPT)................................................. 8-15
■■ Reflector operation............................................................ 8-16
DD What is the reflector?.................................................... 8-16
DD Linking to a reflector...................................................... 8-17
DD Using a reflector............................................................ 8-18
DD Unlinking a reflector....................................................... 8-19
DD Reflector Echo Testing................................................... 8-19
DD Requesting repeater information................................... 8-20
■■ Updating the Repeater List................................................ 8-21

IMPORTANT!
• The Repeater List described in this manual may differ from your transceiver’s Repeater List contents.
• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are dif-
ferent from other country’s.
Be sure to add a repeater node letter as the 8th digit in the call sign field, according to the repeater frequency
band, as shown below.
1200 MHz: A (B in Japan)
430 MHz: B (A in Japan)
144 MHz: C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)
8-1
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■Setting “FROM” (Access repeater)

Your access repeater must be set in “FROM” when you
transmit using the DR function.
You have four ways to set the access repeater. “Hirano” repeater
Click the title shown below to jump to the specified is set in “FROM.”
page.

• When you know your access repeater

From the Repeater List (p. 8-3)
Select the repeater in your transceiver’s Repeater
List.

• When you don't know which repeater you can access.

Search for a repeater using the DR scan (p. 8-4)
The Normal DR scan searches for output re-
peater frequencies. The scan will stop when
a signal is detected.
• The scan will also stop on simplex signals.

The Near Repeater scan searches for near-

Blinks
by repeaters by using your location and the
repeater’s location that is entered in the Re-
peater List, and then lists them.
You can also find only FM repeaters using While selecting a scan item While scanning
the Near Repeater (FM) scan.

Search for the nearest repeater (p. 8-5)

Searches for the nearest repeater by us-
ing your location and the repeater’s location
where entered in the Repeater List.
The nearest repeaters in your transceiver’s
Repeater List are displayed as selectable
choices.
You can select the desired nearby repeater
type (DV or FM).
Selecting a repeater type

• When the “FROM” data is stored in the TX History.

Setting from the TX History (p. 8-7)
When you transmit using the DR function, “FROM”
(the access repeater) data is stored in the TX History.
You can select the access repeater from the record.

8-2
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “FROM” (Access repeater) (Continued)

DDUsing the preloaded Repeater List

For easy operation, a Repeater List is preloaded into
your transceiver.

Example: Select the “Hirano” repeater in Japan from

the list.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears. “FROM” is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group where
your access repeater is listed, and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• Example: “11: Japan”
• The Repeater List, described in this manual, may differ
from your transceiver’s list.
ttPush D-pad() to select your access repeater, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Hirano”
yy
If the selected repeater’s name is displayed in
“FROM” on the DR screen, the access repeater set-
ting is completed.

Repeater area Repeater call sign

IMPORTANT!
The Repeater List described in this manual may differ
from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.

When you select an FM repeater:

You can select an FM re-
peater if it is in your trans- Completed
ceiver’s Repeater List.
The “TO” setting is not nec- How to change the repeat-
essary for an FM repeater, er group:
so “---” is displayed in “TO.” While in the DR screen,

push [QUICK] to open
(Sample) the Quick menu. Then se-
When selecting an lect “Group Select.”
FM repeater.

8-3
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “FROM” (Access repeater) (Continued)

DDUsing the DR scan

The DR scan is useful to find a repeater. Example: Select the “Hirano repeater using the
To quickly find a repeater using the DR function, the DR DR scan.
scan skips repeaters that are not specified as access
repeaters. The (“USE (FROM)” setting is “NO” (SKIP is
set) on the Repeater List.)

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwHold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
• The DR scan setting window appears.
eePush D-pad() to select the desired scan, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

• Normal:  Searches for repeaters

whose “USE (FROM)” set-
ting is set to “YES.”
• Near Repeater (ALL): Searches for up to 20 near-
by DV and FM repeaters.
(A total of 40 repeaters)
• Near Repeater (DV): Searches for up to 20 near-
by DV repeaters.
• Near Repeater (FM): Searches for up to 20 near-
by FM repeaters.
The repeaters
rrThe DR scan starts.
are sequentially
• The frequency decimal point and “FROM” blink while
displayed.
scanning.
• The repeaters in the Repeater List are sequentially dis-
played.
ttWhen the transceiver receives a signal from a re- While scanning
peater, the scan stops.
•P  ush [CLR] to cancel the DR scan. Blinks
• The scan pauses when a signal is received. The scan
resumes the same as other scans. (p. 16-18)

TIP: You can skip certain repeaters from a scan tar-

get. You can also skip all repeaters in certain groups
from a scan. See page 9-40 for details. Means “JM1ZLK” is
using the “Hirano”
repeater.
NOTE: Even if the transceiver receives a repeater
signal, the repeater may not receive the transceiver’s
signal. This is because the repeater’s output power is While receiving a repeater signal
higher than the transceiver’s.

TIP: The DR scan

scans simplex frequen-
cies if they are entered
in the Repeater List.

Blinks While receiving a

signal on 433.450. Completed

8-4
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “FROM” (Access repeater) (Continued)

DDUsing the Repeater Search function

The transceiver searches for the nearest repeater by
using your own and repeater’s position data entered in
the Repeater List.

Example: Select the “Hirano” repeater that is the top

search result.

1. R
 eceiving your own position from the GPS re-
ceiver

When it is difficult to receive signals indoors, even if

you are near a window, try going outdoors for better
reception. Appears

qqCheck whether or not the GPS receiver is receiving

your position and time.
The GPS icon blinks when searching for satellites.
➪ ➪ ➪


The GPS icon stops blinking when the minimum
number of needed satellites is found.

• It may take only a few seconds to calculate your position.

But depending on the environment, it may take a few min-
utes. If you have difficulties receiving, we recommend that
you try a different location.
• The icon does not appear when:
- “GPS Select” item is set to “Manual.”
(GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
- “GPS Indicator” item is set to “OFF.”
(GPS > GPS Set > GPS Indicator)
☞☞Continued on the next page.

8-5
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “FROM” (Access repeater)

DD Using the Repeater Search function (Continued)

2. S
 electing the access repeater from the Near Re-
peater List
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Near Repeater,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired type of nearby
repeater, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Near Repeater (ALL): Displays up to 20 nearby DV
and FM repeaters.
(A total of 40 repeaters)
• Near Repeater (DV): Displays up to 20 nearby
DV repeaters.
• Near Repeater (FM): Displays up to 20 nearby
FM repeaters.
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater, and then push
D-pad(Ent). (Example: “Hirano”)
• “Hirano” is displayed in “FROM.”

Appears for
FM repeaters

Shows the distance Shows the call sign

and direction from your of “Hirano430”
position to the repeater

NOTE:
When using the Repeater Search function, be sure to
first receive your own position data.
•If no repeater is found in
a 160 kilometer (100 mile)
range, screen 1, as shown
to the right, will be dis-
played.
Completed
Screen 1

• If the last received position

can be used, screen 2, as
shown to the right, will be
displayed. NOTE: When the position data accuracy level is set
to “Approximate,” the direction data is not displayed if
the distance to the repeater is under 5 kilometers (3.1
Screen 2 miles). (p. 9-33)
8-6
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “FROM” (Access repeater) (Continued)

DDUsing the TX History

The TX History stores up to 10 “FROM” (Access re-
peater) repeaters used when you transmit using the DR
function.

NOTE: Only repeaters you transmitted to using the

DR function are stored in the TX History.

Example: Select the “Hirano” repeater from the TX His-

tory.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears. “FROM” is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “TX History,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired TX history, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• TX History (DV): Displays the TX history of the DV
repeaters.
• TX History (FM): Displays the TX history of the FM
repeaters.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Hirano,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “Hirano” is displayed in “FROM.”

TIP: You can display detailed repeater information on

the TX HISTORY screen, or delete it from there.
➥➥Push [QUICK] on the TX HISTORY screen,
then push D-pad() to select the desired item, and
then push D-pad(Ent).

Completed

8-7
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■Setting “TO” (Destination)

The destination repeater or station must be set in “TO” TIP: While in the DV mode, hold down Call Sign Cap-
when you make a call in the DV mode. ture key ( ) for 1 second to display the RX History
You have seven ways to set the destination. Click the list.
title as shown below to jump to the specified page. When “[RX>CS] Key” item is set to “Call Sign Cap-
ture,” the latest received call signs (station and re-
peaters) is set in “TO” after releasing this key.
“Hamacho” repeater • While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to select an-
is set in “TO.” other call sign in RX History.
When “[RX>CS] Key” item is set to “RX>CS List,” you
can select a call sign (station and repeaters) from the
RX History list.

To make a Local Area CQ call

“Local CQ” setting (p. 8-9)
Set “CQCQCQ” in “TO” (Destination).
To make a Gateway CQ call
“Gateway CQ” setting (p. 8-10) [TO SELECT] screen
Select a repeater from the Repeater List.

To make a call to a specific station

“Your Call Sign” setting (p. 8-11)
Select the station call sign in the Your Call Sign
memory.
To make a call through a reflector
“Reflector” setting (p. 8-17)
Select a reflector you want to call through.

To select from RX History

Setting from the RX History (p. 8-12)
When you receive a call, the calling station data is
stored in the RX History.
You can select the destination from the History.

To select from TX History

Setting from the TX History (p. 8-13) How to switch the repeater group:
When you transmit, the destination repeater or sta- When “Local CQ” or “Gateway CQ” is se-
tion data is stored in the TX History. lected, you can change the repeater group.
You can select the destination from the record. ➥➥In the DR screen, push [QUICK]
to open the Quick menu. Then push
To directly enter the destination station call sign D-pad() to select “Group Select.”
• You can change the repeater group using
Direct Input (UR) (p. 8-14) D-pad()
Directly input the destination station call sign.

To directly enter the destination repeater call sign

Direct Input (RPT) (p. 8-15)
Directly input the destination repeater call sign.

8-8
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDUsing “Local CQ” (Local Area call)

“CQCQCQ” is set in “TO” to call a station through your Example: Making a Local area call by accessing the
local area (access) repeater. “Hirano” repeater.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO” (Destination), and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Local CQ,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• “CQCQCQ” is displayed in “TO.”

Completed

8-9
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDUsing “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)

The destination repeater is set in “TO” to call a station Example: Making a gateway CQ call to (Japan; Hama-
through your local area (access) repeater, gateway cho) from the “Hirano” repeater.
repeater, the internet and then to your destination re-
peater.

qq Hold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO” (Destination), and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Gateway CQ,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• The REPEATER GROUP screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group where
your destination repeater is listed, and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• Example: “11: Japan”
ttPush D-pad() to select the destination repeater,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Hamacho”
• “Hamacho” is displayed in “TO.”

NOTE: When you set the repeater that has no gate-

way call sign in “FROM,” “ ” appears.
In this case, you cannot make a gateway call.

TIP: After selecting a repeater, you can select other

repeaters in your transceiver by rotating [DIAL].

Means this repeater

is the 282nd of the
690 repeaters on the
Repeater List. Completed

8-10
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDUsing “Your Call Sign”

The “Your Call Sign” memory stores the “UR” (destina-
tion) call signs.
When you select an individual station call sign for the
“TO” (Destination) setting as “Your Call Sign,” a gate-
way call can be made.
When you call a destination through the gateway, the
signal is automatically sent to the last repeater that the
station accessed.
So, even if you don't know where the station is, you can
still make a call to it. Example: Select “TOM” from the “Your Call Sign.”

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the destination, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “TOM”
• “TOM” is displayed in “TO.”

NOTE: When you set the repeater that has no gate-

way call sign in “FROM,” “ ” appears.
In this case, you cannot make a gateway call. The call sign of
the selected sta-
tion is displayed.

TIP: After selecting a destination, you can select other

stations in your transceiver by rotating [DIAL].

Means this station

is programmed as
the 33rd of the 33
stations on your Completed
memory.

8-11
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDUsing RX History
When a call is received in the DV mode, the call data is
stored in RX History.
Up to 50 callers and the last called station’s call signs
can be stored. Example: Select “TOM” from RX History.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “RX History,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the destination, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “TOM”
• “TOM” is displayed in “TO.”

The call sign of

the selected sta-
tion is displayed.
TIP: To add the RX HISTORY data to memory, push
[QUICK] on the RX HISTORY screen, then push
D-pad(Ent).

Completed

8-12
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDUsing TX History
When a call is transmitted in the DV mode, the name
and/or call sign of up to 20 “TO” (Destination) stations
that you called are stored in TX History.

NOTE: If you never transmit a call in the DV mode,

you cannot select “TO” (destination) from TX History. Example: Select the “Melbourne” repeater in the TX
History.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “TX History,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the destination, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Dallas”
• “Dallas” is displayed in “TO.”

“Dallas”
repeater’s
call sign is
The Sub name is dis- displayed.
played when a repeat-
er is selected.
TIP: You can add the TX HISTORY data to memory,
or delete it from there.
➥➥Push [QUICK] on the TX HISTORY screen,
then push D-pad() to select the desired item, and
then push D-pad(Ent).

Completed

8-13
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDDirectly inputting (UR)

The destination station call sign can be directly input.
Example: Directly input the call sign “JM1ZLK.”
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Direct Input (UR).”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to enter the edit mode.
ttRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(Example: J)
•A  to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously erase the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
yyPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
uuRepeat steps t and y to enter a call sign of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
(Example: First, J, then M, then 1, then Z, then L,
then K.)
iiAfter entering, push D-pad(Ent) twice to save.
• “JM1ZLK” is displayed in “TO.”
• After entering, you can correct the call sign in the DI-
RECT INPUT (UR) screen.
• The entered call sign remains on the DIRECT INPUT
(UR) screen, until entering a new call sign.

[DIAL]

TIP: If the entered call sign is duplicated in “Your Call Completed

Sign” memory, the name is displayed. (Only when the
name has been entered.)

8-14
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Setting “TO” (Destination) (Continued)

DDDirectly inputting (RPT)

The destination repeater call sign can be directly input. Example: Directly input the call sign “JP3YDH”

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Direct Input (RPT).”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to enter the edit mode.
ttRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(Example: J)
•A  to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously erase the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
yyPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
uuRepeat steps t and y to enter a name of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
(Example: First, J, then P, then 3, then Y, then D,
then H.)
iiAfter entering, push D-pad(Ent) twice.
• “JP3YDH” is displayed in “TO.”
• After entering, you can correct the call sign in the DI-
RECT INPUT (RPT) screen.
• The entered call sign remains on the DIRECT INPUT
(RPT) screen, until entering a new call sign.

[DIAL]

Completed

TIP: If the entered call sign is duplicated in the Re-

peater List, the name is displayed. (Only when the The following settings are also correct.
name has been entered.)

The repeater node* “/” is input.

is input. In this case, the call sign is of
a repeater for a Gateway call.
*Although the repeater node letter is ‘B’ for 430 MHz band,
‘A’ is used in Japan. See page 8-1 for details.

8-15
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■Reflector operation
DDWhat is the reflector?
A reflector is a special server connected to the internet
and running a version of Dplus software. If the Dplus
software is installed on your access repeater, it pro-
vides various functions including gateway and reflector
linking capabilities (It is known as the D-STAR reflector
system). The D-STAR reflector system enables a num-
ber of D-STAR repeaters around the world to link to a
reflector. This means that when you transmit through a
D-STAR repeater linked to a reflector, your voice can
be heard on other repeaters linked to the reflector, and
you can hear other stations that are connected to the
reflector when they transmit.

D-STAR reflector system

INTERNET

Access repeater
CAN

INTERNET INTERNET

UK
Reflector
INTERNET

USA
AUS

8-16
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Reflector operation (Continued)

DDLinking to a reflector
If your repeater is not currently linked to a reflector, or
you want to change to another reflector, you can do so
following the steps below. Before linking to another re-
flector, be sure to unlink the current reflector.

Direct inputting
Example: Directly enter “REF010BL.”

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Reflector,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The “REFLECTOR” screen appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Link to Reflector,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “Direct Input,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
yyPush D-pad() to select the reflector number.
(Example: 010)
uuPush D-pad() to move the cursor.
iiPush D-pad() to select module letter.
(Example: B).
ooPush D-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver returns to the DR screen.
• “Link to Reflector” and “REF010BL” are displayed in
“TO.”
!0 Hold down [PTT] to link to the reflector.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

8-17
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Reflector operation
DD Linking to a reflector (Continued)

Using the TX History

The TX History stores the up to 5 reflectors that your
access repeaters linked to before.

Example: Select the “REF002AL” in the TX History.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Reflector,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The “REFLECTOR” screen appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Link to Reflector,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the reflector that you want
to link to.
(Example: “REF002AL”)
yyPush D-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver returns to the DR screen.
• “Link to Reflector” and “REF002AL” are displayed in
“TO.”
uuHold down [PTT] to link to the reflector.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

DDUsing a reflector
Before using a reflector, be sure to your repeater is
linked to the reflector.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Reflector,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The “REFLECTOR” screen appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Use Reflector.”
ttPush D-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver returns to the DR screen.
• “Use Reflector” and “CQCQCQ” are displayed in “TO.”
yyHold down [PTT] to link to the reflector.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

8-18
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Reflector operation (Continued)

DDUnlinking a reflector
Before linking to another reflector, be sure to unlink the
current reflector.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Reflector,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The “REFLECTOR” screen appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Unlink Reflector.”
ttPushD-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver returns to the DR screen.
• “Unlink Reflector” and “U” are displayed in “TO.”
yyHold down [PTT] to unlink the reflector.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

DDReflector Echo Testing

This function is a useful check of how well your signal
is getting into the repeater, and you can use it to verify
that your repeater is operating normally.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Reflector,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The “REFLECTOR” screen appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Echo Test.”
ttPushD-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver returns to the DR screen.
• “Echo Test” and “E” are displayed in “TO.”
yyHold down [PTT] and speak at your normal voice
level.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
uuRelease [PTT] to hear your message.

8-19
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Reflector operation (Continued)

DDRequesting repeater information

When you send the repeater information command, an
ID message is sent back.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen appears.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Reflector,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The “REFLECTOR” screen appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Repeater Information.”
ttPushD-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver returns to the DR screen.
• “Repeater Information” and “I” are displayed in “TO.”
yyHold down [PTT] to send the repeater information
command.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
uuRelease [PTT] to hear the repeater ID message.

8-20
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■Updating the Repeater List

For easy operation, a Repeater List is preloaded into
your transceiver at the factory. ID-51A/E’s latest setting file is uploaded to
This section describes how to manually update the Re- “Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals” in
peater List using a microSD card. the Icom website screen.
The latest setting file can be downloaded from the Icom • The displayed contents may differ.
website.

1. D
 ownloading the latest setting file (ICF file)
Access the following URL to download the latest
q 
data.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/
index.html

• The latest settings file (ICF file) and Repeater List (CSV;
Comma Separated Values file) are contained in the
downloaded ZIP file.

File Name: 51P2_USA_160913.zip

ID-51A
Depending on the ID-51E Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals 20MM/MM/MM
updated file date. PLUS2

Depending on the version.

TIP: This instruction manual describes when the file

name is “51P2_USA_160913.zip,” and a card reader
is used, for example.

w Decompress the compressed file that is downloaded

from the Icom website.
“51P2_USA_160913” folder will be created on the
same place where the downloaded file is saved.

2. Inserting the microSD card into a PC

e Insert the microSD card into the microSD card drive PC
on your PC.
• Icom recommends that you format all microSD
cards to be used with the ID-51A/E, even prefor-
matted microSD cards for PCs or other uses. When
the microSD card is formatted in the transceiver,
the formatting process creates an ID-51 folder on microSD
the card. The ICF file extracted from the download- card to the Card
Transceiver reader
ed Zip file must be copied into the setting folder in
the ID-51 folder. Otherwise the transceiver will not
see it.
See page 2-3 for details of inserting and removing
the microSD card.

☞☞Continued on the next page

8-21
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Updating the Repeater List (Continued)

3. Copying the latest ICF file to the microSD card

Double-click the “51P2_USA_160913” folder cre-
r 
ated on the same place where the downloaded file is
saved. Click
Copy the ICF file (Example: “51P2_USA_160913.
t 
icf”) in the folder to the “Setting” folder in the “ID-51”
folder of the microSD card.

TIP: You can copy one or more ICF files in the fold-
er, but the transceiver loads only one file.

Click

4. Inserting the microSD card

y Remove the microSD card from the PC, and insert PC
the card into the transceiver’s slot.
See page 2-3 for details of inserting and removing
the microSD card.

microSD
Saving the current data is recommended before card from the Card
loading other data into the transceiver. Transceiver reader

8-22
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Updating the Repeater List (Continued)

5. Updating the Repeater List

u Push [MENU] .
i Push D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

o Push D-pad() to select “Load Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
!0 Push D-pad() to select the ICF file to be loaded,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: Selecting “51P2_USA_160913.icf”)
• The LOAD FILE screen appears.
!1 Push D-pad() to select “Repeater List Only,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
☞☞Continued on the next page

Select the file

to be loaded

Select

8-23
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ Updating the Repeater List (Continued)

!2 
Push D-pad(Ent) to select the file, and then the
“Keep 'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!3 Push D-pad() to select “YES” or “NO.”

• When “YES” is selected, the skip settings of the Repeater
List are retained. (p. 9-39)
!4 Push D-pad(Ent), “Load file?” appears.
!5 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to start the file check.
• While checking the file, “CHECKING FILE” and a prog-
ress bar are displayed.
!6 After checking, settings data loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-
played.
!7 After loading, “COMPLETED! Reboot the ID-51” ap-
pears.
To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.

Repeater List updating is complete!

8-24
Previous view

Section 9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Message operation.............................................................. 9-2
DD Entering a TX message................................................... 9-2
DD Transmitting a message.................................................. 9-3
DD Deleting a TX message................................................... 9-4
■■ Viewing received call signs.................................................. 9-5
DD Viewing the RX History screen........................................ 9-5
■■ Using the BK function.......................................................... 9-7
■■ Using the EMR communication function............................. 9-8
DD Adjusting the EMR AF level............................................. 9-9
■■ Display type setting............................................................. 9-9
■■ Automatic DV detection..................................................... 9-10
■■ Automatic Reply function................................................... 9-11
DD Recording an Auto Reply voice announcement............ 9-12
DD Playing back the recorded voice audio.......................... 9-12
DD Auto Position Reply function.......................................... 9-13
■■ Data communication.......................................................... 9-14
DD Connection.................................................................... 9-14
DD Data communication application setting........................ 9-14
DD Data communication operation...................................... 9-14
DD DV fast data mode......................................................... 9-15
■■ Speech function................................................................. 9-16
DD Announcing the received call sign................................. 9-16
DD To announce the RX>CS call sign................................. 9-17
DD Selecting the Speech Language................................... 9-18
DD P honetic Code setting for the Speech alphabet character... 9-18
DD Speech speed selection................................................ 9-19
DD Speech level selection................................................... 9-19
■■ Digital squelch functions.................................................... 9-20
DD The digital call sign squelch setting............................... 9-20
DD P ocket beep function with the digital call sign squelch........ 9-20
DD Setting the digital code squelch..................................... 9-21
DD Pocket beep function with the digital code squelch........ 9-21
■■ Viewing the call signs........................................................ 9-22
■■ Repeater List..................................................................... 9-23
DD Repeater List contents.................................................. 9-23
■■ Entering information into Repeater List............................. 9-24
DD Required items for the communication cases................ 9-24
DD New repeater entry........................................................ 9-25
■■ Editing a Repeater List...................................................... 9-35
IMPORTANT! ■■ Deleting a Repeater List.................................................... 9-36
• The Repeater List described in this ■■ Rearranging the repeater display order............................. 9-37
manual may differ from your trans- ■■ Adding Repeater information using RX History................. 9-38
ceiver’s preloaded contents. ■■ Skip settings for the DR scan............................................ 9-39
• 
Although Japanese repeaters are DD Individual skip setting.................................................... 9-39
used in the setting examples, the DD Group skip setting......................................................... 9-40
Japanese repeater node (port) let- ■■ Entering the repeater group name.................................... 9-41
ters are different from other coun- ■■ Repeater detail screen...................................................... 9-42
try’s. ■■ Entering the Your (destination) call sign............................ 9-43
Be sure to add a repeater node letter ■■ Deleting Your (destination) call sign................................... 9-45
as the 8th digit in the call sign field
■■ Rearranging the display order of Your (destination) call sign.. 9-46
after a repeater call sign, according
■■ About the Repeater List default values.............................. 9-47
to the repeater frequency band, as
shown below. DD Opening the default Repeater List................................. 9-47
1200 MHz: A (B in Japan) ■■ Is your setting correct?...................................................... 9-48
430 MHz: B (A in Japan)
144 MHz: C (no D-STAR repeat-
ers in Japan)
9-1
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Message operation Example: To enter “JAPAN >TOM” into message mem-
ory number 1.
The transceiver has a total of 5 message memories to
store short messages to transmit in the DV mode.
TX messages of up to 20 characters can be entered in
each of the 5 message memories.

DDEntering a TX message
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“My Station”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “TX Message,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select message memory number
“1.”
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Edit.”
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to enter the TX message edit Push .
mode.
iiRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(Example: J)
• Selectable characters are upper case letters, lower case
letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the “JAPAN” and a
input mode selection window. space are entered.
Character type
•A  space can be selected in any input mode. selection screen
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space. Symbol type
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold is selected
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
ooPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter up to 20 characters,
including spaces. To enter “>,”
(Example: First, J, then A, then P, then A, then N, select [>] in
then (space), then >, then T, then O, the symbol
then M.) list screen.
!1 After entering the message, push D-pad(Ent) two
times to set.
!2 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
“JAPAN >TOM”
is entered.

9-2
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Message operation (Continued)

DDTransmitting a message
You can transmit a pre-entered text message by push-
ing [PTT]. First, select a TX message, which also turns
ON the message transmission function.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“My Station”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “TX Message,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select message memory number
1 to 5.
• To turn OFF the message transmission function, select
“OFF.”
ttAfter selecting, push D-pad(Ent).
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

TIP:
• The message is transmitted along with your voice
signal.
• The message is transmitted each time you push
[PTT].
• The message is automatically transmitted every 30
seconds during continuous transmission.

RX message display function

As the default, the received message is automatically
displayed and scrolled on the LCD.
To not display and scroll the received message, turn
OFF the RX message display function in “RX Mes-
sage” of the MENU screen. (p. 16-82)
(MENU > Display > RX Message)

The received mes-

sage is displayed
and scrolled here.

9-3
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Message operation (Continued)

DDDeleting a TX message Example: To delete the TX message “JAPAN >TOM” from
TX messages can be deleted, as described below. message memory number 1.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“My Station”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “TX Message,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select message memory number
1.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Clear,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

9-4
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Viewing received call signs

When a DV call is received, the calling station and the
repeater’s call signs are stored in RX History.
Up to 50 calls can be stored. When you receive the 51st
call, the oldest history call will be deleted. The stored
call signs can be displayed in the following way.

DDViewing the RX History screen

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“RX History”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
RX history
() number
eePush D-pad() to select an RX history number be-
tween “RX01” and “RX50.”
• In addition to the RX history number, the call signs of
the caller and called station, RX message, Repeater call
sign of the called station, received date and time are dis-
played on the LCD.
• “GW” appears when a gateway call is received.
• “GPS” appears when the received call includes GPS po-
sition data.
• “UP” appears when a repeater uplink signal is received.
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to show the contents of the RX his-
tory.
ttPush D-pad() to view other RX history content.
• CALLER: Shows the call sign of the caller station and
any note entered after the call sign.
•C  ALLED: Shows the call sign of the called station.
• RXRPT1*: Shows the call sign of the repeater that was
accessed by the caller station. If it was a call
through a gateway and the internet, this item
displays the gateway repeater call sign of
your local area repeater.
• Rx RPT2*: Shows the call sign of the repeater you re-
ceived the call from.
• MESSAGE: Shows any message included in the received
call.
• RX TIME: Shows the date and time the call was re-
ceived.
*“FREQUENCY” appears instead of these items when the
call was not through a repeater (Simplex call), to show the
frequency that was used.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

When the received call includes the GPS

position data, it is displayed after RX TIME.

9-5
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Viewing received call signs (Continued)

TIP: You can delete the RX HISTORY data. When the received call includes
➥➥Push [QUICK] on the RX HISTORY or the GPS position data.
contents screen, then push D-pad() to select
“Delete” or “Delete All.” And then push D-pad(Ent)
to delete.

TIP: “RX RPT1” setting may differ, depending on the communication

form.
Example: When a Local area call is received.

RXRPT2 RXRPT1

UK is
JG3L g... LUK
is
listen
in JG3 ning...
liste

CALLED K is
3LU ...
JG ning
list
e
CALLER

YOUR STATION

Example: When a Gateway call is received.

RXRPT2
GW
g
RXRPT1
callin
ZLK
JM1 P1YIU p
ort INTERNET
from
J ing
call rt
A... ing o
call ort M 1 ZLK YIU p
J JP 1
LK YIU p
1Z
JM JP1 from
fro
m A...
.
A..

CALLER
CALLED
YOUR STATION

9-6
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Using the BK function

The BK (Break-in) function allows you to break into a
conversation where the two other stations are commu-
nicating with call sign squelch enabled. (Default: OFF)

NOTE: The BK function is automatically turned OFF

when the transceiver is turned OFF.

qqAfter receiving a DV signal, hold down for 1

second.
• After releasing , beeps sound, and the calling sta-
tion’s call sign is announced. (RX>CS Speech function)
• The call sign of the calling station or the repeater used is
automatically set.
• When a call sign is not received correctly, error beeps
sound, and no call sign is set.
wwPush [MENU] .
eeP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select “BK,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
ttP ush D-pad() to select “ON.”
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• “BK” appears.
uuWhen both stations are in standby, push [PTT] to
transmit. Appears
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• “BK” blinks on the station that receives the break-in call.
iiRelease [PTT] to receive.
Wait for a reply call from the station.
ooAfter receiving the reply call, communicate normally.
!0 To cancel the BK function, select “OFF” in “BK,” as in
step t, or turn OFF the power.

How to use Break-in?

While using digital call sign squelch, the squelch never opens (no audio is heard) even if a call is received, unless
your own call sign is specified.
However, when a call including the “BK ON” signal (break-in call) is received, the squelch will open and audio is
heard, even if the call is intended for another station.

• Station C calls to Station A with “BK OFF” • Station C calls to Station A with “BK ON”

Station A and Station A and

B are commu- B are commu-
nicating us- nicating us-
ing digital call ing digital call
sign squelch. Station A Station B sign squelch. Station A Station B

Station C Station C

Station B never hears that Station C Station B also hears that Station C
is calling Station A. is calling Station A.
9-7
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Using the EMR communication function

The EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request) communication
function can be used in only the DV mode. Using the
EMR function, no call sign setting is necessary.
All transceivers that receive an EMR signal automati-
cally open their squelch to receive the signal.
When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be heard
at the preset level, even if the volume setting level is set
to the minimum level, or the digital call sign/digital code Example: To transmit from the “Hamacho” repeater us-
squelch is used. (Default: OFF) ing the EMR function
If the volume setting level is higher than the EMR set
level, the audio will be heard at the higher volume set-
ting level.

NOTE: The EMR function is automatically turned OFF

when the transceiver is turned OFF.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen is displayed.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “11: Japan,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
ttP
 ush D-pad() to select “Hamacho,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• “Hamacho” is displayed on “FROM”.
yyPush [MENU] .
uuP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “EMR,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
ooPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
!0 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• “EMR” appears.
!1 Push [PTT] to transmit.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• “EMR” blinks on a station that receives the EMR signal.
And the audio (voice) will be heard at the specified level,
or the [VOL] control level, whichever is higher.
!2 Release [PTT] to receive.
!3 To cancel the EMR function, select “OFF” in step o,
Appears
as described above, or turn OFF the power.

9-8
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Using the EMR communication function (Continued)

DDAdjusting the EMR AF level

The audio output level when an EMR signal is received
is adjustable between 0 and 39.
When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be
heard at the preset level, or the [VOL] control level,
whichever is higher.
To disable the setting, set it to “0.”

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “EMR AF Level,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to adjust the EMR audio output level
between 0 (minimum) and 39 (maximum) in single
digit steps. (Default: 19)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

■■Display type setting

To see repeater names, call signs, and so on better,
you can change the letter size in the DR screen.
(Default: Normal)

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Display Type,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “Large,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The display size changes to large.

9-9
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Automatic DV detection
If you receive an FM signal in the DV mode, the “DV”
and “FM” icons alternately blink to indicate the received
signal is FM.
When the DV Auto Detect function is turned ON, the
transceiver automatically selects the FM mode to tem-
porarily monitor the signal. (Default: OFF)
• Regardless of this setting, the “DV” and “FM” icons alter-
nately blink if you receive an FM signal in the DV mode.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “DV Auto Detect,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• When an FM signal is received in the DV mode, the “DV”
and “FM” icons sequentially blink, and the transceiver re-
ceives the signal in the FM mode.

When digital call sign squelch (DSQL) or digital code

squelch (CSQL) is selected, the transceiver does not
receive FM signals, even if this function is ON.
You can silently wait for calls from others.

<When an FM signal is received while in the DV mode>

• DV Auto Detect function: OFF • DV Auto Detect function: ON

The “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink, but the audio The “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink, and the FM
cannot be heard. signal audio can be heard.

Thanks for the

• • •
These icons alter- These icons alter- nice QSO• • •
nately blink nately blink

The audio cannot The audio can

be heard. be heard.

9-10
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Automatic Reply function

When a call addressed to your own call sign is received,
the Automatic Reply function automatically replies with
your call sign. (Default: OFF)
Depending on the setting, a recorded message or your
position may be transmitted with the call sign.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Auto Reply,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” “Voice” or “Position.”
• ON: Replies with your own call sign. (No audio reply
is sent)
• Voice: Replies with your call sign and any Auto Reply
message recorded on the microSD (up to 10
seconds).
If no microSD card is inserted or no message is
recorded, only your call sign is transmitted.
The transmitted audio can be monitored.
• Position: Replies with your own call sign and transmits
your position using the internal GPS receiver.
(p. 9-13)
When “OFF” or “Manual” is set in “GPS Select,” Appears
the internal GPS receiver is temporarily turned
ON.
When “External GPS” is set in “GPS Select,”
the transceiver transmits your position. But if
the external GPS receiver is not connected, the
internal GPS receiver will be enabled.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

NOTE:
• When “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the Automatic Re-
ply function is automatically turned OFF, when you
push [PTT].
• When “Position” is selected, the Automatic Reply After receiving a call from “JG3LUK,” the
function is kept to ON, even if you push [PTT]. transceiver automatically sends a reply call.
• The Power Save function is disabled when “ON” or
“Voice” is selected.
• The Power Save function is enabled when “Position”
is selected.
• The Automatic Reply function cannot be used on the
SUB band.

TIP: To record the voice signal

You can record a voice announcement for the Auto
Reply function in “DV Auto Reply” on the MENU
screen. (p. 16-27) “TO” setting does not change, but
(MENU > Voice Memo > DV Auto Reply) “UR: JG3LUK (Caller’s call sign)”
is displayed.

9-11
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Automatic Reply function (Continued)

DDRecording an Auto Reply voice announcement
The Auto Reply voice announcement can be recorded
and saved on the microSD card to reply to the call with
your voice.

NOTE: Be sure to insert a microSD card to the [micro

SD] slot of the transceiver before starting to record a
voice signal.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice
Memo”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “DV Auto Reply,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush [PTT] to start recording. (No RF is transmit-
ted)
•A  fter releasing [PTT], the recording is cancelled.
•M  aximum record period is 10 second
• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) from your
mouth, then speak at your normal voice level.
• Only one announcement can be recorded. The current
contents will be overwritten if you record again.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen. While recording

Audio level is displayed

DDPlaying back the recorded voice audio

The recorded voice audio for the Auto Reply function can
be played back.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice
Memo”), and then push D-pad(Ent). Recording time
eePush D-pad() to select “DV Auto Reply,” and then is displayed
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to start the playback.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

TIP: You can delete the recorded audio. While playing back
➥➥On the DV AUTO REPLY screen, push [QUICK]
, and then push D-pad(Ent).
When no microSD card is inserted:
When no microSD card is in-
serted, this error message is
displayed.

9-12
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Automatic Reply function (Continued)

DDAuto Position Reply function
When you receive a call addressed to your own call wwYour position is auto-
sign, but are in a situation that makes it difficult to oper- matically transmitted.
ate the transceiver, this function automatically replies
with your own call sign and transmits your position.

After receiving the Auto Position Reply call, the desti-

qqA call addressed to
nation screen shows your position.
your own call sign. Destination
Icom transceivers prior to the ID-51A/E do not show the
(ID-51A/E)
position after receiving a call. (ID-31A/E, IC-9100, ID- Your
880H/E880, IC-80AD/E80D, IC-92AD/E92D, IC-2820H/ station
E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD/E91, IC-V82, IC-U82)

TIP: The called station’s position window can be

turned OFF on the Menu screen. (p. 16-82) eeAfter receiving, the
(MENU > Display > Reply Position Display) screen shows the
position.

Scrolls your call sign

or the TX message.
• Your status message
may be displayed. After receiving the Auto Posi-
tion Reply call, the destination
screen shows your position.

• When no valid position is received

After receiving a call addressed to your own call sign,
even if “OFF” or “Manual” is set in “GPS Select,” the
internal GPS receiver is temporarily turned ON for ap-
proximately 5 seconds to receive your position.
Then, the transceiver automatically replies with a mes-
Scrolls your
sage, as described below.
message

TIP: When the internal GPS receiver is temporarily

turned ON, and valid data is received, the transceiver
automatically replies if a call addressed to your own After receiving the Auto Position
call sign is received again. Reply call, the destination screen
shows your message.

• Reply message list when no valid position is re-

ceived
NOTE:
Message Status
• When “External GPS” is set in “GPS Select,” and if
No Position When no position is received
the external GPS receiver is not connected, the in-
Old Position 2 minutes or more has passed since ternal GPS receiver will be activated.
receiving the position. •The position transmission is based on the GPS
No Posi & GPS Start The internal GPS receiver is tem- transmission mode. (p. 16-43)
porarily turned ON, but has not yet • When the settings of GPS transmission mode are
received position data.
incorrect for the Automatic Reply function, the trans-
Old Posi & GPS Start The internal GPS receiver is tem- ceiver automatically corrects them to reply to a call.
porarily turned ON, and 2 minutes
• When the GPS transmission mode is OFF, “D-PRS
or more has passed since receiving
(DV-A)” is automatically selected.
position data.

9-13
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Data communication
Generally in the DV mode, communication signals have Before starting data communication:
separate audio and data frames. So in addition to digi- The “DV Data TX” item is set to “Auto” by default.
tal voice communication, low-speed data communica- So, depending on the data communication software
tion can be made at the same time. program, the transceiver may automatically transmit
The DV Fast Data sends the DV data in the fast speed the data only when you enter text on the software
(approximately 3.5 times faster than the normal opera- screen.
tion). However, no audio can be sent.
Use the optional OPC-2218LU or OPC-2350LU with a
third-party serial data communication software.

DDConnection
Connect the transceiver to your PC using the data com- NOTE: Before starting, be sure to set the following items:
munication cable, as illustrated below. • Set the “GPS SELECT” option to “OFF,” “Internal
GPS” or “Manual” in the MENU screen. (p. 16-32)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
To the [DATA] jack • Set the “GPS OUT (To DATA Jack)” option to “OFF”
in the MENU screen. (p. 16-33)
OPC-2218LU (Option) (MENU > GPS > GPS Set >
GPS Out (To DATA Jack))
OPC-2350LU* (Option) • Set the “CI-V (DATA Jack)” option to “OFF”* in the
MENU screen. (p. 16-78)
PC *Set to “ON (Echo Back OFF)” or “ON (Echo Back ON)” when
Transceiver To a [USB] port
you make a data communication with a CI-V command.
*OPC-2350LU allows DV data communication between the (MENU > Function > CI-V > CI-V (DATA Jack))
transceiver and an Android™ device.

DDData communication application setting

Configure the serial data communication software as *1 Depending on the PC environment, the COM port
follows. number used by the ID-51A/E may be higher than 5.
• Port: The COM port number which is used by In such case, use a program that can set to higher
the ID-51A/E.*1 than 5.
• Baud rate: 4800/9600 bps*2 *2 You can set the baud rate in the “Data Speed” item of
• Data: 8 bit the MENU screen. (p. 16-76)
• Parity: None (MENU > Function > Data Speed)
• Stop: 1 bit
• Flow control: Xon/Xoff

DDData communication operation

qqSet your own call sign, UR call sign and the repeater
call sign. NOTE:
wwFollow the instructions of the data communication • Only ASCII code can be used for low-speed data
application software. communication.
eeWhen data is entered from a PC through the [DATA] • A message of up to 20 characters can be transmit-
jack, the transceiver automatically transmits it. ted with a DV voice signal.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red. • Depending on the combination of your PC and your serial
• Push [PTT] to transmit data and a voice when “PTT” is data communication software, some data may be lost.
selected in the “DV Data TX” item of the MENU screen. • While receiving voice communication or low-speed
(p. 16-61) data communication through the internet, some
(MENU > DV Set > DV Data TX) packets may be lost due to network error (poor data
• Before transmission, the transceiver sends approximate- throughput performance). In such a case, “L” appears
ly 500 milliseconds of carrier sense. on the LCD to show the Packet Loss has occurred.
• While operating Dualwatch, and one band is scan-
ning, if you receive an image file or text data on the
other band, some of that data may be lost.
This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
9-14
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Data communication (Continued)

DDDV fast data mode
The DV Fast Data can be used with the following prod-
ucts. (As of October 2016)
• ID-51A/ID-51E Plus2
• ID-51A/ID-51E Plus
• ID-51A/ID-51E Icom 50th Anniversary Limited Edition
• ID-5100A/ID-5100E*
*Only for the transceivers whose firmware revision is later
than CPU M 1.10/S 1.00/C 1.10/DSP 1.10.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > DV Set > DV Fast Data > Fast Data)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

TIP: See previous page for details of operation and

settings.

NOTE: When using the DV Fast Data, and if you want

to send the GPS data to other transceivers that can-
not receive the DV Fast Data, confirm the “GPS Data
Speed” is set to “Slow” in the MENU screen.
(p. 16-62)
(MENU > DV Set > DV Fast Data > GPS Data Speed)

TIP: When you connect the transceiver to an An-

droid™ device, you can use the DV Fast Data with
the RS-MS1A remote control software.

Android™
device

To the [DATA] jack

To a [USB]
port

Transceiver OPC-2350LU (Option)

MAKE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver power be-

fore connecting or disconnecting the cable.

9-15
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Speech function
The speech function announces the called station call
sign, or the individual or station call sign that is selected
from the RX History by holding down and rotating
[DIAL].
It is convenient when you cannot watch the LCD, or you
missed the call’s audio.
This function helps you to know the call sign of the call-
er station without looking at the LCD.

DDAnnouncing the received call sign

The received call sign can be announced.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “RX Call Sign SPEECH,”

and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON (Kerchunk)” or “ON
(All).”
• ON (Kerchunk): When a DV call is received, and if the
call time is short, the calling station’s call
sign is announced. (Default) • When “ON (Kerchunk)” is selected
• ON (All): When a DV call is received, the calling
station’s call sign is announced.
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.
• When a DV call is received, the standby beep sounds,
and after approximately 1 second, the call sign is an-
nounced.

K’
NOTE: 1ZL
‘JM
• Even if a “/” and a note are after a call sign, they are
not announced.
• The announced contents cannot be recorded on the
microSD card.
• When “ON (All)” is selected
• The transceiver has other Speech functions:
[DIAL] speech function
The frequency or repeater call sign is announced 1
second after [DIAL] selection.
(MENU > SPEECH > DIAL SPEECH)
Mode speech function ’
tening?
The selected operating mode is announced when u lis
yo
[MODE] is pushed. ‘Are
(MENU > SPEECH > MODE SPEECH) K’
1ZL
• When the digital squelch function is used, and if a ‘JM
received signal is not addressed to your call sign,
or does not include an unmatched digital code, the
calling station’s call sign is not announced.

9-16
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDTo announce the RX>CS call sign
The station call sign that is selected from the RX His-
tory by holding down and rotating [DIAL], will be
announced.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “RX>CS SPEECH,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.” (Default: ON)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
yyWhile holding down , rotating [DIAL] to select
the station call sign.
• After releasing , the selected station call sign is an-
nounced.

NOTE: While the call sign is being announced, you

cannot hear any received audio, and the audio is not
recorded on the microSD card.
If the call sign is announced while recording, the re-
corded contents are silent during the announcement.

[DIAL] • When “ON” is selected

Beeps
While holding down .

Beeps
K
JG3LU After releasing .

9-17
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDSelecting the Speech Language
The speech language can be set to English or Japa-
nese.
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH

Language”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “English” or “Japanese.”
(Default: English)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
•A
 call sign is announced in the selected language.

DDPhonetic Code setting for the Speech al-

phabet character
The speech alphabet characters can be set to phonetic
code.
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Alphabet,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrP ush D-pad() to select “Phonetic Code.”
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.
• When “Phonetic Code” is selected

ONE
I K E
M O
IET KIL
JUL LIMA
U
ZUL
Example: JM1ZLK

9-18
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDSpeech speed selection
The speech speed can be set to slow or fast.
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “SPEECH Speed,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Slow” or “Fast.”
(Default: Fast)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDSpeech level selection

The speech volume level can be set to between 0 (mini-
mum) and 9 (maximum).
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “SPEECH Level,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to set the speech volume level to be-
tween 0 (minimum) and 9 (maximum). (Default: 7)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• When “0” (minimum) is selected, the call sign won’t be
announced.
• The volume level can be adjusted with the [VOL] control.

9-19
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Digital squelch functions

The digital squelch opens only when receiving a signal
addressed to your own call sign, or a signal that in-
cludes a matching digital code.
You can silently wait for calls from others.

DDThe digital call sign squelch setting

qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen is displayed.
•T o use the digital call sign squelch function in another
mode, push [V/MHz] or [M/CALL] to select the
VFO, Memory, or CALL channel mode.
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “DSQL,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select “DSQL S” or “DSQL.”

• DSQL S : Turn ON the digital call sign squelch pocket
beep.
•D  SQL : Turn ON the digital call sign squelch.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set the digital call sign squelch,
and then exit the Quick menu screen.
• “DSQL S” or “DSQL” appears.
yyW
 hen the received signal includes a matching call
sign, the squelch opens and the audio is heard.
• When the received signal’s call sign does not match, digi-
tal call sign squelch does not open; however, the S/RF
meter shows the received signal level.

NOTE:
Appears
• DO NOT use the digital code squelch function when
communicating with two or more stations, because
the digital call sign squelch function opens only
when receiving a signal addressed to your own call
sign. Thus the digital call sign squelch function can
be used when communicating with only one station.
•W  hile operating in the low-speed data communica-
tion mode, the digital squelch opens even if receiving
a signal is not addressed to your own call sign.

• When “DSQL S” is selected

DDPocket beep function with the digital call
sign squelch
When a received signal is addressed to your own call
sign, the transceiver emits beep tones for 30 seconds
and “S” blinks.
➥➥Push [PTT] to answer, or push D-pad(Ent) to stop
the beeps or “S” blinking. .
Beep..
• “S” disappears.
e ep,
p, B
Bee
If no operation is performed for 30 seconds, the beep
tones automatically stops, but “S” continues to blink
to indicate you received a call.
9-20
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Digital squelch functions (Continued)

DDSetting the digital code squelch
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR screen is displayed.
• To use the digital call sign squelch function in another
mode, push [V/MHz] or [M/CALL] to select the
VFO, Memory, or CALL channel mode.
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “DSQL,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select “CSQL S” or “CSQL.”

• CSQL S: 
Turn ON the digital code squelch pocket
beep.
•C  SQL: Turn ON the digital code squelch.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set the digital code squelch, and
then exit the quick menu screen.
• “CSQL S” or “CSQL” appears.
yyPush [MENU] .
uuP  ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/ Appears
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “Digital Code,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ooRotate [DIAL] to select a digital code between 00
and 99 for the digital code squelch function.
!0 Push [MENU] to save and exit the MENU
screen.
!1 When the received signal includes a matching code,
the squelch opens and the audio is heard.
• When the received signal’s code does not match, the
digital code squelch does not open. However, the S/RF
meter shows the received signal strength.

NOTE: While operating in the low-speed data commu-

nication mode, the digital code squelch opens even if
receiving a signal does not match to your digital code.

DD
Pocket beep function with the digital
code squelch
When a received signal matches your digital code, the
transceiver sounds beep tones for 30 seconds and
“S” blinks.
➥➥Push [PTT] to answer, or push D-pad(Ent) to stop
the beeps and the “S” blinking. • When “CSQL S” is selected
• “S” disappears.

If no operation is performed for 30 seconds, the beep

tones automatically stop, but “S” continues to blink
to indicate you received a call.

...
,Beep
eep
p, B
Bee

9-21
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Viewing the call signs

qqPush [MODE] one or more times to select the While operating D-STAR
DV mode. in the Memory mode.
wwHold down for 1 second to display the CALL SIGN
screen.
• The CALL SIGN screen can be displayed in the DR, VFO,
Memory or Call channel mode.
• To select the name display mode, push [QUICK] ,
and then push D-pad() to select “Name Display.” After
selecting, push D-pad(Ent).
eePush [CLR] to return to the previous screen.

Destination call sign

Access repeater call sign
Gateway repeater call sign
Your own call sign

9-22
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Repeater List
You can store repeater information for quick and simple
NOTE: For easy operation, the Repeater List is pre-
communication in up to 750 repeater memory channels
loaded into your transceiver. However, if the CPU
(Repeater List) in up to 30 Groups.
clears all programmed contents (All Reset), the Re-
Entering information into the Repeater List is required
peater List is also cleared. We recommend that mem-
for the DR function.
ory data be backed up externally or be saved to a PC
You can enter four types of operations into the Repeat-
using the supplied CS-51PLUS2 cloning software.
er List, as shown below:
• DV repeater
About the Repeater List:
• DV simplex
The Repeater List can be downloaded from the Icom
• FM repeater
website.
• FM simplex
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/
index.html
DDRepeater List contents
The following contents are included in the Repeater Example: “Hirano” repeater information
List:

• TYPE (Communication type) (p. 9-25)

• NAME (Repeater name) (p. 9-26)
• SUB NAME (Repeater sub name) (p. 9-27)
• CALL SIGN (Repeater call sign and port letter)
(p. 9-28)
• GW CALL SIGN (Gateway repeater’s call sign and
port “G”) (p. 9-29)
• GROUP (Repeater group) (p. 9-29)
• USE(FROM) (Access repeater use) (p. 9-30)
• FREQUENCY (Access repeater’s input frequency)*1
(p. 9-30)
• DUP (Duplex direction)*1 (p. 9-31)
• OFFSET FREQ (Frequency offset)*1 (p. 9-31)
• MODE*2 (p. 9-32)
• TONE*2 (p. 9-32)
• Repeater Tone*2 (p. 9-32)
• POSITION (Position data accuracy level) (p. 9-33)
• LATITUDE (Latitude position of the repeater)
(p. 9-33)
• LONGITUDE (Longitude position of the repeater)
(p. 9-33)
• UTC OFFSET (UTC Offset) (p. 9-34)

*1 Appears only when the “USE(FROM)” option is set

to “YES.”
*2 Appears only when the “TYPE” option is set to “FM
Repeater” or “FM Simplex.”

9-23
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Entering information into Repeater List

This section describes how to manually enter new re-
peater information into the Repeater List.

The required setting items differ, depending on your

communication usage. Be sure to confirm the required
items, as shown below.

NOTE: To enter DV repeater information into the Re-

peater List, the repeater’s call sign MUST be entered.

DDRequired items for the communication cases

Repeater List Used as an Used as a destina- Used for DV Used as an FM Used for FM
contents access repeater tion repeater simplex repeater simplex
● ● ● ● ●
TYPE
(DV Repeater) (DV Repeater) (DV Simplex) (FM Repeater) (FM Simplex)
NAME     
SUB NAME     
CALL SIGN ● ● N/A  N/A
●
GW CALL SIGN ● N/A N/A N/A
(For a Gateway call)
GROUP     
USE(FROM) ●  ● ● ●
FREQUENCY ●  ● ● ●
DUP ●  N/A ● N/A
OFFSET FREQ ●  N/A ● N/A
MODE N/A N/A N/A ● ●
TONE N/A N/A N/A ● 
RPT TONE N/A N/A N/A ● 
POSITION     
LATITUDE     
LONGITUDE     
UTC OFFSET     
●: Must be entered
: Possible to enter
N/A: Not Available

9-24
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List (Continued)

DDNew repeater entry

1. Selecting the repeater group

q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

e Push D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• The repeater groups are displayed.
r Push D-pad() to select the desired repeater group,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Repeater List of the selected repeater group is dis-
played.
t Push [QUICK] .
y Push D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The REPEATER LIST EDIT screen is displayed.

*When you want to add a new repeater by editing a repeater

memory contents, select “Edit.” In this case, after editing, be
sure to select “<<Add Write>>.” If you select “<<Overwrite>>,”
the original repeater entered contents are overwritten. Select
*

2. Selecting the communication type

u Push D-pad() to select “TYPE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the communication type selection
mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

i Push D-pad() to select the communication type.

• DV Repeater: Repeater operation in the DV mode.
• DV Simplex: Simplex operation in the DV mode.
• FM Repeater: Repeater operation in the FM mode.
• FM Simplex: Simplex operation in the FM mode.
o After setting, push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-25
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

3. Entering the repeater name

!0 Push D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the repeater name edit mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!1 Rotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.

• Selectable characters are upper case letters, lower case
letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters, Shows the currently se-
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor. lected character type
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
!2 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second Character type
digit. selection screen
!3 Repeat steps !1 and !2 to enter a name of up to 16
characters, including spaces.
!4 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“East Tokyo” is
entered.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-26
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

4. Entering the repeater sub name

!5 Push D-pad() to select “SUB NAME,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the repeater sub name edit
mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!6 Rotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.

• Selectable characters are upper case letters, lower case
letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters, Shows the currently se-
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor. lected character type
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
!7 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second Character type
digit. selection screen
!8 Repeat steps !6 and !7 to enter a sub name of up to
8 characters, including spaces.
!9 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“Japan” is en-
tered.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-27
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

5. Entering the repeater call sign

When used for simplex communication, go to

[8. Setting the access repeater].
@0 Push D-pad() to select “CALL SIGN,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the repeater call sign edit
mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

@1Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.

•A  to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
@2 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
@3 Repeat steps @1 and @2 to enter a name of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
@4 After entering the call sign, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“JP1YYY A” is
TIP: Be sure to add a repeater node (port) letter as
entered.
the 8th digit in the call sign field after a repeater call
sign, according to the repeater frequency band, as
shown below.
Note that Japanese repeater node letters are differ-
ent.
1200 MHz : A (B in Japan)
430 MHz : B (A in Japan)
144 MHz : C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)

Cross band operation between different nodes at the

same repeater site can be made.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-28
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

6. Entering the gateway repeater call sign

The 8th digit in the call sign, entered in [5. Entering

the repeater call sign] is automatically set to “G” as
the gateway port. You can skip this setting and go to
the next item. If you need to change it, follow the steps
described below.
@5 Push D-pad() to select “GW CALL SIGN,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the gateway repeater call
sign edit mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
Example:
() “JP1YYY G” is
entered.
@6 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
•A  to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
@7 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
@8 Repeat steps @6 and @7 to enter a name of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
• The 8th digit in the gateway repeater call sign is set to
only “G” or a space.
@9 After entering the gateway repeater call sign, push
D-pad(Ent).

7. Viewing the repeater group

In this item, you can view the repeater group that is

selected in [1. Selecting the repeater group]. You can
skip this setting and go to the next item.
If necessary, you can change the repeater group.
#0 Push D-pad() to select “GROUP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the repeater group selection mode.
#1 Push D-pad() to select the desired repeater group
(01 to 30), and then push D-pad(Ent).
•
The selected repeater group is displayed on the RE-
PEATER LIST EDIT screen.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-29
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

8. Setting the access repeater

You can use the entered repeaters as access repeat-

ers when using the DR function.
For simplex operation, or when the entered repeater
is not used as an access repeater, select “NO.” In this
case, the entered repeater does not appear in the
“FROM” selection.
#2Push D-pad() to select “USE(FROM),” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

#3 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
• You can select the entered repeater as an access re-
peater (FROM).

9. Entering the access repeater frequency

#4 Push D-pad() to select “FREQUENCY,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the frequency edit mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
#5 Rotate [DIAL] to enter the 100 MHz digit of the fre-
quency.
#6 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
#7 Repeat steps #5 and #6 to enter the frequency.
#8 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“439.340.00” is
entered.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-30
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

10. Setting the duplex direction

• “DUP–” is automatically set when the access re-

peater frequency is entered in [9. Entering the
access repeater frequency].
• If necessary, you can change the duplex direction.
#9 Push D-pad() to select “DUP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). D-pad
(Ent)
()

$0 Push D-pad() to select the duplex direction.

• OFF: Turn the duplex function OFF.
For a simplex operation, this item MUST be set to
“OFF.”
• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the re-
ceive frequency by the offset amount.
• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the receive
frequency by the offset amount.
$1 After setting, push D-pad(Ent).

11. Entering the frequency offset

• The offset value* is automatically set when the ac-

cess repeater frequency is entered in [9. Entering
the access repeater frequency].
*The default value differs, depending on the transceiver
version.
• If necessary, you can change the frequency offset.
$2 Push D-pad() to select “OFFSET FREQ,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the frequency offset edit
mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
$3 Rotate [DIAL] to enter the frequency offset.
$4 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
$5 Repeat steps $3 and $5 to enter the frequency off-
set.
$6 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-31
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

When ‘2. Selecting the communication type’ is set to

“DV Repeater” or “DV Simplex,” skip this page and go
to the next page.

The FM repeater or FM simplex mode

These items appear only when ‘2. Selecting the com-
munication type’ is set to “FM Repeater” or “FM Sim-
plex.”

1. Setting the FM mode

q Push D-pad() to select “MODE,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to enter the mode selection mode.
w Push D-pad() to select “FM” or “FM-N” and then
push D-pad(Ent).

2. Setting the tone

e Push D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the tone selection mode.
r Push D-pad() to select “TONE,” “TSQL” or “OFF,”
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• OFF: Turn the tone function OFF.
• TONE: Select when the repeater requires an access
tone.
• TSQL: Select when you want to use the tone squelch
operation in simplex.

3. Setting the repeater tone

This setting is required when ‘Setting the tone’ above

is set to “TONE” or “TSQL.”

t Push D-pad() to select “REPEATER TONE,” and

then push D-pad(Ent) to enter the tone selection
mode.
y Push D-pad() to set the tone frequency, and then
push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-32
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

12. Setting the Position data accuracy level

When the Repeater Search function is not used, or

the distance between your position and a repeater is
not displayed, select “OFF.”
$7 Push D-pad() to select “POSITION,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

$8 Push D-pad() to select the position data accuracy

level.
• None: Select when the repeater has no position
data.
• Approximate: Select when the entered position data is
approximate.
• Exact: Select when the entered position data is
exactly correct.
$9 After setting, push D-pad(Ent).

13. Entering the latitude

This item appears only when “Approximate” or “Exact”

is selected in [12. Setting the Position data accuracy
level].
%0 Push D-pad() to select “LATITUDE,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to enter the latitude data edit mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
%1 Rotate [DIAL] to enter the latitude.
%2 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
%3 Repeat steps %1 and %2 to enter the latitude.
%4 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

14. Entering the longitude

This item appears only when “Approximate” or “Exact”

is selected in [12. Setting the Position data accuracy
level].
%5 Push D-pad() to select “LONGITUDE,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the longitude data edit
mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
%6 Rotate [DIAL] to enter the longitude.
%7 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
%8 Repeat steps %6 and %7 to enter the longitude.
%9 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-33
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering information into Repeater List

DD New repeater entry (Continued)

15. Entering the UTC Offset

UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) offset is the time

difference between UTC and repeater local time. This
item enables you to check the destination repeater’s
time when you make a gateway call. (p. 9-42)
^0 Push D-pad() to select “UTC OFFSET,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the UTC offset edit mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

^1 Rotate [DIAL] to enter the time difference between

UTC and the local time.
^2 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

16. Storing the Repeater List

^3 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
^4 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The entered contents are stored to the Repeater List, and
the display returns to the RPT LIST screen.
Select
*

To cancel the entered data:

To cancel the entered data,
push [CLR] to dis-
play “Cancel edit?.” Push
D-pad() to select “YES,”
and then push D-pad(Ent)
to cancel entering and the
display returns the RPT
LIST screen.

* “<<Overwrite>>” appears when “Edit” is selected

in [1. Repeater group selection].

9-34
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Editing a Repeater List

This function edits a repeater’s data. This is useful
when already-entered data is incorrect, has changed
or some data should be added to the list.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that in-
cludes the repeater you want to edit, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be edited.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Edit.”
iiPush D-pad() to select the desired item, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• See pages 9-24 to 9-34 for entry details.
ooAfter editing, the display returns to the REPEATER
LIST EDIT screen.
!0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Overwrite>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent). Example:
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- “East Tokyo” is
pad(Ent). edited.
• The contents are overwritten on the Repeater List, and
the display returns the RPT LIST screen.

9-35
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Deleting a Repeater List

The repeater contents can be deleted from the Repeat-
er List.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that
includes the repeater you want to delete, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be deleted.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The repeater contents are deleted from the Repeater
List, and the display returns to the RPT LIST screen.

Example:
“East Tokyo” is
deleted.

9-36
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Rearranging the repeater display order

You can move the repeaters to rearrange their display
order in the selected repeater group.
Repeater cannot be moved out of their assigned re-
peater group.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that
includes the repeater you want to move, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be moved.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
iiPush D-pad() to select the location to insert the
repeater you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push Select the repeater
D-pad(Ent). to be moved.
• The selected repeater is inserted to above the destina-
tion repeater name.
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected repeater
is moved to the bottom of the repeater group.

Blinks

Blinks Select the

destination

“East Tokyo” is
moved to the
bottom.

9-37
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Adding Repeater information using RX History

This section describes how to add a new repeater infor-
mation to the Repeater List using RX History.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“RX History”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select the RX history number that

includes the repeater you want to add to the Repeat-
er List. RX history number
rrPush D-pad(Ent).
• The RX History detail screen is displayed.
ttP
 ush D-pad() to display “RXRPT1” and “RXRPT2.”
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Add To RPT List,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select the repeater call sign you
want to add to the Repeater List, and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• When only one call sign is displayed, directly push D-
pad(Ent).
• The display is switched from the RX HISTORY screen
to the REPEATER LIST EDIT screen of the MENU. The
selected repeater call sign is automatically entered.
• If necessary, edit the contents. (pp. 9-24 to 9-34)
ooPush D-pad() to select “<<Add To RPT List>>,” and “RXRPT1”and
then push D-pad(Ent). “RXRPT2” are
!0 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- displayed.
pad(Ent).
• The entered contents are added to the Repeater List, and
the display returns to the RX HISTORY screen.

Example:
“JP1YJJ A” is
added.

9-38
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Skip settings for the DR scan

You can set unnecessary repeaters as scan skip tar-
gets. The selected repeaters are skipped during scan-
ning for faster selection and scanning.
You can set the skip setting to all repeaters in the se-
lected repeater group, or individual repeaters.

TIP: When a repeater is set as a skip target, its “USE

(FROM)” setting is automatically set to “NO.” In this
case, the repeater cannot be selected in “FROM” (Ac-
cess repeater).

DDIndividual skip setting

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that in-
cludes the repeater you want to set the skip setting Select the repeat-
on, and then push D-pad(Ent). er group.
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be skipped
during the DR scan.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “SKIP” appears on the selected repeater. Select the repeat-
• Push [QUICK] and select “SKIP” again, then push er to set the skip
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the skip setting. setting
• When “SKIP All ON” is selected, push D-pad(Ent) to set
all repeaters in the group as skip targets.

TIP: When you select “Re-

peater List” on the FROM
SELECT screen, you can
set the skip settings in the
same way as described
above.

Appears

9-39
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Skip settings for the DR scan (Continued)

DDGroup skip setting

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group to be
skipped during the DR scan. Select the repeat-
ttPush [QUICK] . er group to set the
yyPush D-pad() to select “SKIP All ON,” and then skip setting
push D-pad(Ent).
• “SKIP” appears on the selected repeater group.
• Push [QUICK] again and select “SKIP All OFF,” then
push D-pad(Ent) to cancel the skip setting.

TIP: When you select “Re-

peater List” on the FROM
SELECT screen, you can
set the skip settings in the
same way as described
above.

Appears

9-40
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Entering the repeater group name

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group you want
to enter the name.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Edit Name,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to enter the group name edit mode.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
• Selectable characters are upper case letters, lower case
letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters, Group name
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor. edit mode
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
iiPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
ooRepeat steps u and i to enter a name of up to 16
characters, including spaces.
!0 After entering, push D-pad(Ent) two times.
Shows the currently se-
lected character type

Character type
selection screen

Example:
“China” is entered.

9-41
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Repeater detail screen

Depending on the contents, such as position data, UTC Example: Shows the “Hirano” repeater detail screen
offset, and so on, the distance between your position
and the repeater or repeater time can be displayed on
the REPEATER DETAIL screen.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR screen is displayed.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Gateway CQ,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “11: Japan”
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Hirano”
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Detail,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The REPEATER DETAIL screen is displayed.
iiPush D-pad(Ent) to return to the RPT LIST screen.

To view the repeater details screen when the DR

screen is displayed:

qqPush [QUICK] to open the quick menu screen. Repeater

wwPush D-pad() to select “Repeater Detail,” and name Call sign
then push D-pad(Ent). Sub name
• The REPEATER DETAIL screen is displayed. Repeater
Group frequency
number Duplex setting
Distance from
your position
Repeater time
Direction from your position*

* When the position data accuracy level is set to “Approxi-

Repeater is set in “FROM” “Repeater Detail” is selected mate,” direction data is not displayed if the distance to the
repeater is under 5 kilometers.
9-42
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Entering the Your (destination) call sign

A Your (destination) call sign can be manually entered. Example: Enter “TOM/JM1ZLK” to the Your Call Sign
The Your (destination) call sign is set to “TO,” you can memory.
make a call to a station, even if you don’t know where
the station is currently located.

Up to 200 Your call signs can be entered.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush [QUICK] .
ttPush D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the edit mode.
yyPush D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(For example: T)
• Selectable characters are upper case letters, lower case Select
letters, numbers or symbols. (Select when you edit
• The selected character blinks. the Your call sign.)
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
iiPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
ooRepeat steps u and i to enter a name of up to 16
characters, including spaces.
(For example: First, T, then O, then M.)
!0 After entering, push D-pad(Ent) two times.

“TOM” is entered.

☞ Continued on the next page

9-43
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Entering the Your (destination) call sign (Continued)

!1 Push D-pad() to select “CALL SIGN,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
!2 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
(For example: J)
•A  to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
• Push [CLR] to erase the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously erase the characters af-
ter the cursor.
!3 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
!4 Repeat steps !2 and !3 to enter a call sign of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
(For example: First, J, then M, then 1, then Z, then
L, then K.)
!5 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).
!6 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
!7 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). “JM1ZLK” is entered.
!8 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

[DIAL]

Select
When you select
“Edit” in step t on
the previous page
“ < < O ve r w r i t e > > ”
appears here. If
you select “<<Over-
write>>,” the en-
tered call sign over-
writes the original
call sign.

To cancel the entered data:

To cancel the entered data, “TOM/JM1ZLK”
push [CLR] to dis- is entered into
play “Cancel edit?.” Push the Your Call
D-pad() to select “YES,” Sign memory.
and then push D-pad(Ent)
to cancel entry and the
display returns the YOUR
CALL SIGN screen. When “TOM” is selected,
“JM1ZLK” is displayed here.
9-44
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Deleting Your (destination) call sign

You can delete Your (destination) call signs from the
Your Call Sign memory.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the Your call sign you want
to delete.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- Select the call sign
pad(Ent). you want to delete.
• The selected call sign is deleted from the memory, and
the display returns the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.

Example:
“TOM” is deleted.

9-45
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Rearranging the display order of Your (destination) call sign

You can move Your call signs to rearrange their display
order.
It is easy to find stations that you often communicate if
the stations are moved to the top of the memory.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the call sign you want to
Select a Your
move.
call sign you
ttPush [QUICK] . want to move.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
uuPush D-pad() to select the location to insert the
call sign you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The selected call sign is inserted to above the destina-
tion.
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected call sign
is moved to the bottom of the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.

Blinks

Blinks

Select the
destination

“ICOM AMC”
is moved to
the bottom.

9-46
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■About the Repeater List default values

You can check the Repeater List default values using
the supplied CS-51PLUS2 cloning software.

The ICF (Icom Cloning Format) file, including the de-

fault Repeater List, can also be downloaded from the
Icom website.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/
index.html

If you open the downloaded ICF file with the CS-

51PLUS2, the Repeater List default values are dis-
played on the screen.
To reset the Repeater List to the default, write the ICF
file to the transceiver using the CS-51PLUS2*1, or copy
the ICF file to the microSD card*2, and then write to the
transceiver.

*1 See the CS-51PLUS2 instruction manual when us-

ing the CS-51PLUS2.
*2 See page 2-10 when using the microSD card.
Double-
DDOpening the default Repeater List click
qqStart the CS-51PLUS2.
• See the CS-51PLUS2 instruction manual for how to in-
stall the software.
wwClick [Open] to open the ICF file.
eeClick the [Repeater List] folder to show the default
Repeater List.
Select

Click
You can see
the default
values of the
Repeater List
on the CS-
51PLUS2.

When the ICF file is opened on the CS-51PLUS2.

9-47
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Is your setting correct?

If you make a Local Area call with the Gateway call set-
ting, the destination repeater, selected in “TO,” will be
busy while you transmit.
So the station that uses that repeater as their Access
repeater cannot access it, as shown below.
BE SURE to set CQCQCQ in “TO” when you intend to
make a local call, or after you finish a Gateway call.

Example: JM1ZLK wants to make a Local Area call.

Hamacho repeater Hirano repeater correct! ater!

ing is in e
His sett ccess the rep
a n n o t a
Ic
ning
ning liste r t A
LK
liste r t A 1 Z p o
L K o JM P1YIU all...
Z p on J local
c
JM1 P1YIU all... a
J c tenin
g for
on local LK lis
JM1Z YIU por t
A
a
for on J P 1
loc a l c a ll .
..
for a
Caller Called
(JM1ZLK)
Hirano area

Hamacho area

NOTE: With this setting, the

JM1ZLK’s setting
Local Area call can be made,
but the destination repeater,
selected in “TO,” is also busy
while you transmit.
So the station that uses that
repeater as their Access re-
peater cannot access it.

The destination (“TO”) setting is incorrect.

Correct setting

To make a Local Area call, set the destina-

tion (“TO”) to “CQCQCQ.”
See page 8-9 for details.

9-48
Previous view

Section 10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS operation................................................................... 10-2
DD Receiving GPS data...................................................... 10-2
■■ Checking GPS Position..................................................... 10-3
DD Displaying Position Data................................................ 10-3
DD Caller’s TX format.......................................................... 10-5
DD Displayed items............................................................. 10-6
DD TX format: D-PRS Position (Mobile).............................. 10-7
DD TX format: D-PRS Position (Base)................................ 10-7
DD TX format: D-PRS Object............................................... 10-8
DD TX format: D-PRS Item.................................................. 10-8
DD TX format: D-PRS Weather............................................ 10-9
DD TX mode: NMEA............................................................ 10-9
DD Changing the GPS memory/alarm channel.................. 10-10
DD Changing the Grid Locator.......................................... 10-10
DD Changing the Compass Direction................................ 10-10
DD Saving your own or received position data.................. 10-11
■■ Checking GPS Information (Sky view screen)................. 10-12
■■ GPS memory operation................................................... 10-13
DD GPS Memory .............................................................. 10-13
DD Add a GPS memory.................................................... 10-13
DD Entering the GPS group name.................................... 10-18
DD Deleting GPS data....................................................... 10-19
DD Rearranging the display order of the GPS memory.... 10-20
DD Setting the GPS alarm................................................ 10-21
■■ Transmitting GPS data (D-PRS and NMEA).................... 10-23
DD Type of position data................................................... 10-23
■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data..................................... 10-24
DD D-PRS......................................................................... 10-24
DD Operating D-PRS (DV-A)............................................. 10-24
DD Setting D-PRS (DV-A).................................................. 10-25
DD Displaying your position using a mapping program..... 10-29
■■ Transmitting NMEA (DV-G) data...................................... 10-31
DD Setting the GPS data sentence................................... 10-31
DD Entering a GPS message............................................ 10-32
■■ GPS Auto transmission................................................... 10-33
DD Setting the GPS automatic transmission..................... 10-33
■■ GPS Logger function....................................................... 10-34
DD GPS Logger operating outline..................................... 10-34
DD Setting the GPS Logger function................................. 10-34
DD Setting the GPS record interval................................... 10-35
DD Setting the GPS record sentence................................ 10-35
DD Viewing the route on a PC Map................................... 10-36
DD Using <<GPS Logger Only>> mode............................ 10-38

10-1
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■GPS operation
The transceiver has a built-in internal GPS receiver. The • Connection
GPS receiver’s position information can be received
in any mode. Also, a NMEA format compatible exter-
nal GPS receiver can be connected to the ID-51A/E To the
RS-232C Port GPS
through the [DATA] port.
Receiver
To the [DATA] Cable
To receive signals from an external GPS source, connect jack
an external NMEA format compatible receiver to the ID- RS-232C (DB-9 female)
To the [DATA] jack w
51A/E according to the instructions, shown below. The
t e q
cable is not an Icom product and must be made sepa- TxD GND
rately. Refer to the wiring diagram for pin connections.
• Position data can be transmitted in only the DV mode. RxD
o y
ø 2.5 mm Less than ø 6.0 mm

Connect w with RxD, e with TxD and t with GND.

DDReceiving GPS data

Confirm that the GPS receiver is receiving your posi- To prolong the battery life in the GPS mode
tion and time. To prolong the battery life while operating in the GPS
The GPS icon blinks when searching for satellites. mode, manually update your position with the re-
ceived GPS data.
  
The GPS icon stops blinking when the minimum number of
needed satellites are found. qqSet the “GPS Select” option to “Internal GPS,” and re-
ceive your position from the internal GPS receiver.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set> GPS Select)
wwOpen the MANUAL POSITION screen, and then
• It may take only a few seconds to calculate your posi-
push [QUICK] .
tion. But depending on the environment, it may take a few
minutes. If you have difficulties receiving, we recommend (MENU > GPS > GPS Set> Manual Position)
that you try a different location. eeD-pad() to select “Cap-
• The icon does not appear when: ture From GPS,” and
“GPS Select” item is set to “Manual.” then push D-pad(Ent).
(GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)  • 
Your current position is
“GPS Indicator” item is set to “OFF.” now memorized and dis-
(GPS > GPS Set > GPS Indicator) played on the MANUAL
POSITION screen.
Set the “GPS Select” item to “External GPS” when an
rrAfter that, set the “GPS
external GPS receiver is connected.
Select” option to “Manual.”
NOTE: Continuous using the Internal GPS mode makes the
transceiver’s battery easier to be exhausted.
Longer battery time can be achieved by turning ON the
Power Save mode. See page 16-32 for details.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Power Save (Internal GPS))

NOTE: When using the GPS receiver

• GPS signals cannot pass through metal objects. When using the ID-51A or ID-51E inside a vehicle, you may not
receive GPS signals. We recommend you use it near a window.
• The Global Positioning System (GPS) is built and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. The Department is
responsible for accuracy and maintenance of the system. Any changes by the Department may affect the accuracy
and function of the GPS system.
• When the GPS receiver is activated, please do not cover the ID-51A or ID-51E with anything that will block the
satellite signals.
• The GPS receiver may not work if used in the following locations:
1. Tunnels or high-rise buildings 2. Underground parking lots 3. Under a bridge or viaduct
4. In remote forested areas 5. Under bad weather conditions (rainy or cloudy day)
• The GPS receiver may not work if the transceiver operates near the 440.205 MHz. This is due to signals made in
the internal circuit and does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
10-2
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■Checking GPS Position

You can check your current position.
The GPS position screen is cancelled when [PTT] is
pushed. After releasing, the screen automatically appears.
During transmission, the GPS position screen can be se-
lected by pushing [QUICK] .

DDDisplaying Position Data

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Position,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
The first MY GPS position screen appears. (1/5)
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to view other position screens.

• MY Position: Displays your latitude and longitude, MY Position
grid locator, altitude, speed*, time,
direction* and compass heading*. Compass
direction Top Latitude
*Does not appear when “GPS Se- is North
lect” is set to “Manual.” (p. 16-32) Longitude
Your course
(GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select) heading is Grid Locator
• RX Position 1: Displays the caller station’s latitude north-east
Altitude
and longitude, grid locator, altitude, Your course
distance/direction from your posi- heading is
170 degrees
tion, D-PRS symbol, call sign and
SSID.
•
Depending on the received signal,
some data may not be displayed. RX Position 1
(p. 10-6)
• RX Position 2: Displays the caller station’s call sign,
The direction of
SSID, course, speed, TX power lev- the RX station
el, height, antenna gain, antenna from you.
direction, temperature, rainfall, wind The station is
east-northeast
direction, wind speed, barometric of you.
pressure, humidity and Time stamp. The distance
•
Depending on the received signal, Shows the from you to
D-PRS the station
some data may not be displayed. symbol
(p. 10-6) Caller’s call sign
RX Position 2 with SSID.

The course
heading of the
RX station is
41 degrees
Shows the
from north.
time the caller
acquired the
• Example of the GPS data screens to the right position data

GPS alarm:
GPS memory:
Tokyo Skytree
Tokyo Big Sight
249 ml 251 ml

RX station
☞☞Continued on the next page
Your Course is 41 degrees
station Speed is 0.4 mph.
Course is 170 degrees Speed is 0.4 mph.

10-3
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position

DD Displaying Position Data (Continued)

ee(Continued) MEM Position

• MEM Position: The position of the GPS memory
location in Latitude, Longitude and The direction
Grid Locator are displayed. Also, the from you to
Distance and Direction from you to the memory
the location is displayed. location.
The location is The
• ALM Position: The position of the GPS memory lo- east-northeast distance
cation for the GPS alarm function in of you. from you to
Latitude, Longitude and Grid Loca- the memory
tor are displayed. Also, the Distance location
and Direction from you to the loca- ALM Position *
tion is displayed.
rrPush [CLR] to cancel the GPS POSITION
screen and return to the operating screen. The direction
from you to the
alarm location.
The
The location is
distance
east-northeast
NOTE: The latitude, longitude and altitude may differ, of you.
from you to
the alarm
depending on your GPS selection of either the inter- location
nal or an external GPS receiver. Also, the time may
*
not be displayed, depending on the external GPS.
*When a name is not assigned to the memory channel,
Day and Time are displayed instead of the name.

10-4
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDCaller’s TX format
GPS position data has two transmit modes: D-PRS
and NMEA. Moreover, with the D-PRS mode data, five
types of position format, Position (Mobile station/Base
station), Object, Item and Weather, are selectable.

D-PRS (DV-A) NMEA (DV-G)

Position (Mobile)

Position (Base)

Object
Example: When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS
Item Position (Mobile)

Weather

• D-PRS: D-PRS is a function which simultaneously

For users who have a D-STAR transceiver model
sends position data received from the inter-
prior to the ID-51A/E:
nal or external GPS receiver, using the slow
The GPS TX mode, “GPS (DV-G)” and “GPS-A (DV-
speed data packet space, along with voice.
A),” are now called “NMEA” and “D-PRS.”
• Mobile: A station operating while moving.
• Base: A station operating at home or in any build-
• GPS (DV-G)  NMEA
ing.
• GPS-A (DV-A)  D-PRS
• Object:  A station transmitting specific position
data.
 An event notice, earthquake information,
satellite track information, and so on, can
be transmitted.
You can add a time stamp data to the object
signal.
• Item: A station transmitting specific position data,
not containing time data.
Position information such as a traffic ac-
cident, lighthouse, antenna or DV access
point location, and so on, can be transmit-
ted.
You cannot add a time stamp to the item
signal.
• Weather: A station transmitting weather information
received from a weather device.
• NMEA:  A station transmitting position data
(NMEA0183) received from the internal or
an external GPS receiver.

10-5
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDDisplayed items
Depending on the caller’s transmit mode or transmit format, the displayed items differ.
D-PRS
Position Object Item

Data extension: Power/Height/Gain/Directivity

Data extension: Power/Height/Gain/Directivity

Data extension: Course/Speed

Data extension: Course/Speed

Data extension: OFF

Data extension: OFF

Weather
Mobile
NMEA

Base

Compass ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Latitude ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Longitude ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Grid locator ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Altitude ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Distance ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Direction ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Speed ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Power ✓ ✓ ✓
Height ✓ ✓ ✓
Gain ✓ ✓ ✓
Directivity ✓ ✓ ✓
Temperature ✓
Rainfall ✓
Wind direction ✓
Wind speed ✓
Barometric pressure ✓
Humidity ✓
Symbol ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SSID ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Time stamp ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Call sign ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓: Displayed

10-6
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDTX format: D-PRS Position (Mobile) DDTX format: D-PRS Position (Base)
The following items are displayed when the caller’s TX The following items are displayed when the caller’s TX
format is D-PRS Position (Mobile). format is D-PRS Position (Base).

Displays the caller’s direction from Displays the caller’s direction from
Compass Compass
your position your position
Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the Displays the grid locator based on the
GL GL
caller’s latitude and longitude. caller’s latitude and longitude.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
Displays the caller’s distance from Displays the caller’s distance from
DST DST
your position your position
Displays the caller’s call sign (with Displays the caller’s call sign (with
Call sign Call sign
SSID) SSID)
Displays the caller’s direction over POWER Displays the caller’s TX power level
COURSE
ground HEIGHT Displays the height of caller’s antenna
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed GAIN Displays the gain of caller’s antenna
Displays the time that the caller Displays the direction the caller’s an-
GPS Time Stamp DIRECT
acquired the position data. tenna was pointing
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
acquired the position data.

10-7
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDTX format: D-PRS Object DDTX format: D-PRS Item

The following items are displayed when the caller’s TX The following items are displayed when the caller’s TX
format is D-PRS Object. format is D-PRS Item.

Displays the Object station’s direction Displays the Item station’s direction
Compass Compass
from your position from your position
Displays the Object station’s D-PRS Displays the Item station’s D-PRS
Symbol Symbol
symbol symbol
Latitude Displays the Object station’s latitude Latitude Displays the Item station’s latitude
Longitude Displays the Object station’s longitude Longitude Displays the Item station’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the Displays the grid locator based on the
GL GL
Object station’s latitude and longitude. Item station’s latitude and longitude.
ALT Displays the Object station’s altitude ALT Displays the Item station’s altitude
Displays the Object station’s distance Displays the Item station’s distance
DST DST
from your position from your position
Object name Displays the Object station’s name Item name Displays the Item station’s name
Displays the caller’s call sign (with Displays the caller’s call sign (with
Call sign Call sign
SSID) SSID)
Displays the Object station’s direction Displays the Item station’s direction
COURSE COURSE
over ground over ground
SPEED Displays the Object station’s speed SPEED Displays the Item station’s speed
Displays the Object station’s TX Displays the Item station’s TX power
POWER POWER
power level level
Displays the height of Object station’s Displays the height of Item station’s
HEIGHT HEIGHT
antenna antenna
Displays the gain of Object station’s Displays the gain of Item station’s an-
GAIN GAIN
antenna tenna
Displays the direction that the Object Displays the direction that the Item
DIRECT DIRECT
station’s antenna was pointing station’s antenna was pointing
Displays the time that the caller sent
GPS Time Stamp
the Object station’s data.

TIP: When the Object station is disabled, “KILLED” TIP: When the Item station is disabled, “KILLED” ap-
appears. pears.

10-8
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDTX format: D-PRS Weather DDTX mode: NMEA

The following items are displayed when the caller’s TX The following items are displayed when the caller’s TX
format is D-PRS Weather. mode is NMEA.

Displays the caller’s direction from Displays the caller’s direction from
Compass Compass*
your position your position.
Displays the caller station’s D-PRS Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Symbol
symbol Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude Displays the grid locator based on the
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude GL
caller’s latitude and longitude.
Displays the grid locator based on the ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
GL
caller’s latitude and longitude. Displays the caller’s distance from
Displays the caller’s distance from DST
DST your position
your position Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign
Displays the caller’s call sign (with Displays the caller’s direction over
Call sign COURSE
SSID) ground
Displays the temperature at the call-
Temperature SPEED Displays the caller’s speed
er’s area
Displays the time that the caller
Displays the humidity at the caller’s GPS Time Stamp
Humidity acquired the position data.
area
Displays the rainfall at the caller’s
RAIN
area
Displays the wind direction at the
WIND DIR
caller’s area
Displays the wind speed at the call-
WIND SPD
er’s area
Displays the barometric pressure at
BARO
the caller’s area
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
acquired the weather data.

10-9
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDChanging the GPS memory/alarm channel
While displaying the GPS position screen, GPS memo- MEM screen ALM screen
ry or GPS alarm location can be changed.

qqWhile the MEM or ALM screen is displayed, push

[QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory Select” or
“Alarm Select,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The GPS Memory or Alarm Select screen appears.
eePush D-pad() to select the desired Memory or
Alarm location.

DDChanging the Grid Locator • The grid locator map of Japan

Grid Locator (GL) is a location compressed into a 6
character code, calculated by the longitude and the lati- 140°
tude.
The locator is simply calculated by dividing the earth PN
surface into squares.
It is used to find the location of a radio station.
QN 40°

Field PM
PM74SO QM
Square

Subsquare

DDChanging the Compass Direction

You can change the compass direction between Head-
ing Up, North Up and South Up.

qqWhile the MY, RX1, MEM or ALM screen is dis-

played, push [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Compass Direction,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select the compass direction, and

then push D-pad(Ent).
• Heading Up: The compass always points to your
heading course direction.
• North Up: The top is always north.
• South Up: The top is always south.
Heading Up North Up South Up

10-10
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDSaving your own or received position data
With this function, you can save the position informa-
tion of your station wherever you are, and also the posi-
tion information of the station you received it from.

The GPS Memory is capable of storing 200 memories

in total, assignable to one of 27 groups, A to Z and
“(No Group).”

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Position,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad MY Position
(Ent) Select the MY posi-
() tion screen to save
your position.
eePush D-pad() to select the position screen that you
want to save the contents.
• To save your position, select the MY position screen.
• To save the RX station’s position, select the R1 position
screen.
rrPush [QUICK] .
ttPush D-pad() to select “Add To GPS Memory,” and
push D-pad(Ent).
• The GPS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed.
• The position information (Latitude/Longitude) is automat-
ically added.
• See pages 10-13 to 10-17 for details on editing position
data.
yyPush D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Add Write?” appears.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The added GPS Memory is saved as [00], and the previ- GPS MEMORY EDIT
ously saved memory numbers are moved up. screen is displayed,
• The position data is added to GPS Memory and then and Latitude and
returns to the GPS POSITION screen. Longitude are added.
iiPush [CLR] to exit the GPS POSITION screen.
Select the destination
group to be saved.

MY Position
Your position is saved
into “(No Group)” in
the GPS Memory.

10-11
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■Checking GPS Information (Sky view screen)

This screen is used to display received GPS satellite in-
formation when the GPS indicator does not stop blink-
ing for a long time.
The GPS Information screen displays the quantity, sig-
nal power and position of the GPS satellites.
The Sky view screen shows the position of GPS satel-
lites.
The screen also shows the direction, elevation angle,
satellite numbers and their received signal strength sta-
tus.

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Information,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

Meaning of the indications

• (): Untracking satellite.
• (01): Tracking satellite with a weak signal shown
in satellite number.
• (01):  Tracking satellite with a strong signal
shown in satellite number.
Tracking satellite
• (SAT): The quantity of tracking satellites.
quantity
• Altitude:The altitude of your station.
The altitude is only displayed when more Sky view
than 4 satellites are tracked. When less screen
than 3 satellites are tracked, [------ft] is dis- Altitude
played.
Latitude
• Longitude/Latitude:
Longitude
Longitude and Latitude of your station.
eePush [QUICK] to exit the GPS INFO screen.

North

• The image of the satellite number 23

Elevation angle 90 degree
line (Zenith)
Elevation angle Satellite number Untracked
60 degree line 13’s signal is satellite
Elevation angle weak.
30 degree line
Satellite number
Elevation angle 19’s signal is
Satellite 0 degree line
number strong.
23
Elevation angle 90 Elevation angle
degree line (Zenith) 0 degree line
Elevation angle Elevation angle
60 degree line 30 degree line

10-12
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■GPS memory operation

DDGPS Memory
You can add GPS data to GPS Memory. GPS Memory
You can add the your own position, other station’s posi-
tion or any positions that are manually entered. (No Group)
Also, an alarm can be set to GPS Memory to sound,
depending on the distance from your station. A: Icom Office ICOM Head Office

The GPS Memory is capable of storing a total of 200 B: Station Tokyo

memories in an “ALL” folder, or conveniently stored in
up to 27 groups, from A to Z and “(No Group).” The C: Airport Osaka
groups can also be named. (p. 16-38)

(Group names are

DDAdd a GPS memory Z: just example.)
1. A
 dding GPS Memory and entering the edit mode
q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

e Push D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
r Push D-pad() to select “(No Group),” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
•A
 ll the previously added GPS memories are displayed.
t Push [QUICK] .
yP  ush D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The GPS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed.

GPS
MEMORY
screen is
displayed.

Select “Add”
*

*When you want to edit the entered memory con-

tents, select “Edit.”

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-13
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

2. Entering the GPS Memory name

u Push D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

iR
 otate [DIAL] to select the first character.
•S  electable input characters are upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
o Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a GPS Memory
name of up to 16 characters, including spaces. Character
!1 After entering, push D-pad(Ent). type selection
screen

(Example)
When entering
“HOME”

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-14
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

3. Entering the GPS Memory date

!2 Push D-pad() to select “DATE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The date edit screen is displayed.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!3 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the date.

• A date between 2000/01/02 to 2099/12/30 can be en-
tered.
!4 Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or back-
ward to select and edit the year, month or day.
!5 Repeat steps !3 and !4 to enter a GPS Memory
date.
!6 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

4. Entering the GPS memory time

!7 Push D-pad() to select “TIME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The time edit screen is displayed.
!8 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the time.
•A
 time between 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 can be entered.
!9 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor forward or back-
ward to select and edit the hour, minute or second.
@0 Repeat steps !8 and !9 to enter GPS Memory time.
@1 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

5. Entering the GPS latitude

@2 Push D-pad() to select “LATITUDE,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The latitude edit screen is displayed.
@3 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the latitude.
• A latitude between 0°00.00' to 90°00.00' can be entered.
If "ddd°mm'ss"" is selected in the Latitude/Longitude

screen, between 0°00'00" to 90°00'00" can be entered.
(MENU > Display > Display Unit > Latitude/Longitude)
@4 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor to forward or
backward to select and edit degrees or decimal min-
utes.
@5 Repeat steps @3 and @4 to enter a GPS Memory lati-
tude.
• Select “N” to enter a north latitude, and “S” to enter a
south latitude.
@6 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-15
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

6. Entering the GPS longitude

@7 Push D-pad() to select “LONGITUDE,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The longitude edit screen is displayed.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

@8 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the longitude.

• A longitude between 0°00.00' to 180°00.00' can be en-
tered.
If "ddd°mm'ss"" is selected in the Latitude/Longitude

screen, between 0°00'00" to 90°00'00" can be entered.
(MENU > Display > Display Unit > Latitude/Longitude)
@9 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor to forward or back-
ward to select and edit degrees or decimal minutes.
#0 Repeat steps @8 and @9 to enter a GPS Memory lon-
gitude.
• Select “E” to enter an east longitude, and “W” to enter a
west longitude.

#1 After entering, push D-pad(Ent). 5

7. Entering the GPS altitude
#2 Push D-pad() to select “ALTITUDE,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The Altitude edit screen is displayed.
#3 Rotate [DIAL] to toggle between plus and minus.
#4 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor forward or back-
ward to select a digit.
#5 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the altitude.
• You can enter between –32808 and +32808 feet.
#6 Repeat steps #4 and #5 to enter the GPS Memory
altitude.
#7 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

8. Entering the GPS memory group

#8 Push D-pad() to select “GROUP,” and then push Select
D-pad(Ent).
• The group edit screen is displayed.
#9 Push D-pad() to select a group between A and Z,
or select “(No Group),” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Each group is capable of storing up to 200 GPS memo-
ries.
$0 After selecting, push D-pad(Ent).

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-16
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

9. Writing the GPS memory
$1 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• If a previously added GPS memory is edited, select
“<<Overwrite>>.”
• “Add write?” appears.
$2 Push D-pad(#) to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

To cancel the entered data:

qqTo cancel the entered
data, push [CLR] to
display “Cancel edit?.”
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select
“YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to cancel edit-
ing and return to the GPS
Memory’s channel list (Example)
screen. When “HOME”
is saved in
“(NO GROUP)”.

10-17
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

DD Entering the GPS group name
You can enter a name for each GPS group.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then GPS MEMORY

screen
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired group to edit
its name.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Edit Name,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
uuThe group name editing screen appears.
iiRotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
•S  electable input characters are upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks. Select
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window. Group name
•A  space can be entered in any input mode. editing screen
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details. Character
ooPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second type selection
digit. screen
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a group name of up
to 16 characters, including a space.
!1 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

(Example)
When a group
name is entered as
“My Favorite.”

10-18
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

Example: Deleting all memories in “(No Group).”
DDDeleting GPS data
All the contents of a GPS memory group can be de-
leted.
Please note that deleted GPS memories cannot be re-
stored.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the memory group that has
the memories you want to delete.
Example: (No Group)
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete All In Group,” and
then D-pad(Ent).
uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
5
pad(Ent).
•A
 ll memories in the group are deleted.

All memories in “(No

Group)” are deleted,
and “-- Blank --” is
displayed if you enter
the (NO GROUP)
screen.

To delete a specific GPS memory channel:

GPS memories can be deleted.
qqSelect a specific memory, as illustrated to the right,
and then push [QUICK] .
wwP ush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The contents in the selected group are deleted.

Select a memory to be erased. Select “Delete.”

10-19
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

DDRearranging the display order of the GPS memory
You can move GPS memories to rearrange their dis-
play order in the selected GPS memory group.
A GPS memory cannot be moved out of their assigned
memory group.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the GPS memory group
that has the GPS memory you want to move, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the GPS memory to be
moved.
Select the memory
yyPush [QUICK] .
to be moved.
uuPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
iiPush D-pad() to select the location to insert the
memory you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The selected memory contents are inserted above the
destination memory name.
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected memory
contents are moved to the bottom of the GPS memory
group.

Blinks

Select the
destination

“Tokyo Big Sight”

is moved to the
bottom.

10-20
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

DDSetting the GPS alarm
A GPS alarm can sound when a target position comes
into the alarm area.
This function can be set to the caller station, all GPS
Memory channels, a specified Memory group or a
specified Memory channel.

• Alarm area (Group) — Setting plural stations • Alarm area (RX/Memory)— Setting specific stations
When all channels or group is selected: When a specified memory is selected:

Point A N
0.25’ 0.25’ Extended range
(approx. 1 km; 1094 Y)
0.25’

Your Your
position position
0.25’

Point B Limited range

(approx. 500 m; 547 Y)
Point C (Beeps three times)
Beeps one times Beeps three times

qqPush [MENU] .
Example: Alarm Area (Group)
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
Alarm Setting is set to all GPS Memories.
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Alarm,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Alarm Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “Group,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
yyPush D-pad() to select “All Memories,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• If you wish to set the alarm to a GPS Memory group,
select one between A to Z or “(No Group).”
uuPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• When either one of the stations in a specified group en-
ters its set range, the beep sounds three times.
• When the GPS alarm beeps, “GPS ALARM” pops up on
the screen and then the “S” icon blinks.
•To cancel the GPS alarm, repeat step t and select
“OFF.”
NOTE: When “Group” is selected in step t, and a tar-
get position enters in the active alarm range specified
in “Alarm area (Group)” of the Menu screen, the GPS
alarm sounds. (p. 16-39)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Alarm Area (Group))

• GPS Alarm beeping screen

Blinks

“All Memories”
The pop up is is displayed.
displayed and
beeps 3 times.
10-21
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation

DD Setting the GPS alarm (Continued)
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and Example: Alarm Area (RX/Memory)
then push D-pad(Ent). Alarm Setting is set to RX.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Alarm,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Alarm Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “RX,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• If you want to set the alarm to a specified GPS memory
channel, select “Memory,” then push D-pad(Ent). And
then, select the channel in the GPS memory group.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• When a set station is in the approximate 1 kilometer
range, GPS Alarm beeps once, and when it is in the ap-
proximate 500 meter range, beeps three times.
(Default: Both)
• When the GPS alarm beeps, “GPS ALARM” pops up on
the screen and then the “S” icon blinks.
•To cancel the GPS alarm, repeat step t and select
“OFF.”

NOTE:
• When “RX” or a GPS memory channel is selected in
step t, the GPS alarm sounds depend on the “Alarm
Area (RX/Memory)” setting in the Menu screen.
(p. 16-40)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Alarm Area (RX/Memory)) “RX” is
• Even if “RX” is selected in step t, and the received displayed.
signal has no position, the GPS alarm does not
sound.

• GPS Alarm beeping screen

Blinks

The pop up is displayed

and beeps sound, de-
pending on the setting
of the alarm area.

10-22
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■Transmitting GPS data (D-PRS and NMEA)

DDType of position data
GPS position data has two TX modes, D-PRS (DV-A)
and NMEA (DV-G). Moreover, in the D-PRS (DV-A)
mode, you can select a TX format as Position (Mobile
station).

Type of position data for transmission

D-PRS (p. 10-24)

Position (Mobile)

NMEA (p. 10-31)

• D-PRS (DV-A): D-PRS is a function which simultane-

ously sends position data received
from the internal or an external GPS
receiver, using the slow speed data
packet space, along with voice.
• Mobile: A station operating while moving.
• You can transmit direction and speed in-
formation.
• NMEA (DV-G): 
A station transmitting position data
(NMEA0183) received from the inter-
nal or an external GPS receiver.

For users who have a D-STAR transceiver model

prior to the ID-51A/E:
The GPS TX mode, “GPS (DV-G)” and “GPS-A (DV-
A),” are now called “NMEA” and “D-PRS.”
• GPS (DV-G)  NMEA
• GPS-A (DV-A)  D-PRS

10-23
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data

When D-PRS is selected in the GPS TX mode, you can NOTE:
transmit D-PRS data. • If “GPS select” is set to “Manual,” the position data
When operating in the D-PRS mode, the following entered in “Manual Position” is change to the D-PRS
codes are transmitted to the PC. format data to transmit. (p. 16-32)
D-PRS code is based on APRS® code. (GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position)
(APRS®: Automatic Packet Reporting System). • Please note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other
setting than “OFF,” the data is transmitted according
DD D-PRS to the set time. (p. 16-50)
D-PRS is a function that simultaneously sends position (GPS > GPS Auto TX)
data received from the internal or an external GPS re-
ceiver, using the slow speed data packet space, along
with voice in the DV mode.
In an analog mode, you can transmit or receive only
voice or data at one time. However a D-PRS capable
transceiver can transmit or receive message data or
GPS position data at the same time voice is being
transmitted or received.
An I-GATE is required to send position data to the
APRS® server.

• The image of D-PRS

<Using a repeater>
Information from an APRS® network
Voice, Messages and D-STAR
D-PRS positions repeater D-PRS positions

I-GATE

Voice, Messages and

D-PRS positions

<Simplex> Voice, Messages and

D-PRS positions D-PRS
positions
PC
APRS® server You can check the
location on a map site.
D-PRS positions
Voice, Messages and I-GATE
D-PRS positions

DDOperating D-PRS (DV-A)

To transmit in D-PRS (DV-A), follow the steps below,
and for more details, see the pages listed along with
the steps.

1. “MY”(Your own call sign) entering

(see page 2 of the Basic manual)
2. Receiving GPS data (p. 10-2)
3. Set GPS TX MODE to D-PRS (DV-A) (p. 10-25)
4. S
 et TX information (pp. 10-25 to 10-28)
You must set an SSID and symbol.
(GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS(DV-A))

Complete (You can transmit in D-PRS)

10-24
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data (Continued)

DDSetting D-PRS (DV-A)

Set to transmit in the D-PRS (DV-A) mode.

1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS (DV-A)

q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

e Push D-pad() to select “GPS TX Mode,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
r Push D-pad() to select “D-PRS(DV-A),” and then
push D-pad(Ent).

2. Displaying the Unproto Address

The default address should be used, and editing is not
recommended.
t Push D-pad() to select “Unproto Address,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The default setting is “API51,DSTAR*.”
y Push D-pad(Ent) to return to the previous screen.

3. Setting the Symbol

Select the desired symbol that represents your operat-
ing situation.
The selected symbol channel’s symbols (1 ~ 4) are
transmitted in addition to the position data.
u Push D-pad() to select “Symbol,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
i Push D-pad() to select a symbol between 1: Per-
son, 2: Bicycle, 3: Car and 4: House, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• If you wish to use any symbol (characters) or previously
saved symbol, see page 16-44 for details.
o Push D-pad(Ent).

Push [QUICK] to display

the "Edit Symbol" screen.

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-25
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data

DD Setting D-PRS (DV-A) (Continued)
4. Setting the SSID
To assist in identifying a station’s type, the displayed
APRS® (Automatic Packet Reporting System) based
SSID is added after the D-PRS data call sign.
The way to add SSID’s differs, depending on whether
you enter a space in your call signs or not.

!0 Push D-pad() to select “SSID,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!1 Push D-pad() to select SSID, and then push D-

pad(Ent).
• ---: The space in the call sign is converted to “-.” If
no text is entered after the space, the space will
be deleted, and the space is not converted to
“-.”
Example: JA3YUA A > JA3YUA-A
• (-0):  No SSID is added. If a call sign includes a
space, any text or digit after the space will be
deleted.
• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call sign.
Example: SSID is “-9.”
JA3YUA A > JA3YUA-9
• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.
Example: SSID is “-Z.”
JA3YUA A > JA3YUA-Z
!2 After setting the SSID, push D-pad(Ent).

About the SSID

To assist in identifying a station’s type, designated
call sign SSIDs are used in D-PRS (APRS®), accord-
ing to a common guideline.
The guideline may be changed when the infrastruc-
ture environment, such as a product or network, is
changed.
Please check the latest guideline in the web site re-
lated to D-PRS and APRS®, and correctly set.

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-26
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data

DD Setting D-PRS (DV-A) (Continued)
5. Entering a comment
Enter a comment, and transmit it with the D-PRS posi-
tion data.
The number of characters you can enter differs, de-
pending on the data extension and altitude settings.
(See the list.)
Characters
Data Extension Altitude entered (Max.)

OFF OFF 43 (Default)

OFF ON 35
Course/Speed OFF 36
Course/Speed ON 28

!3 Push D-pad() and D-pad(Ent) to select “Com-

ment.”
Push
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!4 Push [QUICK] .
!5 Push D-pad() to select “Edit,” then push D-pad(Ent),
and then the comment editing screen appears.
!6 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
•S  electable input characters are upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
•A  space can be entered in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
• A character after “ ” would not be transmitted.
!7 After entering the comment, push D-pad(Ent).

Ending icon (Up to 28 characters

can be input)

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-27
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data

DD Setting D-PRS (DV-A) (Continued)
6. Setting the Time Stamp
Set the time stamp function to transmit the received
time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
!8 Push D-pad() to select “Time Stamp,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!9 Push D-pad() to select either the DHM or HMS for-

mat, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• OFF: Does not transmit the time.
• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour,
and Minute format.
• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Min-
ute, and Second format.

7. Setting the Altitude

Set the altitude transmission.
@0 Push D-pad() to select “Altitude,” and then push
D-pad(Ent)
@1 Push D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

NOTE: If you transmit with the altitude setting ON,

the character string is included in a comment on the
products that cannot display the altitude. (IC-9100,
IC-80AD, IC-E80D, ID-880H, ID-E880, IC-92AD, IC-
E92D, IC-U82, IC-V82)

8. Setting the Data Extension

Set the data extension of your station’s information.
@2 Push D-pad() to select “Data Extension,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
@3 Push D-pad() to select “Course/Speed,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
@4 Push [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

10-28
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data (Continued)

DDDisplaying your position using a mapping program
If you transmit to an I-GATE station, and then enter the
call sign information on the internet map website, the
selected symbol is displayed. PC

You can check the

location at a map site.

Enter your call sign, and

then click [Search].

Example: Check your position on the APRS.fi site.

qqDisplay a free APRS® related map site on the inter-

net.
Example: Search ‘http://aprs.fi/’
wwEnter your call sign in the “Track callsign” field.
eeClick [Search].
• The icon (D-PRS symbol) is displayed on the map site.

Your symbol
Your call sign

10-29
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting D-PRS (DV-A) data

DD Displaying your position using a mapping program (Continued)
For your reference

D-PRS data content

D-PRS data content are shown below.

DPosition (Mobile)
(e.g.) JA3YUA-A>API51,DSTAR*:/002338h3437.38N/13534.29E>090/002/A=000012ID-51 OP.SATOH
q w e r u i !0 !1 !3 !4
o o
DPosition (Base)

(e.g.) JA3YUA-A>API51,DSTAR*:/002338h3437.38N/13534.29E-PHG5132ID-51 OP.SATOH

q w e r u i !0 !2 !4
o o
DObject

(e.g.) JA3YUA-A>API51,DSTAR*:;HAM FESTA*012345z3437.38N\13534.29Eh2014.2.28 am10-pm4

q w e r t y u i !0 !4
o o
DItem

(e.g.) JA3YUA-A>API51,DSTAR*:)REPEATER!3454.00N/13536.00ErPHG5132439.39MH DV RPT JP3YHH A

q w e r t y i !0 !2 !4
o o

DWeather

(e.g.) JA3YUA-A>API51,DSTAR*:/012345z3454.00N/13536.00E_220/004g005t077r000p000P000h50b09900
q w e r u i !0 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2
o o

!2Data Extension(PHG codes)

qCall sign
PHG codes definitions
wSSID
eUnproto Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
rD-PRS Data type First: Power 0 1 4 9 16 25 36 49 64 81 (W)
/ Position with time stamp Second: Height 10 20 40 80 320 640 1280 2560 5120 (feet)
160
! Position without time stamp
Third: Gain 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (dB)
; Object
Fourth: Directivity omni 45°NE 90°E 135°SE 180°S 225°SW 270°W 315°NW 360°N − −
) Item
tObject Name/Item Name
yData Type !3Altitude !9Rainfall (24 Hours)
* Live Object −99999 to 999999 feet 0.00 to 9.99 inch
! Live Item !4Comment @0Rainfall (Midnight)
_ Killed Object/Killed Item !5Wind direction/Wind speed 0.00 to 9.99 inch
uTime Stamp(UTC) Wind direction:0 to 360° @1Humidity
h Hour Minute Second Wind speed: 0 to 999 mph 1 to 99%, 00=100%
zDay Hour Minute !6Gust speed @2Barometric pressure
iLatitude 0 to 999 mph 0.0 to 9999.9 hPa
oSymbol !7Temperature
!0Longitude −99 to 999ƒ
!1Data Extension(Course/Speed) !8Rainfall
Course:0 to 360° 0.00 to 9.99 inch
Speed:0 to 999 knots

10-30
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■Transmitting NMEA (DV-G) data

In the DV mode, you can transmit GPS data in the
NMEA (DV-G) TX mode.
DDSetting the GPS data sentence
Set the GPS sentence to transmit in the NMEA (DV-G)
TX mode.
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS TX Mode,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “NMEA(DV-G),” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “GPS Sentence,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The GPS Sentence screen is displayed.
yyPush D-pad() to select the desired GPS sentence,
and then push D-pad(Ent) to turn it ON or OFF.
• The selectable GPS sentences are RMC, GGA, GLL,
VTG, GSA and GSV. The GGA sentence is set to ON as
the default GPS sentence.
• Touch [QUICK] , and then push D-pad(Ent) to set the
sentence as the default.
uuRepeat step y to set the GPS sentence.
• A maximum of four GPS sentences can be set at a time.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• Set the GSV sentence to OFF when sending the
GPS message to a conventional digital transceivers
(IC-2820H, IC-E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD, IC-E91,
IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H). • The display while transmitting GPS (DV-G)
The GSV sentence is incompatible with them. “DV-G” appears if “NMEA (DV-G)”
• If “GPS Select” is set to “Manual,” the transceiver au- is selected in the DV Mode.
tomatically sets the NMEA sentence and transmits it
according to the position data in “Manual Position.”
(p. 16-32)
(GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position)
• Please note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other
setting than “OFF,” the data is automatically transmit-
ted according to the set time. When transmitted, the set GPS
(GPS > GPS Auto TX) sentence is transmitted.
• Contents of GPS sentence
Lon Date 2D COG SOG
Sentence Alt UTC Status Others
/Lat (UTC) /3D (True) (knot)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator,
Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation,
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Age of Differential GPS data
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator
VTG ✔ ✔ COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA ✔ ✔ ID numbers of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence number, Total number of sat-
GSV
ellites in view, Satellite information (ID, Elevation, Azimuth, S/N)
10-31
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ Transmitting NMEA data (Continued)

Example: Adding “OSAKA suzuki”
DDEntering a GPS message
Enter a GPS message of up to 20 characters to be
transmitted with the NMEA (DV-G) data.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA(DV-G) >

GPS Message)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above,
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush [QUICK] .
ttP ush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
yyThe message editing screen appears.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
(Example: O)
•S  electable input characters are upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window. GPS MESSAGE
•A  space can be entered in any input mode. screen
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
•S  ee page 2-8 for entry details.
iiPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
ooRepeat steps u and i to enter a group name of up
to 20 characters, including spaces.
!0 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).
!1Push [MENU] to exit the Menu screen. Insert a space
after entering
“OSAKA.”

Input mode
selection
window

10-32
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■GPS Auto transmission

In the DV mode, this function automatically transmits
the transceiver’s current GPS position and the D-PRS
(DV-A) data at a selected interval, and should only be
used in the simplex mode.

NOTE:
• Your own (MY) call sign must be entered to enable
automatic GPS transmission.
• When the “GPS TX Mode” item is set to “NMEA(DV-
G),” be sure to set the “GPS Select” item to “Internal
GPS.” If “OFF” or “Manual” is set, this function is dis-
abled.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

DDSetting the GPS automatic transmission

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Auto TX,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired position data trans-
mit interval.
• Selectable settings are OFF, 5*, 10, 30 seconds and 1, 3,
5, 10 and 30 minutes.
* If four GPS sentences are selected in GPS SENTENCE
menu on page 16-49, “5sec” cannot be selected.
• Selecting “OFF” cancels the GPS automatic transmis-
sion.
• The GPS message is also transmitted, if entered.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE:
• Use GPS automatic transmission in only the simplex
mode.
• GPS automatic transmission through a repeater may
interfere with other communications.
When a GPS message is entered, the transceiver
transmits it along with the position data. See page
16-50 for GPS message entry details.

10-33
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■GPS Logger function

The GPS Logger function allows you to store the posi-
tions from a GPS receiver, into a microSD card, as your NOTE:
route. • The GPS logger function requires a microSD card.
The GPS Logger stores Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, • Once the GPS logger function is turned ON, the
Positioning state, Course, Speed and Date. transceiver continuously stores the position data
If you use this GPS Logger while driving, you can check from the GPS receiver, even if the transceiver is
your driving course on a mapping software program. rebooted. To cancel this function, turn the function
OFF.
While this function is ON, and when the transceiver is
DDGPS Logger operating outline turned OFF, the log file will be closed. Then the trans-
To use GPS Logger function, perform following opera-
ceiver is turned ON and positioning data is received
tions.
by the GPS receiver, a new log file will be created.
• When the microSD card is full, this function will auto-
1. Insert a microSD card.
matically be paused.
(microSD cards are not available from Icom. Pur-
chase a card to meet your needs.)
2. Confirm that the GPS receiver is receiving your
position and time. (p. 10-2) The transceiver has an exclusive GPS logger mode
3. Confirm that the GPS Logger function is ON. where only the logger functions.
 This mode is useful when you are traveling and don’t
The logger function starts. want to use the transceiver for communication, but
you do want to use just a GPS logger.
See page 10-38 for details.

DDSetting the GPS Logger function

The GPS logger function stores your route as you
move.
When the GPS Logger function is set to ON, the trans-
ceiver stores the position data from GPS receiver onto
microSD card in a specified time interval.
You can select the RMC, GGA, VTG and GSA sentenc-
es for the GPS Logger function. (p. 10-35)

If you do not want to use this function, turn it OFF, as

described below.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent) GPS LOGGER screen
()
Select
(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger > GPS Logger)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above,
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
*
rrPush D-pad() to select “OFF.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• The GPS Logger is cancelled.

NOTE: While using the external GPS receiver, only the

RMC, GGA, VTG and GSA sentences can be used.
* The transceiver has an exclusive GPS
logger mode where only the logger is
functioning. See page 10-38 for details.
10-34
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

DDSetting the GPS record interval

For example, if you are moving slowly and if the time
interval is set to “1sec,” a lot of position data is stored at
almost the same place. Select the GPS Logger function
record interval to suit your travel speed. (Default: 5sec)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger > Record Interval)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is Record Interval
displayed. screen
rrPush D-pad() to select a desired record interval.
•S
 electable settings are 1, 5, 10, 30 and 60 seconds.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

DDSetting the GPS record sentence

Select the GPS sentence for the GPS Logger function.
The function records only the selected sentence, so the
data volume will be reduced.
See the contents table shown below before selecting.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger > Record Sentence)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired GPS sentence,
and then push D-pad(Ent) to turn it ON or OFF.
• The selectable GPS sentences are RMC, GGA, VTG and
GSA. All sentences are set to ON as the default.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen. Record Sentence
screen

• Contents of record sentence

Lon Date 2D COG SOG
Sentence Alt UTC Status Others
/Lat (UTC) /3D (True) (knot)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator,
Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation,
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Age of Differential GPS data
VTG ✔ ✔ COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA ✔ ✔ ID numbers of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
10-35
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

DDViewing the route on a PC Map
If you want to display your route, copy the log file to
your PC.

qqTurn OFF the transceiver, if it’s ON.

wwL ift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel.
eePush the microSD card in to release, then carefully
pull it out, to remove the card.
BE CAREFUL!:
• DO NOT touch the terminals.
• When removing the card during transceiver power
ON, the Unmounting it first is necessary. See page
2-5 for more details.

rrInsert the microSD card into the microSD card drive

on your PC.
• If no microSD card drive is built-in, connect a memory Slot cover Slot cover
card reader (purchase separately) and then insert the Push the microSD card Pull the microSD
microSD card into it. until a click sounds. card out.
• The screen appears as shown to the right.
ttClick the “Open folder to view files” option to access
the card.
• The “ID-51” folder appears.
yyDouble click the folder. Click
• Eight folders appear.
uuDouble click the “Gps” folder.
• The log files appear.
• The files are named with the time the log was started, in
the following format:
yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log
yyyy = year, mm = month, dd = day, hh = hour,
mm = minute, ss = second
iiImport the selected file to a mapping software.
• You can see your route on the software map.
Click
Those file may not be compatible with all mapping soft-
ware.

TIP: You can display your route on Google™ Earth

(free map software). Select “Open” in the [File] menu
of Google™ Earth to open the log file.
• Your route is displayed on the map, as shown below.
Click

The log
files are
Your route is displayed on Google™ Earth. saved here

10-36
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

For your information— About the recorded NMEA sentences for GPS logging
Regarding the GPS logging data of the ID-51A/E, each sentence corresponds to the NMEA standard and is
recorded in the following format.

D GGA sentence
(e.g.) $GPGGA,161229.487,3723.2475,N,12158.3416,W,1,07,1.0,9.0,M,25.5,M,3,0000*18<CR><LF>
q w e r y u i o !1 !2
t !0

q GGA protocol header ($GPGGA) u Horizontal Dilution of Precision (1.0) 0.0–50.0

w UTC of position (16:12:29.487) i Altitude re: mean-sea-level (geoid), meters
e Latitude (North 37º 23.2475′) N=North, S=South (9.0 meters)
r Longitude (West 121º 58.3416′) E=East, W=West o Geoidal separation, meters (25.5 meters)
t GPS quality indicator (1) !0 Age of Differential GPS data (3 seconds)
0=Fix not available or invalid, 1=SPS mode !1 Check Sum (*18) Error detection data
2=DGPS (SPS), 6=Estimated (Dead Reckoning) mode started with “*” (hex code)
y Number of satellites in use (7), 00–12 !2 End code
*Blank shows when not positioned.
D RMC sentence
(e.g.) $GPRMC,161229.487,A,3723.2475,N,12158.3416,W,0.13,309.62,011212, , ,D*10<CR><LF>
q w r t y u i !0 !1
e o
q RMC protocol header ($GPRMC) i UTC date of position (’12 Dec 1st) yymmdd
w UTC of position (16:12:29.487) o Mode Indicator (D)
e Status (A) A=Data valid A=Autonomous mode, D=DGPS,
V=Data invalid/not positioned E=Estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
r Latitude (North 37º 23.2475′) N=North, S=South N=Data not valid, R=Almanac data
t Longitude (West 121º 58.3416′) E=East, W=West !0 Check Sum (*10) Error detection data
y Speed over ground (0.13 knots) started with “*” (hex code)
u Course Over Ground (309.62º; degrees True) !1 End code
0.00º–359.99º *Blank shows when not positioned.

D GSA sentence
(e.g.) $GPGSA,A,3,07,02,26,27,09,04, , , , , ,15,1.8,1.0,1.5*33<CR><LF>
q r t y u i o
we
q GSA protocol header ($GPGSA) t Position Dilution of Precision (1.8) 0.0–50.0
w Mode indicator 1 (A) y Horizontal Dilution of Precision (1.0) 0.0–50.0
M=Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode u Vertical Dilution of Position (1.5) 0.0–50.0
A=Automatic, allowed to automatically switch 2D/3D i Check Sum (*33) Error detection data
e Mode indicator 2 (3) started with “*” (hex code)
1=Fix not available, o End code
2=2D (using satellites; less than 3), *Blank shows when not positioned.
3=3D (using satellites; more than 4)
r ID numbers of satellites used in solution (07, 02, 26, 27, 09, 04…15)
01–32 *Shows up to 12 ID’s

D VTG sentence
(e.g.) $GPVTG,309.62,T, ,M,0.13,N,0.2,K,A*03<CR><LF>
q w r t u i
e y
q VTG protocol header ($GPVTG) y Mode Indicator (A)
w Course Over Ground (309.62º; degrees True) A=Autonomous mode, D=DGPS,
0.00º–359.99º E=Estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
e Course over ground degrees; Magnetic north N=Data not valid, R=Almanac data
r Speed over ground, knots (0.13 knots) u Check Sum (*03) Error detection data
t Speed over ground, kilometer per hour (0.2 km/hr) started with “*” (hex code)
i End code
*Blank shows when not positioned.

10-37
 Previous view

10 GPS OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

While GPS indicator While a microSD
DDUsing <<GPS Logger Only>> mode stays ON card is inserted
The transceiver has an exclusive GPS logger mode
where only the logger is functioning.
This mode is useful when you are traveling and don’t
want to use the transceiver for communication, but you
do want to use just a GPS logger.

NOTE: In the “GPS Logger Only” mode, the GPS Log-

ger function is ON, but the transceiver function is dis-
abled, until you reboot the transceiver.

<<GPS Logger Only>> outline

1. Insert the microSD card. (p. 2-3)
(microSD cards are not available from Icom. Pur-
chase a card to meet your needs)
2. Confirm that the GPS receiver is receiving your
position and time. (p. 10-2)
3. Confirm that the GPS Logger function is ON.
(p. 10-34) Select
4. Turn ON the <<GPS Logger Only>> mode.

(The <<GPS Logger Only>> mode starts.)

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<GPS Logger Only>>,”
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

•
After the “Only GPS Logger is now functioning”
message appears, then the GPS position is dis-
played to start the GPS Logger Only mode.
Also you can select the <<GPS Logger Only>>

mode in the Menu screen. (p. 16-42)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger > Latitude
<<GPS Logger Only>>) Compass
direction is Longitude
Heading Up. Grid Locator
To cancel the <<GPS Logger Only>> mode, re- Your course Altitude
heading is
boot the transceiver by turning it OFF and then 213 degrees Speed
ON again.
• When the transceiver is tuned ON, the normal GPS
Logger restarts. GPS LOGGER ONLY screen

If the GPS Logger item in the The GPS Information or

Menu screen is set to OFF, Compass Direction settings
the confirmation screen can be changed.
“‘GPS Logger’ will be set to In the <<GPS Logger Only>>
ON. OK?” appears after do- mode, push [QUICK]
ing the step w. to open the Sub Menu, as
shown to the right.
Push D-pad() to select Then push D-pad() to se-
“YES,” and push D-pad(Ent) to turn the GPS Logger lect a desired item, and then push D-pad(Ent) to en-
function ON. ter.
10-38
Previous view

Section 11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Recording a QSO audio.................................................... 11-2
DD To start recording.......................................................... 11-2
DD To stop recording........................................................... 11-3
■■ Playing back the recorded audio....................................... 11-4
■■ Operations while playing back........................................... 11-5
DD Fast-forward while playing............................................. 11-5
DD Rewind while playing..................................................... 11-5
DD Pause while playing....................................................... 11-5
DD Playing the previously file.............................................. 11-5
DD Playing the next file....................................................... 11-5
DD Pause at the beginning of the previously file
(Fast forward the file)..................................................... 11-5
DD Pause at the beginning of the next file
(Rewind the file)............................................................ 11-5
■■ VOICE PLAYER screen’s description................................ 11-6
■■ Changing the skip time...................................................... 11-7
■■ Deleting the recorded contents (audio)............................. 11-8
■■ Deleting the folder............................................................. 11-9
■■ Changing the recording mode......................................... 11-10
■■ Continue to record even if no signals are received.......... 11-11
■■ Record the transmit and receive audio into
the same file.................................................................... 11-12
■■ Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed.................. 11-13
■■ Viewing the file information.............................................. 11-14
■■ Viewing the folder information......................................... 11-15
■■ Voice Recorder function.................................................. 11-16
DD To start recording........................................................ 11-16
DD Playing back the recorded audio................................. 11-17
DD Erasing the recorded audio contents........................... 11-18
DD MIC Gain setting.......................................................... 11-19
DD Changing the skip time................................................ 11-20
DD Viewing the file information......................................... 11-21
■■ Viewing the microSD card’s free space and
recordable time................................................................ 11-22
■■ Playing back the voice memory data on a PC.................. 11-23

11-1
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Recording a QSO audio

You can record the audio of a QSO (communication) on
the MAIN band onto the microSD card.
In addition to both the received and transmitted audio,
the date, repeater, frequency and the destination call
sign are also recorded. This is convenient when you
write a QSL card or make an entry in a QSO log.

TIP: If you want to record only received audio, see

“Changing the recording mode” to change the record-
ing mode to “RX only.” (p. 11-10)
Push [QUICK] .
Then, push D-pad() to
DDTo start recording select.
qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<REC Start>>.”
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad(Ent) to start voice recording.

• The transceiver displays “Recording started” and auto-
matically exits the Quick Menu screen.
• “ ” appears while the transceiver is recording. Push D-pad(Ent) to start
• While in the stand-by mode, the recording is paused, and voice recording
“ ” appears.
• Recording is continuous until you manually stop it, or the
card becomes full.
• If the recording file’s content reaches 2 GB, the trans-
ceiver automatically creates a new file, and continues
recording.

NOTE:
• BC Radio audio cannot be recorded.
• Once recording has started, the recording will con-
tinue, even the transceiver is turned OFF and then
ON again.

While recording

While pausing

11-2
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Recording a QSO audio (Continued)

DDTo stop recording

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<REC Stop>>.”
eePush D-pad(Ent) to stop voice recording.
• The transceiver displays “Recording stopped,” and auto-
matically exits the Quick Menu screen.

TIP: When the PTT Automatic Recording function is

set to ON in the MENU screen, the recording auto-
matically starts when [PTT] is pushed.
(MENU >Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
PTT Auto REC)

11-3
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Playing back the recorded audio

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder that contains the
file you want to play, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
play, then push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.
• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the file Folder list
starts to playback.
yyPush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the play-
back.
• The file list is automatically displayed.

File list

11-4
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Operations while playing back

You can fast-forward or rewind while playing back.
Push to move to the previous file.
DDFast-forward while playing • Push: Fast-forward.
Push D-pad(") to fast-forward. (Default: 10 seconds) • Push while the playback is pausing:
If you want to change the fast-forward time, see “Chang- Pause at the beginning of the
ing the skip time.” (p. 11-7) previous file.

DDRewind while playing

Push D-pad(!) to rewind. (Default: 10 seconds)
If you want to change the rewind time, see “Changing
the skip time.” (p. 11-7)
• If you push D-pad(!) within 1 second after starting to play- Push to playback or pause.
back, the end of the previously recorded file will playback.
Push to move the next file.
DDPause while playing
Push D-pad(Ent) to pause. • Push: Rewind.
Push D-pad(Ent) again to exit the pause. • Push while the playback is pausing:
 When the playback is paused anywhere
within the file, push D-pad(!) to return to
DDPlaying the previously file the beginning of the file, and pause.
Push D-pad(#) to playback the previously file. When the playback is paused at beginning
• In case there are other files in the folder, while the oldest file of a file, push D-pad(!) to move to the be-
is playing back, push D-pad(#) to start playing the beginning ginning of the previous file, and pause.
of the file .

DDPlaying the next file TIP: You can also change the playback location by
Push D-pad($) to play the next file. rotating [DIAL].
• In case there are other files in the folder, while the most re-
• If you use [DIAL] to change the location, regardless
cent file is playing back, push D-pad($) to stop the file.
of “Skip time,” you can change the location in steps
of 1/20 of the file’s playback time.
DDPause at the beginning of the previously
file (Fast forward the file)
When the playback is paused anywhere within the file,
push D-pad(!) to return to the beginning of the file,
and pause.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.

When the playback is paused at beginning of a file,

push D-pad(!) to move to the beginning of the previ-
ous file, and pause.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.

DDPause at the beginning of the next file

(Rewind the file)
When the playback is paused, push D-pad(") to move
to the beginning of the next file, and pause.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.

11-5
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■VOICE PLAYER screen’s description

The displayed items are follows.

q File name i
The playback file name is displayed.
q
w Recording information w
The recorded frequency, mode and audio category
are displayed. e u
• When the receive audio is playing back, the audio cat- r y
egory is displayed as “RX.”
When the transmit audio is playing back, the audio cat-
t
egory is displayed as “TX.”

e Playback mark
While the audio is playing back, a playback mark is
displayed.
• The mark disappears while doing fast forward, rewind or
pausing.

r Playing back time

The playing back time is displayed.

t Repeater call sign/name

The repeater call sign used in the DV mode is dis-
played.
When the repeater name is programmed in your Re-
peater List, the name is also displayed.

y Total time
The file’s total playing back time is displayed.

u Progress bar
The playing back progress bar is displayed.

i File number/Total file number

The playing back file number, and total file number in
the folder are displayed.

11-6
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Changing the skip time

You can change the fast forward and rewind skip time.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Player Set > Skip Time)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the skip time of 3 seconds,
5 seconds, 10 seconds or 30 seconds, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to save.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-7
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Deleting the recorded contents (audio)

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to delete, then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to de-
lete, then push [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu
screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” then push D-
pad(Ent). Folder list
• The confirmation screen “Delete file?” appears.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “YES,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The selected file is deleted.

File list

<To delete all files>

When you want to erase all
audio files in the folder at one
time, select “Delete All” in step
y, as described above.

11-8
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Deleting the folder

NOTE: All the files in the folder are also deleted.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder which you want
to delete.
ttPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Delete folder?” appears.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “YES,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The folder is deleted.

Folder list

<To delete all folders>

When you want to erase all
folders at one time, select “De-
lete All Folders” in step y.

11-9
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Changing the recording mode

The recording audio can be selected in the “REC Mode”
item on the Menu screen.

TIP: The default setting is “TX&RX” (Both transmit

and receive signals are recorded).

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Recorder Set > REC Mode)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “RX Only,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to save.
ttPush [MENU] to set and exit the Menu screen.

11-10
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Continue to record even if no signals are received

In the default settings, the transceiver records audio
only while receiving signals (the squelch opens).
If you want to continue recording even if no signal is
received, do the following steps.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder

Set > RX REC Condition)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad(#) to select “Always,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to save.
• Always: Recording continues, even if no signals
are received.
• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records audio only while
receiving signals (the squelch opens).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-11
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Record the transmit and receive audio into the same file
The transceiver can record the transmit and receive au-
dio into the same file.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder

Set > File Split)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “OFF,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to save.
• OFF: The transceiver records the transmit and receive
audio into the same file.
• ON: The transceiver records the transmit and receive
audio into each files.
The transceiver makes separate new files for trans-
mit and receive audio. (Default setting)
•  When you set the RX REC Condition item to
“Squelch Auto,” the transceiver records audio to
the new file when the squelch is closed.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder set >
RX REC Condition)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE: Even if you set File Split item to OFF, when the
recording file’s content becomes 2 GB, the transceiver
continues to record, but to a new file.

About the VOICE PLAYER screen when recording

into the same file
The VOICE PLAYER screen
shows information that is re-
corded first.
When the receive audio was
recorded first, the transmit
audio information is not dis-
played on the screen.

11-12
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed

The transceiver starts to record the transmitted audio
at the same time the [PTT] switch is pushed.
After transmitting, the transceiver receives signal in a
given amount of time, it also records the received au-
dio. Therefore, you can record all communication audio
to use this function.
If you do not want to record all communication audio,
turn this function OFF as described below.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Recorder Set > PTT Auto REC)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “OFF,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to save.
• OFF: The transceiver does not start to record when the
[PTT] switch is pushed.
• ON: The transceiver starts to record when the [PTT]
switch is pushed. (Default setting)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE: When you set PTT AUTO REC to ON, see

the notes below.
•The transceiver also starts to record audio when
pushing the optional microphone’s [PTT] switch,
transmitting using with the VOX function or CI-V re-
mote controller.
• All transmit audio is recorded when “TX&RX” is set in
the “REC Mode” item on the Menu screen.
• When the transceiver receives a signal less than 10
seconds after transmitting, the transceiver also re-
cords the receive audio.
• In addition, when the transceiver receives a signal
less than 10 seconds after the signal is received, it
also records the receive audio.
11-13
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Viewing the file information

The transceiver can display the recorded file’s frequen-
cy, mode, date, and so on.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder that contains the
file you want to view, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to view
the information on, then push [QUICK] to open
the Quick Menu screen.
yyP
 ush D-pad() to select “File Information,” then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The information screen appears.
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

Example of file information screens (The display items differ, depending on the recording contents.)
• Transmit Information screen (Transmitting on
(Your own position) the DR screen)

• Receive Information screen (Receiving on

(Your own position) the DR screen) (Destination position)

11-14
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Viewing the folder information

The transceiver can display the folder’s name, number
of the files in the folder, total capacity of the files and
date.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder want to view the
folder information, then push [QUICK] to open
the Quick Menu screen.
ttP ush D-pad() to select “Folder Information,” then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The information screen appears.
yyPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-15
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Voice Recorder function

The microphone audio, including audio from an exter-
nal microphone, can be recorded for your convenience.
• Depending on the microSD card capacity, you may continu-
ously record up to a maximum of about 37 hours. If the file
size exceeds 2 GB, a new file is automatically created in the
same folder, and the recorded voice audio is saved there.

DDTo start recording

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select “Record,” and then D-
pad(Ent).
• The VOICE RECORDER screen appears.
rrPush [PTT] to start recording.
• “Recording” appears and the microphone audio record-
ing starts.
ttPush [PTT] again to stop.
• The information screen appears.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

[PTT]

NOTE: While recording a QSO,

a voice recording cannot be
made, and the screen shown
to the right appears. In that
case, push [MENU] to exit Shows the remain time
the Menu screen, and push periods
[QUICK] . Push D-pad()
Shows the microphone
to select “Stop Recording” to gain level
stop the QSO recording.

TIP: Even if the external microphone is connected,

the internal microphone’s voice audio is recorded
Shows the recording time
when the transceiver’s [PTT] is held.
To record the external microphone’s voice audio, hold
down the external microphone’s [PTT].
Shows the microphone
input level
11-16
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDPlaying back the recorded audio
qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder that contains the
file you want to play, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
play, then push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.
• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the file
starts to playback.
• The next file continuously starts to playback.
•P  ush D-pad(Ent) to pause.
yyPush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the play-
back.
• The file list is automatically displayed.

NOTE: While recording a QSO,

a voice recorder recorded au-
dio cannot be played back, and
the screen shown to the right
appears. In that case, push
[MENU] to exit the Menu
screen, and push [QUICK] .
Push D-pad() to select “Stop
Recording” to stop the QSO re-
cording.

11-17
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDErasing the recorded audio contents
qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above and
push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent) to enter,
one or more times until the last screen is displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to erase, then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,
m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
erase, then push [QUICK] to open the Quick
Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Delete file?” appears.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent).
• The selected file is erased.

The file that you

want to erase.

<To erase a folder>

When you want to erase a fold-
er, select the folder in step r,
then push [QUICK] . And
To erase all files
push D-pad() to select “De-
at one time, se-
lete,” then push D-pad(Ent). lect “Delete All.”

<To erase all folders>

When you want to erase all
folders, push [QUICK] in
step e. And push D-pad() to
select “Delete All Folders,” then
push D-pad(Ent).

11-18
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDMIC Gain setting
qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Recorder

Set > MIC Gain)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to erase, then push D-pad(Ent).
• The MIC Gain screen is displayed.
ttPush D-pad() to set the internal microphone sensi-
tivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity) and 4 (max-
imum sensitivity), to suit your needs.
• Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to
your voice.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

MIC Gain setting in the VOICE RECORDER screen

While in the VOICE RE-
CORDER screen as shown
to the right, push [QUICK]
. And then push D-
pad(Ent) to set the internal
microphone gain.

The selected gain

level is displayed
here.

11-19
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDChanging the skip time
You can change the skip time of fast forward and re-
wind.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder >

Player Set > Skip Time)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the skip time of 3, 5, 10 or
30 seconds, and then push D-pad(Ent) to save.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-20
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDViewing the file information
The transceiver can display the recorded file’s frequen-
cy, mode, date and so on.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
created when you start recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to view the information, then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
view, and then push [QUICK] to open the Quick
Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “File Information,” then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The information screen appears.
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
The file that you
want to view

<To view a folder information>

When you want to view a folder
information, select the folder
in step r, then push [QUICK]
. Push D-pad() to select
“Folder Information,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).

11-21
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Viewing the microSD card’s free space and recordable time

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (SD Card),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
eeP ush D-pad() to select “SD Card Info,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

• The SD Card information screen appears.

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-22
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Playing back the voice memory data on a PC

You can playback the voice memory data on a PC.
PC
However, the recorded information (frequency, date,
and so on) are not displayed.
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 is used for the description.
• When you copy the voice memory data from the mi-
croSD card to the PC’s hard disk drive, you also oper-
ate same as following steps for playing back data. microSD
• (e.g.) A memory card reader is connected to the PC, card to the Card
and the microSD card is inserted into the read- Transceiver reader
er. Then play back the voice memory data on
the card.

qqConnect the memory card reader (purchase sepa-

rately) to the PC, and then insert the microSD card
into the reader.
• If your PC has a microSD card drive, insert the card into
the drive.
wwWhen the microSD card is inserted in the microSD
card drive of the PC or the microSD card reader, the
screen appears, as shown to the right. Click
• The [ID-51] folder appears.
eeDouble-click the [ID-51] folder.

Click

rrDouble-click the [Voice] or [VoiceRec] folder.

• To playback the QSO voice audio, double-click the [Voice]
folder.
• To playback the voice recorder audio, double-click the
[VoiceRec] folder.

To playback
the QSO
voice audio.

To playback
the voice
recorder audio.
ttDouble-click the folder where the file you want to
playback is stored.
(e.g. 20161001 folder)
yyTo playback the file, double-click it.
(e.g. 20161001_120019.wav) Double-click

NOTE: 
• The steps to playback may differ, depending on the
software. Therefore, refer to the software’s instruc-
tion manual for details.
• If the file does not playback, even if you double-click Double-click
it, download an appropriate software like Windows
Media® Player.
11-23
Previous view

Section 12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■ General description........................................................... 12-2
DD Memory channel contents............................................. 12-2
■■ Selecting a Memory channel............................................. 12-3
■■ Selecting a call channel..................................................... 12-3
■■ Entering a Memory channel.............................................. 12-4
■■ Copying memory and Call channel contents..................... 12-5
DD Memory or Call channelVFO..................................... 12-5
DD Memory or Call channelAnother memory or
Call channel................................................................... 12-6
■■ Setting a Memory bank..................................................... 12-7
DD Assigning a memory channel to a memory bank.......... 12-7
DD Directly entering into a memory bank............................ 12-8
■■ Selecting a Memory bank.................................................. 12-9
■■ Entering a memory/bank/scan name.............................. 12-10
DD Entering a memory name, bank name or scan name... 12-10
■■ Selecting a memory name display.................................. 12-12
■■ Clearing a Memory contents........................................... 12-13

12-1
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■General description
The Memory mode is very useful to quickly select of-
ten-used operating settings.
The transceiver has 500 regular memory channels,
50 scan edge channels (25 pairs) and 4 call channels.
Also, 26 memory banks, A to Z, can be used to store
groups of operating channels, and so on. Up to 100
channels can be assigned to a bank.

DDMemory channel contents

The following information can be programmed into
memory channels:
• Operating frequency
• Operating mode
• Duplex direction (DUP+/DUP–) with a frequency
offset
• Subaudible tone encoder, tone squelch or DTCS
squelch ON/OFF
• Subaudible tone frequency, tone squelch frequency
or DTCS code with polarity
• Scan skip setting
• Memory bank
• Memory name
• Tuning step
• UR Station call sign
• R1/R2 call sign
• Digital Call sign squelch or Digital code squelch ON
or OFF
• Digital code

NOTE: Memory data can be erased by static electric-

ity, electric transients, and other causes. In addition,
they can be erased by a malfunction and during re-
pairs. Therefore, we recommend that memory data be
backed up or be saved to a microSD card or to a PC.
• The microSD card is not available from Icom. Purchase a
microSD card to meet your needs.
• The CS-51PLUS2 cloning software that is included on the
supplied CD can also be used to backup the memory data.
• The optional OPC-2218LU or OPC-2350LU is required to
connect the transceiver and a PC.

12-2
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Selecting a Memory channel

The Memory mode is used for operation on memory
channels, which store programmed frequencies, call
signs and other data.

qqPush [M/CALL] several times to select the

Memory mode.
•“ ” appears when the Memory mode is selected.
• Push [M/CALL] again to select the Memory mode or
Weather channel mode*. The Memory mode, Call chan-
nel mode or Weather channel mode* are alternately se-
lected.
*Appears only for the USA version transceivers.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired memory channel.
• Only programmed memory channels can be selected.
• See page 12-4 for memory programming details. Appears
Rotate [DIAL] to select the
[DIAL] memory channel number

■■Selecting a call channel

Call channels are used for quick recall of most often-
used operating settings.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Call channel mode.
• Push [M/CALL] again to select the Memory mode or
Weather channel mode*. The Memory mode, Call chan-
nel mode or Weather channel mode* are alternately se-
lected.
*Appears only in the USA version transceivers.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel between
“C0” to “C3.”

[DIAL] Rotate [DIAL] to select

12-3
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Entering a Memory channel

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Example: Programming 146.030 MHz/FM mode into
wwSet a desired frequency and operating mode: memory channel 11 (a blank channel).
➥➥ Rotate [DIAL] to set a desired frequency.
Set 146.030MHz in
(Example: 146.030)
the VFO mode.
➥➥ Push [MODE] one or more times to select a
desired operating mode. (Example: FM mode)
➥➥ Set the duplex direction, frequency offset, tone
squelch, and so on, if needed.
eeHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sound.
• The memory channel number blinks, and memory con-
tents are displayed.
rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel to be pro-
grammed. Hold down [S.MW]
(Example: Channel 11) for 1 second to enter
ttHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to program, and the Select Memory write
then return to the VFO mode. mode.
• 3 beeps sound.
•Before returning to the VFO mode, the programmed
memory contents are briefly displayed.
•The Memory channel number automatically increases
when continuing to hold down [S.MW] for 1 second
after programming.

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the program and Rotate [DIAL] to select a
exit the Select Memory write mode before memory channel 11.
programming.

[DIAL]

Hold down [S.MW]

for 1 second to program.

Returns to the VFO mode.

12-4
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Copying memory and Call channel contents

This function copies a memory channel’s contents to
the VFO, another memory or Call channels. This is use-
ful when searching for signals around a memory chan-
nel frequency, and for recalling the frequency offset,
subaudible tone frequency and so on.

DDMemory or Call channelVFO

qqSelect the Memory or Call channel to be copied.
➥➥ Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select Select the memory or call
the Memory mode or the Call channel mode, then channel to be copied.
rotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel.
wwHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the
Select Memory write mode, and copy the memory
contents.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds.
• The memory channel number blinks.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select “VFO.”
rrHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to copy the se-
lected channel contents to the VFO.
• The transceiver automatically returns to the VFO. Hold down [S.MW]
for 1 second to enter
the Select Memory write
NOTE: Holding down [S.MW] for 2 seconds in
mode, and then, rotate
step w will also copy the memory contents to the
[DIAL] to select “VFO.”
VFO. In that case, steps e and r are not necessary.

[DIAL]

Hold down [S.MW]

for 1 second to copy.
The selected channel
contents appear in the
VFO screen.

12-5
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■ Copying memory and Call channel contents (Continued)

DDMemory or Call channelAnother memory or Call channel

qqSelect the Memory or Call channel to be copied.
➥➥ Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select Select the memory chan-
the Memory mode or the Call channel mode, then nel to be copied.
rotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel.
wwHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds.
• The memory channel number blinks.
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 sec-
onds. If you do, the memory contents will be copied to the
VFO.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select the target Memory or Call
channel. Hold down [S.MW]
Other channels shown below can be programmed: for 1 second to enter
rrHold down [S.MW] for 1 second again to copy. the Select Memory write
• 3 beeps sound. mode, and then, rotate
• The transceiver automatically selects the copied chan- [DIAL] to to select the tar-
nel. get channel.

[DIAL]

Hold down [S.MW]

for 1 second to copy.
The copied channel is au-
tomatically selected.

12-6
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Setting a Memory bank

The ID-51A/E has a total of 26 banks (A to Z). NOTE: The memory banks are only used to hold
Regular memory channels 0 to 499 are assigned to any memory channels. Thus if the original memory chan-
desired bank for easy memory management. Up to 100 nel contents have been changed, the memory bank
channels can be assigned to a bank. contents are also changed at the same time.

DDAssigning a memory channel to a memory bank

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Hold down [S.MW] for
1 second to enter the Se-
Memory mode, and then rotate [DIAL] to select a de-
lect Memory write mode.
sired channel to be assigned to a bank.
wwHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds. Push D-pad() to select
• The memory channel number blinks. “Edit.”
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 sec-
onds. Otherwise the memory contents will be copied to
the VFO.
eePush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
Push D-pad() to select
rrPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
“BANK,” and then push
pad(Ent) to enter the Memory bank edit mode.
D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “BANK,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “– – – –” appears, then the first digit blinks.
• If the selected memory channel has already been as- The first digit blinks.
signed to a bank, the Bank group and the bank channel
number are displayed.
• If the Bank name has already been programmed, it is
also displayed. Rotate [DIAL] and select
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group, “A” to “Z.” “F”, then push D-pad().
uuPush D-pad() to select the bank channel digit.
iiRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank channel num-
ber between “00” and “99.” Rotate [DIAL] and select
• The bank channels are not displayed when the memory “05”, then push
channel is already assigned. D-pad(Ent).
• Push D-pad() to change the bank group or bank chan-
nel number selection.
ooPush D-pad(Ent) to set, and exit the Memory bank
edit mode.
!0 P
 ush D-pad() to select “<<Write>>,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Overwrite?” appears.
!1 P
 ush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push Push D-pad() to select
D-pad(Ent). “<<Write>>,” and then
• The selected memory channel is updated and assigned to push D-pad(Ent).
the bank, and then the transceiver returns to the Memory
mode.
Push D-pad() to select
[DIAL] “YES,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Returns to the Memory Mode.

12-7
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■ Setting a Memory bank (Continued)

DD Directly entering into a memory bank
You can also program the memory contents directly
into a memory bank channel. This way is a short cut to
programming the memory channel, and then assigning
it to a bank. In that case, the transceiver automatically
selects the lowest blank memory channel, to program.

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.

wwSet a desired frequency and operating mode: Example: Programming 146.010 MHz/FM mode into
➥➥ Rotate [DIAL] to set a desired frequency. Memory bank channel J-01.
(Example: 146.010 MHz)
➥➥ Push [MODE] one or more times to select a Hold down [S.MW]
desired operating mode. (Example: FM mode) for 1 second to enter
➥➥ Set duplex direction, frequency offset, tone squelch the Select Memory write
mode.
and so on, if desired.
eeHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sound. Push D-pad() to select
• The memory channel number blinks, and memory con- “Bank Select.”
tents are displayed.
rrPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
ttPush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
Rotate [DIAL] to select
() the bank group, “J.”
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group, “A” to
“Z,” and then push D-pad(Ent). (Example: “J”)
•
If you want to change the bank group after pushing
D-pad(Ent), return to step r.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank channel be-
tween “00” and “99.” (Example: “01”)
• The bank channel number blinks. The bank channel num-
• If the selected bank channel is already assigned, the ber blinks.
memory contents are displayed.
iiHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to program, and
then return to the VFO mode.
• 3 beeps sound.
• If an already assigned bank channel is selected in step
Rotate [DIAL] to select
u, the memory contents will be overwritten into the
the bank channel “01.”
memory channel and bank channel.
• The Bank channel number automatically increases when
continuing to hold down [S.MW] after programming.

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the program and

exit the Select Memory write mode before memory
Hold down [S.MW]
programming. for 1 second to program.
NOTE: If the Memory bank display is already selected
and you want to program the contents into the memo-
ry channel, do the following steps:
q Select “ALL CH Select” in step
t. Returns to the VFO mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select a de-
sired memory channel.
e Hold down [S.MW] for 1
second to program.

12-8
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Selecting a Memory bank

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Example: Selecting the bank group “A.”
Memory mode.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen. Push [M/CALL] one
eePush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then or more times to select
push D-pad(Ent). the Memory mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group, “A” to

“Z.”
• Only Bank groups that have memory channels assigned Push [QUICK] , then
to them are displayed. push D-pad() to select
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set. “Bank Select.”
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank channel.
• Only assigned bank channels are displayed.
• To return to the Memory channels display, repeat steps
w to e, and select “OFF” in step r.

[DIAL]
Rotate [DIAL] to select the
bank group “A.”

Push D-pad(Ent) to set.

Rotate [DIAL] to select a

desired bank channel.

12-9
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Entering a memory/bank/scan name

Each memory channel can be programmed with an al-
phanumeric channel name for easy recognition. Names
can be a maximum of 16 characters.

NOTE: Only one name can be programmed for each

bank. Therefore, the previously programmed bank name
will be displayed when bank name is selected. Also, the
bank names are automatically updated in other memory
channels assigned to the same bank group.

DDEntering a memory name, bank name or scan name

qqHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode. Example: 
Programming the memory name “ID-51” in
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds. M-CH000.
• The memory channel number blinks.
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 seconds.
In the Select Memory
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired memory channel.
Write mode, select
• Select Call channels (C0 to C3) to program a Call chan-
M-CH000, and then
nel name, or Scan edge channels (0A/0B to 24A/24B) to
push [QUICK] .
program a scan name.
eePush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the name programming mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

ttPush D-pad() to select “MNAME,” “BNAME” or Push D-pad() to select

“SNAME,” and then push D-pad(Ent). “Edit,” and then push
• MNAME” is for a memory name, “BNAME” for a bank D-pad(Ent).
name or “SNAME” for a scan name.
• If the selected memory channel’s name has already been
programmed, the name is displayed.
• “BNAME” appears only when the selected memory chan-
nel is assigned to a bank.
• “SNAME” appears only when the selected memory chan-
nel is a scan edge channel. The same name is automati-
cally assigned to both scan edge channels, A and B.
• After pushing D-pad(Ent), the cursor blinks on the first Push D-pad() to select
digit. “MNAME.”
NOTE: When entering the scan type selection mode,
the programmed Scan name is displayed instead of
the frequency range indication.

[DIAL]

The cursor blinks on the

first digit.

☞☞Continued on the next page

12-10
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■ Entering a memory/bank/scan name Continued from the previous page

DD Entering a memory name, bank name or scan name
(Continued) Rotate [DIAL] to select “I”.
Push D-pad() to move
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character. the cursor to the second
•S  electable input characters are upper case letters, lower digit.
case letters, numbers or symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change Rotate [DIAL] to select “D.”
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.

Repeat steps y and u

until the desired memory
name is programmed.

•A  space can be entered in any input mode.

•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.  ush D-pad(Ent) to save
P
•S ee page 2-8 for entry details. the name and exit the
uuPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second Memory name edit mode.
digit.
iiRepeat steps y and u to enter the desired channel
name of up to 16 characters.
ooPush D-pad(Ent) to save, and exit the Memory name
edit mode.
!0 P
 ush D-pad() to select “<<Write>>,” and then push
D-pad(Ent). Push D-pad() to select
• The confirmation screen “Overwrite?” appears. “<<Write>>,” and then
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- push D-pad(Ent.)
pad(Ent).
• Returns to the screen viewed before entering the Select
Memory write mode in step w.

[DIAL]

Push D-pad() to select

“YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

Returns to the screen

viewed before entering
the Select Memory write
mode.
Memory name is dis-
played.

12-11
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Selecting a memory name display

While in the memory mode, the programmed memory Push [QUICK] .
name can be displayed.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Memory mode.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Display Type,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired Display type, and Push D-pad() to select
“Display Type,” and then
then push D-pad(Ent.)
push D-pad(Ent).
• Freq (Name OFF) : Displays only the frequency.
• Freq : Displays the large font sized
frequency and small font sized
memory name.
• Name : Displays large font sized mem-
ory name and a small font sized
frequency.

Push D-pad() to select

a desired Display type,
and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Example: When Memory Name “ID-51” is programmed

into M-CH 000 (146.010MHz).

• Freq (Name OFF) • Freq • Name

12-12
 Previous view

12 MEMORY OPERATION

■■Clearing a Memory contents

Contents of entered memories can be cleared (erased),
if desired.

qqHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se- Example: Clearing the memory channel 007.
lect Memory write mode.
In the Select Memory
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds.
write mode, rotate [DIAL]
• The memory channel number blinks.
to select the memory
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 sec-
channel to be cleared.
onds.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired memory channel
to be cleared.
• Select Call channels (C0 to C3) to erase a call channel,
or scan edge channels (0A/0B to 24A/24B) to erase a
scan channel.
eePush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Clear,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). Push [QUICK] , and
• The confirmation screen “Clear?” appears. push D-pad() to select
D-pad “Clear,” then push
(Ent) D-pad(Ent).
()

ttPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-

pad(Ent) to clear the contents.
• After clearing, the display returns to the Select Memory
write mode. Push D-pad() to select
• To cancel the memory clearing, select “NO” and push D- “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent.) pad(Ent) to clear.
yyPush [CLR] to exit the Select Memory write
mode.
• Returns to the previous screen viewed before entering
the Select Memory write mode in step q.

[DIAL]
Returns to the Select
Memory write mode.

P
 ush [CLR] to
return to the screen
viewed before entering
the Select Memory write
mode.

12-13
Previous view

Section 13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Scan.................................................................................. 13-2
DD About the scan function................................................. 13-2
DD VFO scan...................................................................... 13-2
DD Memory scan................................................................. 13-2
DD Memory bank scan........................................................ 13-2
DD Scanning direction......................................................... 13-3
DD Squelch setting for a scan............................................. 13-3
DD Tuning step for a VFO scan........................................... 13-3
DD Skip function.................................................................. 13-3
DD Temporarily Skip timer................................................... 13-3
DD Receive mode for a scan............................................... 13-3
DD When a signal is received............................................. 13-4
DD Scan name.................................................................... 13-4
DD Scan Stop Beep function............................................... 13-4
DD Scan function during Dualwatch operation.................... 13-4
■■ VFO scan.......................................................................... 13-5
DD VFO mode scan............................................................ 13-5
■■ Setting and clearing the skip frequencies.......................... 13-7
DD Setting the skip frequencies.......................................... 13-7
DD Clearing the skip setting................................................ 13-8
■■ Memory scan..................................................................... 13-9
DD Memory (skip) scan....................................................... 13-9
DD Memory bank scan...................................................... 13-10
■■ Setting the skip channel.................................................. 13-12
■■ Setting the temporary skip function................................. 13-13

13-1
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Scan
Scanning is a versatile function that can automatically
DDVFO scan
search for signals and makes it easier to locate stations
• ALL (Full scan) p. 13-5
to contact or listen to, or to skip unwanted channels or
Repeatedly scans the entire band.
frequencies.
108 MHz 479 MHz

DDAbout the scan function P SKIP Scan P SKIP

• In the VFO mode
Jump
The frequencies that are set as “PSKIP” are skipped
during a scan. (p. 13-7) • BAND (Selected band scan) p. 13-5
Scans all frequencies over the entire selected band.
NOTE: One or more pair of the scan edge channels
Band edge Band edge
must be programmed to start a program scan.
P SKIP Scan P SKIP
• In the memory mode
Jump
Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory channels.
The frequencies that are set as skip channels “PSKIP” • PROG 0~24 (Program scan) p. 13-5
and “SKIP” are not scanned. (p.13-12) Scans the frequency range which is programmed
into the program scan channels (PROGRAM-CH).
NOTE: Two or more memory channels must be pro-
grammed to start a memory scan. Band
Scan edges
Band
edge XXA XXB edge

Jump Scan

Jump
[Duplex (DUP) scan]
The Duplex scan searches for both TX and RX fre- • P-LINK0~9 (Program link scan) p. 13-5
quencies which are used in duplex operation. Sequentially scans the program scan channels

(p. 15-4, 15-5) which are set to link in the “PROGRAM LINK” item
• The “DUP–” or “DUP+” icon is displayed in the duplex in the MENU screen. (p. 16-20)
mode. (MENU > Scan > Program Link)
• A duplex scan will not start when the frequency offset is
set to “0.000 MHz.”

DDMemory scan
• ALL (Memory full scan) p. 13-9
[Tone scan] Scans all memory channels.
The tone scan searches for tone frequencies or
DTCS codes that are used by stations using the Tone • BAND (Selected band memory scan) p. 13-9
Squelch function. Scans all Memory channels on the same frequency
• A tone scan can be made in any mode: VFO, mem- band as the selected channel.
ory or Call channel.
• During a tone scan, rotate [DIAL] to switch scan • MODE (Mode memory scan) p. 13-9
direction. Scans memory channels which are programmed

with the same receiving mode as the currently se-
Refer to “Tone Squelch function” or “DTCS code lected mode.
Squelch function” for details. (pp. 17-13 to 17-16)
DDMemory bank scan
• ALL (Full bank scan) p. 13-10
Scans all banks.

• BANK-LINK (Bank link scan) p. 13-10

Sequentially scans the banks which are set to link in
the “BANK LINK” item in the MENU screen.
(MENU > Scan > Bank Link)

• BANK-A~Z (Bank scan) p. 13-10

S
 cans the memory channels in the selected bank.

13-2
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Scan (Continued)
DDScanning direction
• If desired, rotate [DIAL] to switch the scanning direc-
tion during a scan.

DDSquelch setting for a scan

The squelch level can be changed to suit your operat-
ing needs. Set the squelch level to open the squelch,
according to the received signal strength.
The default squelch level is “AUTO.”
• During a scan, while holding down [SQL], and then ro-
tate [DIAL] to adjust the squelch level. Release [SQL] Squelch level
to restart the scan.

DDTuning step for a VFO scan

The selected tuning step is applied to the scan.

DDSkip function
The skip function speeds up scanning by not scanning
TIP: When the “PROGRAM SKIP” item is set to OFF,
those frequencies set as skip channels.
the Scan Skip function cannot be used. (p. 16-19)
(MENU > Scan > Program skip)

DDTemporary Skip timer

The Temporary Skip function temporarily skips unwant-
ed frequencies during a scan, for the set period.
• These settings can be changed in the MENU screen.
(p. 16-18)
(MENU > Scan > Temporary Skip Timer)

Scanning in the FM mode

DDReceive mode for a scan
• The selected receive mode is used by the scan.
• During a memory or bank scan, the receive mode pro-
grammed into the channel is used by the scan.
Blinks

Blinks

13-3
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Scan (Continued)
DDWhen a signal is received
When a signal is received, the scan pauses for approxi-
mately 10 seconds (default), then resumes.
The scan resumes approximately 2 seconds (default)
after the signal is disappears. Blinks
To manually resume the scan, rotate [DIAL].
• These settings can be changed in the MENU screen. Blinks
(p. 16-18)
(MENU > Scan > Pause Timer)
(MENU > Scan > Resume Timer)

The S-meter shows the

received signal strength.

DDScan name
A desired name can be assigned to each PROGRAM-
CH (**A/**B). (p. 12-10)
By selecting the scan name, the scanning frequency
range will be set. Scan name
“Scan 0”

The scan type selecting screen.

DDScan Stop Beep function

The Scan Stop Beep function sounds a beep when a
signal is received.
The function can be turned ON in the MENU screen.
(p. 16-90)
(MENU > Sounds > Scan Stop Beep)

DDScan function during Dualwatch opera-

tion
When the scan function is used during the dualwatch Example: Full scan is running on the MAIN
operation, the SUB band audio signal may be muted, band, and the AIR band is selected
depending on the operating band or mode. on the SUB band.
And, the audio output may be interrupted when the fre-
quency or operating mode is switched while scanning.
MAIN
❍ SUB band mute status band
MAIN band SUB band
DV mode SUB
DV mode
FM-N mode band
DV mode
FM-N mode
FM-N mode When an AIR band frequency is
AIR band AIR band scanned on the MAIN band, the
SUB band audio signal is muted.

13-4
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■VFO scan Hold down

There are 6 scan types: Full scan, Band scan, Program [SCAN]
scan, Program link scan, Duplex scan and Tone scan. for 1 second.

NOTE: The frequencies that are set as skip channels

“PSKIP” are skipped during a scan.
When the “PROGRAM SKIP” item in the MENU screen
is set to OFF, the frequencies that are set as skip chan-
nels “PSKIP”, are not skipped during a scan.
(MENU > Scan > Program Skip)
Push D-pad() to
DDVFO mode scan select, then push
qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. D-pad(Ent).
wwP ush [MODE] to select the operating mode.
eeHold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
rrP
 ush D-pad() to select the scan type.
• ALL : Full scan.
• BAND : Band scan.
• P-LINK0~9 : Program link scan.
• P00~24 : Program scan.
• DUP : Duplex scan (p. 13-2).
(Appears only when duplex is set.)
• TONE : Tone scan. Example: Full scan in the FM mode.
(For tone squelch scanning)
D-pad
(Ent)
()
Blinks
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to start the scan.
• ALL : The decimal point and “ALL” blinks. Blinks
• BAND : The decimal point and “BND” blinks.
• P-LINK0~9/P00~24
: The decimal point and Scan edge number blink.
• DUP : The decimal point and “DUP+”/“DUP–” blink.
• If desired, rotate [DIAL] to switch the scanning direction
during a scan.
• If desired, push [MODE] to change the operating When a signal is received.
mode during a scan.
• The scan resumes even while the MENU screen is dis-
played.
yy
To cancel the scan, hold down [SCAN] for
Blinks
1 second.
• Pushing [CLR] also cancels the scan.
Blinks

[DIAL]

The S-meter shows the

received signal strength.

TIP: Holding down [SCAN] and rotate [DIAL]

also selects the scan type. The scan immediately
starts when [SCAN] is released.

13-5
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

DD VFO mode scan (continued)

When a scan name is assigned.

When a scan name is assigned, the scan type can be • When the scan name is assigned
set by selecting the scan name from the scan type list.
(Step r on page 13-5.)

NOTE: The scan name is not displayed during a scan.

Scan name
“Scan 0”

• When the scan name is not assigned

Scan edges

When a program link name is assigned.

When a program link name is assigned, the scan type • When the program link name is assigned
can be set by selecting the program link name from the
scan type list. (Step r on page 13-5.)

NOTE: The program link name is not displayed during Program link
a scan. name “Link 0”

• When the program link name is not assigned

Program link

13-6
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Setting and clearing the skip frequencies

DDSetting the skip frequencies
 he frequencies set as skip channels “PSKIP” are
T
skipped (not scanned).
Example: Full scan in the FM mode.
qqStart the VFO scan (p. 13-5).
• When a signal is received, the scan pauses.
wwWhile the scan is paused, and if you want to skip the
frequency, hold down [S.MW] for 1 second (until
Blinks
the 3 beeps sound).
• The memory channel number blinks.
• When a signal is received during the scan, the transceiv- Blinks
er attempts to program the frequency as a skip channel,
into empty memory channel 499.
• If channel 499 is already programmed, the transceiver
automatically searches backwards for a blank channel to
program.
If no blank memory channel is found, a beep sounds, and
no skip channel is programmed. When a signal is received.
eeAfter the skip channel is programmed, or the beep Hold down
sounds, the scan resumes. [M/CALL]
for 1 second.

Blinks

Blinks

153.005 MHz is pro-

grammed into memory
channel “499,” as the
skip frequency.

Blinks
The channel is
programmed as
a skip frequency.
Blinks

13-7
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Setting and clearing the skip frequencies (Continued)

DDClearing the skip setting

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Push [M/CALL] ,
Memory mode. then rotate [DIAL] to
ww
Rotate [DIAL] to select the memory channel you select the memory
want to clear as the skip channel. channel to clear its skip
eePush [QUICK] . setting.
rrPush D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

ttPush D-pad() to select “OFF.” Push [QUICK] .

• OFF : Cancel the skip setting.
• SKIP : Skipped during a memory scan.
• PSKIP : S
 kipped during both VFO and memory scans.
yyPush D-pad(Ent) to save the selection.
• The skip setting is canceled.
The channel that
is programmed as
[DIAL] a skip frequency.

TIP: The skip setting is also cancelled when the mem-

ory channel set as skip channel is deleted. Push D-pad() to
See page 12-13 for details. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

“PSKIP” disappears.

13-8
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Memory scan
Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory channels.
There two types of scan in the memory mode; Memory Push [M/CALL] .
scan and memory bank scan.
• Channels set as “PSKIP” or “SKIP” are skipped during
a scan.
• Two or more memory channels, which are not set
as skip channels, must be programmed into start a
memory scan.

DDMemory (skip) scan Hold down [SCAN]

 he memory channels set as “PSKIP” or “SKIP” skip
T for 1 second.
channels are not scanned.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Memory mode.
wwHold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
eeP ush D-pad() to select the scan type.
• ALL : Full scan
• BAND : Band memory scan Push D-pad() to
• MODE : Mode memory scan select, then push
• DUP : Duplex scan (p. 13-2) D-pad(Ent).
(Appears only when duplex is set on the chan-
nel.)
• TONE : Tone scan (For tone scanning)
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to start the scan.

• If desired, rotate [DIAL] to switch the scanning direction
during a scan.
• The scan resumes even while the MENU screen is dis-
played.
ttTo cancel the scan, hold down [SCAN] for 1 sec- Blinks
ond.
• Pushing [CLR] also cancels the scan.
Blinks

[DIAL]
When a signal is received.

Blinks

Memory channel
number
Blinks
The S-meter shows the
received signal strength.

TIP: Holding down [SCAN] and then rotating

[DIAL] also selects the scan type. The scan immedi-
ately starts when [SCAN] is released.

13-9
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Memory scan (Continued)

DDMemory bank scan
 memory bank scan searches through the memory
A
channels in the selected bank.
• Two or more memory channels, which are not set as skip chan-
nels, must be programmed to start a memory bank scan.
• When the “BANK” item in the MENU screen is set to “OFF,”
a bank scan is not started.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Push [M/CALL] .

Memory mode.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group to be Hold down [SCAN]

scanned, and then push D-pad(Ent). for 1 second.
• Only Bank groups that have memory channels assigned
to them are displayed.
ttHold down [MODE] for 1 second.
yyPush D-pad () to select the scan type.
• ALL : Full bank scan
• BANK-LINK
: Bank link scan
• BANK-A to Z
: Bank scan
(Only banks which contain a memory chan- Push D-pad() to
nel are displayed.) select, then push
• DUP : Duplex scan (p. 13-2) D-pad(Ent).
(Appears only when duplex is set on the
channel.)
• TONE : Tone scan (For tone scanning)
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to start the scan.
iiTo cancel the scan, hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
• Pushing [CLR] also cancels the scan.

[DIAL]

Blinks

Blinks

When a signal is received.

TIP: Holding down [SCAN] and rotate [DIAL]

also selects the scan type. The scan immediately
Blinks
starts when [SCAN] is released.
Bank channel
NOTE: number
• The bank contains only channels which are set as
“SKIP” or “PSKIP” are skipped. Blinks
• When the all selected banks contain only channels The S-meter shows the
which are set as “SKIP” or “PSKIP,” the scan is not received signal strength.
started.
13-10
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Memory scan
DD Memory bank scan (continued)

When a bank name is programmed • When the bank name is programmed.

When a bank name is programmed, the scan type can
be set by selecting the bank name from the scan type
list. (Step y on page 13-10.)

NOTE: The bank name is not displayed during a scan.

Bank name
“UHF Contest”

13-11
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Setting the skip channel

The channels set as “SKIP” or “PSKIP” skip channels
are skipped (not scanned).
Example: Set “SKIP” to Memory channel “009.”

TIP: See page 13-8 for details of clearing the skip set- Rotate [DIAL] to select
ting. the memory channel.
qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the
Memory mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the memory channel to be
set as a skip channel.
eePush [QUICK] .
rrPush D-pad() to select “SKIP” or “PSKIP,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• OFF : Cancel the skip setting.
• SKIP : Skipped during a memory scan.
Push [QUICK] .
• PSKIP : Skipped during both VFO and memory scans.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save the selection. Memory channel

• The skip setting is set. number

[DIAL]
Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

“SKIP” is set.

13-12
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Setting the temporary skip function

This function temporarily skips unwanted frequencies Example: Full scan in the FM mode.
during a scan, for the set period.
This function enables you to temporarily skip the un-
wanted frequencies without the skip frequency setting.
Blinks
qqStart the scan. (pp. 13-5, 13-9)
• When a signal is received, the scan pauses.
Blinks
wwWhile the scan is paused, and if you want to skip the
frequency, push [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “Temporary Skip,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
() When a signal is received.
rrAfter pushing D-pad(Ent), the scan resumes. Push [QUICK] .
• The frequency will be skipped for the Temporary Skip
time period.
• After the Temporary Skip time period passes, or the scan Blinks
is cancelled, the Temporary Skip is also cancelled.
Blinks
TIP: The Temporary Skip time period is set to “5 min-
utes” by default.
You can change the setting in the MENU screen.
(MENU > Scan > Temporary Skip Timer)

Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

TIP: During Memory or DR scanning, follow steps w

and r to skip the channel for the set period (Default:
5 minutes).

Up to 5 Temporary Skip fre-

quencies or memories can
be set.
When the 6th frequency or
memory is set, the pop up
screen appears as shown
to the right, and the oldest
frequency or memory is au-
tomatically deleted.
13-13
Previous view

Section 14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ Priority watch..................................................................... 14-2
DD VFO frequency and a priority channel........................... 14-2
DD VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan.................... 14-2
DD VFO scan and a priority channel................................... 14-2
DD VFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan.............................. 14-2
DD A frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen and
a priority channel........................................................... 14-3
DD DR scan and a priority channel...................................... 14-3
■■ VFO frequency and a priority channel............................... 14-4
■■ VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan........................ 14-6
■■ VFO scan and a priority channel....................................... 14-8
■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan.................................. 14-10
■■ A frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen and
a priority channel............................................................. 14-13
■■ DR scan and a priority channel....................................... 14-16

14-1
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■Priority watch
While operating on a VFO frequency, using the DR
function or while scanning, Priority watch checks for
signals on a selected frequency every 5 seconds.

DDVFO frequency and a priority channel DDVFO scan and a priority channel
(p. 14-4) (p. 14-8)
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving on a VFO frequency. during a VFO mode scan.
A Memory channel, Bank channel or Call channel can be A Memory channel, Bank channel or Call channel can be
selected as the priority channel. selected as the priority channel.

• VFO frequency and a Memory channel • VFO scan and a Memory channel

VFO VFO
Selected Selected
mode mode
M-CH M-CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• VFO frequency and a Bank channel • VFO scan and a Bank channel

VFO VFO Selected

Selected mode
mode Bank CH
Bank CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• VFO frequency and a Call channel • VFO scan and a Call channel

VFO VFO
mode mode CALL-CH
CALL-CH

Scan
Receiving (5 seconds)
(5 seconds)

DDVFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan DDVFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan
(p. 14-6) (p. 14-10)
Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels every Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev-
5 seconds, while receiving on a VFO frequency. ery 5 seconds, during a VFO mode scan.
A Memory scan or Bank scan can be selected. A Memory scan or Bank scan can be selected.

• VFO frequency and a Memory scan • VFO scan and a Memory scan
0 0
VFO SKIP 1 SKIP 1
VFO
mode 2 mode 2
499 499
Receiving
(5 seconds) M-CH Scan M-CH
(5 seconds)

• VFO frequency and a Bank scan

• VFO scan and a Bank scan
00
00
SKIP 01
VFO SKIP 01
mode 02 VFO
mode 02
99
Receiving 99
Bank CH Scan
(5 seconds) Bank CH
(5 seconds)

14-2
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ Priority watch (Continued)

DDA frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen DDDR scan and a priority channel
and a priority channel (p. 14-16)
(p. 14-13) Checks a priority channel every 5 seconds, during a DR
Checks a priority channel every 5 seconds while receiv- scan.
ing on a repeater or simplex frequency set in “FROM” A VFO frequency, Memory channel, Bank channel or
on the DR screen. Call channel can be selected as the priority channel.
A VFO frequency, Memory channel, Bank channel or
Call channel can be selected as the priority channel. • DR scan and a VFO frequency

• “FROM” on the DR screen and a VFO frequency DR VFO

screen frequency
“From”
on the VFO Scan
DR screen frequency (5 seconds)

Receiving • DR scan and a Memory channel

(5 seconds)

• “FROM” on the DR screen and a Memory channel DR Selected

screen M-CH
“From”
on the Selected Scan
DR screen M-CH (5 seconds)

Receiving • DR scan and a Bank channel

(5 seconds)

• “FROM” on the DR screen and a Bank channel DR Selected

screen Bank CH
“From”
on the Selected Scan
Bank CH (5 seconds)
DR screen

Receiving • DR scan and a Call channel

(5 seconds)

DR
• “FROM” on the DR screen and a Call channel screen CALL-CH

“From”
Scan
on the CALL-CH (5 seconds)
DR screen

Receiving
(5 seconds)

14-3
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■VFO frequency and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving on a VFO frequency.
Example: Checks Memory channel “490” every 5 sec-
1. Set the VFO frequency onds, while receiving on 145.800 MHz.

q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Rotate [DIAL] to set the
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency. receive frequency.

2. Set the priority channel Push [M/CALL] .

• To select a Memory channel

q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you
want to watch. Rotate [DIAL] to select
the Memory channel.
• To select a Bank channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. Push [QUICK] .
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you
want to watch.
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and Push D-pad() to
then push D-pad(Ent). select, then push
• The Bank list is displayed. D-pad(Ent).
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• If “OFF” is selected, the bank selection is can-
celed.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

• To select a Call channel Push D-pad() to

q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select select, then push
the Call channel mode. D-pad(Ent).
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want
to watch.

3. Start the Priority watch

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.” [DIAL]
• ON: When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the channel is automatically se-
lected.
• Bell: When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority watch.
• The “PRIO” icon appears

NOTE:
• You can set the priority channel (Step 2) before set-
ting the VFO frequency (Step 1).
• Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority watch. ☞☞Continued on the next page.
14-4
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO frequency and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During a Priority watch

Example: Checks M-CH “490” while receiving on
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
145.800 MHz.
while receiving on a VFO frequency.
Appears Appears

Priority channel Checks the Memory chan-

nel every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Bank CH “D06” while receiving on
145.800 MHz.
Appears Appears

Priority channel Checks the Bank channel

every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Call CH “C3” while receiving on
145.800 MHz.
Appears Appears

Priority channel Checks the Call channel

every 5 seconds.

5. When a signal is received

Example: For a Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
the channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
- The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan. (p. 16-18)

• When “Bell” is selected. Automatically selects the priority channel.

When a signal is received on the priority channel, a
beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks. Blinks

Remains in the VFO mode.

14-5
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan

Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev- Example: Sequentially checks the Memory channels every
ery 5 seconds, while receiving on a VFO frequency. 5 seconds, while receiving on 145.800 MHz.
Rotate [DIAL] to set the
1. Set the VFO frequency receive frequency.
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
Push [M/CALL] .
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency.

2. Start the Memory or Bank scan

• To select a Memory scan
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. Hold down [SCAN]
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. for 1 second.
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Memory scan.
(p. 13-9)
D-pad
(Ent)
() Push D-pad() to
• To select a Bank scan select, then push
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. D-pad(Ent).
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Bank scan.
(p. 13-10)
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] . Blinks
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent). Blinks
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent). Push [QUICK] .
• If “OFF” is selected, the bank selection is can- Push D-pad() to
celed. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
3. Start the Priority watch
q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
Push D-pad() to
push D-pad(Ent).
select, then push
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
D-pad(Ent).
• ON: When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the channel is automatically se-
lected.
[DIAL]
• Bell: When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority watch.
• The “PRIO” icon appears

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority and

Memory/Bank scan at the same time.

☞☞Continued on the next page.

14-6
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan (Continued)

4. During the Priority watch
Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev- Example: Sequentially checks the Memory channels while
ery 5 seconds, while receiving on a VFO frequency. receiving on 145.800 MHz.
Appears Appears

The Memory chan-

nels are sequential-
ly checked.

Checks the Memory chan-

nel every 5 seconds.

Example: S
 equentially checks Bank channels while re-
ceiving on 145.800 MHz.
Appears Appears

The bank channels

are sequentially
selected.

Checks the Bank channel

every 5 seconds.

5. When a signal is received

• When “ON” is selected. Example: For a Memory scan
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
the channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
- The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan. (p. 16-18)

• When “Bell” is selected.

Automatically selects the Memory channel.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, a
beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks. Blinks

Remains the VFO mode.

14-7
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■VFO scan and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
during a VFO mode scan. Example: Checks memory channel “490” every 5 sec-
onds, during a VFO scan.
1. Set the priority channel
• To select a Memory channel Push [M/CALL] ,
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. then rotate [DIAL] to se-
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you lect the Memory chan-
want to watch. nel.

• To select a Bank channel Push [QUICK] .

q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you Push D-pad() to
want to watch. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and Push D-pad() to
then push D-pad(Ent). select, then push
• If “OFF” is selected, the bank selection is can- D-pad(Ent).
celed.
D-pad
(Ent) Hold down [SCAN]
() for 1 second.

• To select a Call channel

q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select
the Call channel mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want
to watch. Push D-pad() to
select, then push
2. Start the Priority watch D-pad(Ent).
q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON: When a signal is received on the priority Blinks
channel, the channel is automatically se-
lected. Blinks
• Bell: When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode. [DIAL]
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority watch.
• The “PRIO” icon appears.

3. Start the VFO scan

q Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
w Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to start the VFO scan. (p. 13-5)

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel both scans.

☞☞Continued on the next page.

14-8
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority watch

Example: C
 hecks M-CH “490” while VFO scanning
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while VFO scanning Appears Appears

Checks the Memory chan-

Blinks
nel every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Bank-CH “D06” while VFO scanning
Appears Appears

Blinks Checks the Bank channel

every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Call-CH “C3” while VFO scanning
Appears Appears

Checks the Call channel

Blinks
every 5 seconds.

5. When a signal is received.

Example: For a Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, Blinks
the channel is automatically selected.
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan.

• When “Bell” is selected. Automatically selects the priority channel.

When a signal is received on the priority channel,
a beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks. The VFO Blinks
scan resumes.

Blinks

Blinks

Remains the VFO mode.

14-9
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan

Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev-
ery 5 seconds during a VFO scan.
Example: Sequentially checks the memory channels ev-
1. Start the Memory or Bank scan ery 5 seconds during a VFO scan.
• To select a Memory scan
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. Push [M/CALL] .
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. Hold down [SCAN]
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and for 1 second.
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Memory scan.
(p. 13-9)
D-pad
(Ent)
()
Push D-pad() to
• To select a Bank scan select, then push
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. D-pad(Ent).
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Bank scan.
(p.13-10)
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] . Blinks
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent). Blinks
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and Push [QUICK] .
then push D-pad(Ent).
• If “OFF” is selected, the bank selection is can- Push D-pad() to
celed. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
2. Start the Priority watch
q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.” Push D-pad() to
• ON: When a signal is received on the priority select, then push
channel, the channel is automatically se- D-pad(Ent).
lected.
• Bell: When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority watch. ☞☞Continued on the next page.
• The “PRIO” icon appears

14-10
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan (Continued)

3. Start the VFO scan Hold down [SCAN]

for 1 second.
q Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
w Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to start the VFO scan (p. 13-5).

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the all scans at the

same time. Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

Blinks

Blinks

4. During the Priority watch

Example: Checks the Memory channels while VFO scan-
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
ning
while VFO scanning.
Appears Appears

Blinks

Checks the Memory chan-

nels every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks the Bank channels while VFO scanning
Appears Appears

Blinks

Checks the Bank channels

every 5 seconds.

14-11
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan (Continued)

5. When a signal is received.

• When “ON” is selected. Example: For a Memory scan
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
the channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan.

• When “BELL” is selected.

When a signal is received on the priority channel, a Automatically selects the Memory channel.
beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks.
The VFO scan resumes. Blinks

Blinks

Blinks

Remains in the VFO mode.

14-12
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ A frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, Example: Checks “145.800 MHz” every 5 seconds, while
while receiving a repeater or simplex frequency in receiving on the repeater using the DR func-
“FROM” on the DR screen. tion.
Rotate [DIAL] to set the
1. Set the priority channel
receive frequency.
• To select a VFO frequency
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Hold down
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency. for 1 second.
• To select a Memory channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you
want to watch.
• To select a Bank channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you
want to watch.
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• If “OFF” is selected, the bank selection is canceled.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

• To select a Call channel

q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select
the Call channel mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want
to watch.
2. S
 elect a repeater or a simplex frequency on the
DR screen
q Hold down for 1 second to turn ON the DR
function.
w Push D-pad() to select the “FROM” (Access re-
peater) item.
[DIAL]
e Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired repeater or a
simplex frequency.
3. Start the Priority watch
q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON: When a signal is received on the priority chan-
nel, the channel is automatically selected.
• Bell: 
When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority watch. NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority watch.
• The “PRIO” icon appears
☞☞Continued on the next page.
14-13
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ A frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority watch

Example: Checks the VFO frequency every 5 seconds
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, while receiving on a repeater or a simplex fre-
while receiving a repeater on the DR screen. quency.
Appears Appears

Checks the VFO frequen-

cy every 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the M-CH “490” every 5 seconds while

receiving on a repeater or a simplex frequen-
cy.
Appears Appears

Checks the M-CH every 5

seconds.

Example: Checks the Bank CH “D06” every 5 seconds

while receiving on a repeater or a simplex fre-
quency.
Appears Appears

Checks the Bank CH ev-

ery 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the Call CH “C3” every 5 seconds

while receiving on a repeater or a simplex fre-
quency.
Appears Appears

Checks the Call CH every

5 seconds.

14-14
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ A frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen and a priority channel (Continued)

5. When a signal is received.

Example: For a Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, the
channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan.

• When “Bell” is selected.

When a signal is received on the priority channel, a Automatically selects the priority channel.
beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks.
Blinks

Remains on the DR screen.

14-15
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■DR scan and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, Example: Checks “145.800 MHz” every 5 seconds, dur-
during a DR scan. ing the DR scan.
Rotate [DIAL] to set the
1. Set the priority channel receive frequency.
• To select a VFO frequency
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Hold down
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency. for 1 second.

• To select a Memory channel

q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you Hold down [SCAN]
want to watch. for 1 second.
• To select a Bank channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you
want to watch.
How to select the Memory and Bank: Push D-pad() to se-
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] . lect the repeater type,
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent). The DR scan starts.
• If “OFF” is selected, the bank selection is can-
celed.
D-pad
(Ent)
()
Push [QUICK] .

• To select a Call channel Blinks

q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select Push D-pad() to
the Call channel mode. select, then push
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want D-pad(Ent).
to watch.
Push D-pad() to
2. Start the DR scan select, then push
q Hold down for 1 second. D-pad(Ent).
• The DR screen appears.
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. [DIAL]
e Push D-pad() to select the repeater type, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The DR scan starts.

3. Start the Priority watch

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON: When a signal is received on the priority chan-
nel, the channel is automatically selected. NOTE:
• Bell: When a signal is received on the priority chan- • You can start the Priority watch (Step 3) before start-
nel, the “ ” icon is displayed. ing the DR scan (Step 2).
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority watch. •P  ush [CLR] to cancel the Priority and the DR scan.
• The “PRIO” icon appears ☞☞Continued on the next page.
14-16
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR scan and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority watch
Example: C
 hecks the VFO frequency during the DR scan.
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
during a DR scan. Appears Appears

Checks the VFO frequen-

Blinks cy every 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the M-CH “490” during the DR scan.

Appears Appears

Checks the M-CH “490”

Blinks every 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the Bank CH “D06” during the DR scan.

Appears Appears

Checks the Bank CH

Blinks “D06” every 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the Call CH “C3” during the DR scan.

Appears Appears

Checks the Call CH “C3”

Blinks every 5 seconds.

14-17
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR scan and a priority channel (Continued)

5. When a signal is received. Example: For a Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, the Blinks
channel is automatically selected. The “PRIO” icon
blinks.
Push [CLR] to resume the Priority watch. Push
it again to cancel the scan.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan. Automatically selects the priority channel.

Blinks
•W
 hen “Bell” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, a
beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks. The DR scan
resumes.

Remains on the DR screen.

14-18
Previous view

Section 15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■ FM Repeater operation..................................................... 15-2
DD Checking the repeater input signal................................ 15-3
■■ Duplex operation............................................................... 15-4
DD Setting the frequency offset........................................... 15-4
DD Setting the duplex direction........................................... 15-5
DD Duplex operation........................................................... 15-5
■■ Off band indication............................................................ 15-5
■■ Auto repeater function....................................................... 15-6
DD Auto repeater setting..................................................... 15-6
DD Frequency range and offset direction............................ 15-6
■■ 1750 Hz tone..................................................................... 15-7

15-1
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■FM Repeater operation Repeater

A repeater receives transmitted signals and retransmits 144.900 MHz 144.900 MHz
them on a different frequency. The transmit frequency
is shifted from the receive frequency by a preset fre-
quency offset. 145.500 MHz 145.500 MHz
In duplex operation, the transceiver’s frequency offset
is set to the same as that of the repeater. (p. 16-16)

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.

wwPush [MODE] several times to select the FM
mode. Station A Station B
eeRotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency (repeater
Transmit frequency Receive frequency
output frequency).
• The frequency changes according to the preset tuning
steps. See the page 5-8 for details.

Only USA and Korean versions have an Auto Re-

peater function:
When the function is turned ON, steps r and t are
not necessary.*
(Default for USA version: ON (DUP))
(Default for Korean version: ON)
The Auto Repeater function can be turned OFF in the
Auto Repeater item of the MENU screen. Push [MODE] to
(MENU > Function > Auto Repeater) select the FM mode.
See page 16-73 for details.
rrSet the duplex offset direction. (p. 15-5)
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears.
•The frequency offset can be set in the “Offset Freq”
screen. (p. 15-4)
(MENU > DUP/TONE... > Offset Freq) Rotate [DIAL] to set the
ttPush [QUICK] , and push D-pad() to select receive frequency.
“TONE,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

yyPush D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-

pad(Ent). Set the duplex offset di-
• “TONE” appears. rection and turn ON the
• The tone frequency can be set in the “Repeater Tone” repeater tone.
screen. 88.5 Hz is set by default. (p. 16-16)
(MENU > DUP/TONE... > Repeater Tone)
uuCommunicate in the normal way.

*For the USA version, the Auto repeater function turns ON

the duplex operation only. To turn ON the repeater tone, you [DIAL]
should manually set as step t, or select “ON (DUP, TONE)”
in the Auto Repeater item of the MENU screen. (p. 16-73)

NOTE:
• The Auto repeater function uses the preset repeater
tone frequency and frequency offset. Depending on
the frequency offset value, the off band indication,
“OFF,” appears on the display when [PTT] is pushed,
and transmit is inhibited. (p. 15-5)
• See Section 8 for details on accessing a D-STAR
repeater.
15-2
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■ FM Repeater operation (Continued)

DDChecking the repeater input signal

You can check whether the other station’s transmit sig-
nal can be received directly or not, by listening on the
repeater input frequency.

➥➥Hold down [SQL] to listen on the repeater input fre- While monitoring
quency.
• While monitoring, the TX/RX indicator lights green, and Hold
an S/RF meter dot blinks. down
• While monitoring, the displayed frequency automatically
[SQL]
changes to the transmit frequency (repeater input fre-
quency).
• When the other station’s signal can be directly received,
move to a non-repeater frequency and use simplex. (du-
plex OFF)

Blinks

15-3
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■Duplex operation
The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
up or down from the receive frequency by an offset
amount.

DDSetting the frequency offset

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
wwPush [MENU] .
eeP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

rrPush D-pad() to select the “Offset Freq,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
tt
Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency offset to be-
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and then push
D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
• The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used when
setting the frequency offset. The current frequency
• Pushing [V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as shown offset
below.
TS* 1 MHz 10 MHz
Rotate [DIAL], then
*The frequency changes according to the preset tuning
push D-pad(Ent).
steps. (p. 5-8)
yyPush [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.

[DIAL]

Push [QUICK]
To reset to the default value.
Push [QUICK] in step t as described above, then
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.

NOTE:
• The frequency offset cannot be changed while using
Push D-pad(Ent)
the DR function.
• The Auto repeater function uses the preset frequen-
cy offset. Depending on the frequency offset value,
the off band indication, “OFF,” appears on the display
when [PTT] is pushed. (p. 15-5)

The current frequency

offset
15-4
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■ Duplex operation (Continued)

DDSetting the duplex direction
qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to set the operating frequency.
eePush [QUICK] .
rrPush D-pad() to select “DUP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()
Push D-pad() to
ttPush D-pad() to select “DUP–” (negative offset) or select, then push
“DUP+” (positive offset), and then push D-pad(Ent) D-pad(Ent).
to save, and exit the Quick Menu screen.
• OFF : For simplex operation (the receive and transmit
frequencies are the same).
• DUP– : The transmit frequency shifts down from the re-
ceive frequency by the offset amount.
• DUP+ : The transmit frequency shifts up from the receive
frequency by the offset amount.

[DIAL] Push D-pad() to

select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

DDDuplex operation While monitoring

qqPush [MODE] several times to select the FM
mode.
wwHold down [SQL] to listen on the repeater input fre-
quency.
• The transmit frequency (repeater input frequency) ap- [SQL]
pears on the function display.
eeCommunicate in the normal way.

NOTE: When the Auto repeater is ON, and the oper-

ating frequency is set out of the repeater output fre-
quency range, the duplex is automatically cancelled.
Blinks

■■Off band indication

If the transmit frequency is out of the amateur band, the
off band indication, “OFF,” appears on the display when
[PTT] is pushed. Check the frequency offset (p. 15-4) or
duplex direction (see above) in this case.

15-5
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■Auto repeater function

When the operating frequency falls within the repeater DDFrequency range and offset direction
output frequency range, the Auto Repeater function • USA version
can automatically sets the repeater settings (duplex FREQUENCY RANGE SHIFT DIRECTION
ON/OFF, duplex direction, tone encoder ON/OFF).
145.200~145.495 MHz “DUP–” is set
The Auto repeater function uses the preset repeater
tone frequency and frequency offset. 146.610~146.995 MHz “DUP–” is set
See page 16-16 for details of the setting.
147.000~147.395 MHz “DUP+” is set
442.000~444.995 MHz “DUP+” is set
447.000~449.995 MHz “DUP–” is set
• Korean version
FREQUENCY RANGE SHIFT DIRECTION
439.000~440.000 MHz “DUP–” is set
DDAuto repeater setting
qqPush [MENU] to enter the MENU screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”), Push [MENU] .
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Auto Repeater,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrRotate [DIAL] to select the Auto repeater setting.
USA version:
• OFF : The Auto repeater function is OFF.
• ON (DUP) : Turns ON only the duplex operation. Push D-pad() to
(Default) select, then push
• ON (DUP, TONE) : Turns ON the duplex operation and D-pad(Ent).
tone encoder
Korean version:
• OFF : The Auto repeater function is OFF.
• ON : Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder.
(Default)
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU screen.

NOTE: When turned ON, the Auto repeater function

uses the preset repeater tone frequency and frequency Push D-pad() to
offset. See page 16-16 for details of the setting. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
NOTE: For the USA and Korean versions:
When turned ON, the Auto repeater function has pri-
ority over the manual duplex setting. If the transmit
frequency changes after setting, the Auto repeater
function may have changed the duplex setting.

[DIAL]

15-6
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■1750 Hz tone
To access most European repeaters, the transceiver
must transmit a 1750 Hz tone. For such European re-
peaters, do the following procedures.
• This tone can also be used as a ‘Call signal.’ Push [MENU] .

For only the ID-51E:

Push [PTT] briefly, then hold down [PTT] to transmit a
1750 Hz tone burst signal.
qqPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T-
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()
Push D-pad() to
wwPush D-pad() to select “DTMF Memory,” and then select, then push
push D-pad(Ent). D-pad(Ent).
eeRotate [DIAL] to select “T-CALL,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to set.
rrPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
ttRotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency (repeater
output frequency).
Push D-pad() to
yySet the duplex offset direction. (p. 15-5)
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears. select, then push
uuWhile holding down [PTT], push [SQL] to transmit a D-pad(Ent).
1750 Hz tone signal.
• If “OFF BAND” appears, check the frequency offset or
shift direction. (pp. 15-4, 15-5)
•While transmitting, the displayed frequency automati-
cally changes to the transmit frequency (repeater input
frequency).
Rotate [DIAL] to set the
iiHold down [SQL] to check whether the other sta-
receive frequency.
tion’s transmit signal can be received directly or not,
by listening on the repeater input frequency.
• While monitoring, the TX/RX indicator lights green, and
the S/RF meter dot blinks.
• While monitoring, the displayed frequency automatically
changes to the transmit frequency (repeater input fre-
quency).
• If you can hear the other station, you may want to change Set the duplex offset di-
to the Simplex mode and contact directly. rection.
ooPush [PTT] to transmit.
!0 Release [PTT] to receive.

[DIAL]
While holding down
[PTT], push [SQL] to
[PTT] transmit a 1750 Hz
[SQL] tone signal.

15-7
Previous view

Section 16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu item selection.......................................................... 16-2
DD Entering the Menu screen............................................. 16-3
■■ Menu items and Default settings....................................... 16-4
■■ DUP/TONE items............................................................ 16-16
■■ Scan items....................................................................... 16-18
■■ Voice Memo items........................................................... 16-22
■■ Voice TX items................................................................. 16-28
■■ Broadcast (BC) Radio items............................................ 16-30
■■ GPS items....................................................................... 16-32
■■ Call sign items................................................................. 16-51
■■ RX History items.............................................................. 16-53
■■ DV Memory items............................................................ 16-56
■■ My Station items.............................................................. 16-59
■■ DV Set items.................................................................... 16-60
■■ SPEECH items................................................................ 16-66
■■ DTMF/T-CALL items........................................................ 16-68
■■ QSO/RX Log items.......................................................... 16-69
■■ Function items................................................................. 16-72
■■ Display items................................................................... 16-80
■■ Sounds items................................................................... 16-88
■■ Time set items................................................................. 16-92
■■ DV Gateway items........................................................... 16-94
■■ SD Card items................................................................. 16-95
■■ Others items.................................................................... 16-97

16-1
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Menu item selection

The MENU system is used to enter infrequently
changed values or function settings. In addition to this
page, see pages 16-4 through 16-15 for details of each
item.

NOTE: The Menu system is constructed in a tree

structure. You may go to the next tree level, or go back
a level, depending on the selected item.

Enters/ Goes back

Exits the a level
Menu
screen.
Return to
the default
setting

Moves selector up
Set
Goes to the Goes to the
previous level next level

Moves selector down

16-2
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Menu item selection (Continued)

DDEntering the Menu screen
Example: Set the Auto Power OFF function to “30 min.”

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Time Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• If D-pad(E) is continuously held down, the items are
quickly scrolled.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Auto Power OFF,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “30min.”
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the Menu
screen.

To return to the de-

fault setting, push
[QUICK] in step
r to display “De-
fault,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Appears

16-3
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Menu items and Default settings

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
DUP/TONE... In this item, set the repeater duplex offset and the channel tone or code options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Offset Freq 0.000~0.600.00*~59.995 Sets the frequency offset for duplex (re-
peater) operation.

Repeater Tone 67.0~88.5~254.1 Selects the tone frequency used to ac-

cess the repeaters.

TSQL Freq 67.0~88.5~254.1 Selects the tone frequency for the Tone
squelch or the pocket beep function.
Tone Burst OFF or ON Turns the Tone Burst function ON or OFF.
When this setting is ON and you transmit
a signal which superimposes the CTCSS
tone or subaudible tone, the squelch tail
noise of FM mode is suppressed on the
RX side.
DTCS Code 023~754 Selects DTCS (both encoder/decoder)
codes for DTCS squelch or the pocket
beep function.
DTCS Polarity Both N, TN-RR, TR-RN or Both R Selects the DTCS polarity for the DTCS
squelch or the pocket beep function.
Digital Code 00~99 Selects the digital code for the Digital
Code squelch function.

* The default value may differ, depending on the frequency band (selected as the Main band before entering the
Menu screen) and the transceiver version.

Scan In this item, set the scan options.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Pause Timer 2sec~10sec~20sec or HOLD Selects the scan pause time. When re-
ceiving signals, the scan pauses accord-
ing to the scan pause timer.

Resume Timer 0sec~2sec~5sec or HOLD Selects the scan resume time from a pause
after the received signal disappears.

Temporary Skip Timer 5min, 10min or 15min Selects the Temporary Skip Time. When
the time is set, specified frequencies are
skipped for this period during a scan.

Program Skip OFF or ON Turns the Program Skip Scan function ON

or OFF for a VFO mode scan.

Bank Link A:□

✔~Z:□
✔ Selects banks to be scanned during a
Bank Link Scan.

Program Link* Sets the link function for the program scan
edge channels.

* See page 16-20 for details of the preset values.

16-4
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Voice Memo In this item, set the TX/RX voice recording options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

QSO Recorder <<REC Start>>* Starts recording the received signal audio.
Play Files* PLAY FILES Plays or deletes the recorded audio.

Recorder Set REC Mode TX&RX or RX Only Selects to record the TX audio or not.
RX REC Condition Always or Squelch Auto Selects whether or not the squelch status
affects the RX voice audio recording.

File Split OFF or ON Selects whether or not to automatically

create a new file if transmission and re-
ception, or squelch status (open and
close) is switched.

PTT Auto REC OFF or ON Turns the PTT Automatic Recording func-
tion ON or OFF.
Player Set Skip Time 3sec, 5sec, 10sec or 30sec Sets the Skip time to rewind or forward the
recorded audio when you push the fast-re-
wind or fast-forward key during playback.

Voice Recorder Record* Starts recording the microphone audio.

Play Files* PLAY FILES Plays or deletes the recorded audio.

Recorder Set MIC Gain 1, 2, 3 or 4 Sets the microphone sensitivity to suit

your needs.
Player Set Skip Time 3sec, 5sec, 10sec or 30sec Sets the Skip time to rewind or forward the
recorded audio when you push the fast-re-
wind or fast-forward key during playback.

Records a voice audio to use the Auto

DV Auto Reply*
Reply function in the DV mode.

* Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

Voice TX In this item, set the microphone voice recording options.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Record* Starts recording the microphone audio.

TX Set Repeat Time 1sec~5sec~15sec Sets the repeat interval. The transceiver
repeatedly transmits the recorded voice
audio at this interval.
TX Monitor OFF or ON The TX Monitor function outputs the TX
voice audio from the speaker during voice
transmission.
The transceiver transmits the recorded
<<Single TX>>*
voice audio only one time.
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the
<<Repeat TX>>*
recorded voice audio for a maximum of
10 minutes.

* Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
16-5
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
BC Radio In this item, set the Broadcast (BC) Radio options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

BC Radio Memory Shows the BC Radio memory contents.

BC Radio Set Auto Mute OFF, 0sec~2sec~10sec Sets the timer to temporarily mute the
BC Radio audio when receiving signals
on the operating band.
FM Antenna External or Earphone Selects the desired antenna for FM.

Power Save (BC Radio) OFF or ON Turns the Power Save (BC Radio) func-
tion ON (to save battery power) or OFF.

<<BC Radio ON>>/<<BC Radio OFF>> Turns the BC Radio ON or OFF.

<<BC Radio Mode>> Selects the BC Radio Mode with the

transceiver in the Sleep mode.

16-6
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
GPS In this item, set the GPS options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

GPS Set GPS Select OFF, Internal GPS, External GPS Selects the GPS receiver that the trans-
or Manual ceiver receives its position data from.
Power Save (Internal GPS) OFF, 1min, 2min, 4min, 8min or Auto Selects the internal GPS receiver power
save function.
Manual Position Manually enters your current position.

GPS Indicator OFF or ON Turns the GPS indicator ON or OFF.

GPS Out (To DATA Jack) OFF or ON Turns the output of GPS information from
the internal GPS receiver to the [DATA]
jack ON or OFF.

GPS Information Displays the received GPS information.

GPS Position Displays your position, RX station, GPS
memory and Alarm positions.
GPS Memory Shows the GPS memory contents.
GPS Alarm Alarm Select OFF, RX, Group or Memory Selects the target for the GPS alarm func-
tion.
Alarm Area (Group) 0’05”/0.08’~0’15”/0.25’~ Enters the GPS alarm active range.
59’59”/59.99’
Alarm Area (RX/Memory) Limited, Extended or Both Selects the GPS alarm active range.

GPS Logger* GPS Logger OFF or ON Turns the GPS logger function ON or OFF,
to store your route as you move.
Record Interval 1sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec or 60sec Selects the GPS Logger function record
interval.
Record sentence □
✔RMC/□
✔GGA/□
✔GLL/□
✔VTG Selects the GPS Logger function record
sentences.
<<GPS Logger Only>> Turns ON the GPS logger function with
the transceiver in the Sleep mode.

* Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

☞☞Continued on the next page

16-7
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
GPS (Continued) In this item, set the GPS options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

GPS TX Mode Select D-PRS (DV-A) or NMEA (DV-G) as

the data mode when transmitting GPS data,
or select OFF.
OFF Turns OFF the GPS TX function.

D-PRS Unproto Address API51,DSTAR* Enters an unproto address, or keep the

(DV-A) default.
Symbol 1:Person, 2:Bicycle, 3:Car or 4:House QTH (VHF) Selects a desired symbol to transmit.

SSID - - -, (-0), -1~-15 or -A~-Z Selects the APRS® call sign SSID.

Comment Enters a comment to transmit.

Time Stamp OFF, DHM or HMS Selects a format to transmit the current
UTC time as a time stamp.
Altitude OFF or ON Turns the altitude transmit option ON or
OFF.
Data Extension OFF or Course/Speed Selects whether to transmit the course
and speed data or not.

NMEA GPS Sentence □RMC/□

✔GGA/□GLL/□VTG/ Transmits position data in selected GPS
(DV-G) □GSA/□GSV sentences.

GPS Message Enters a GPS message to be transmit-

ted.

GPS Auto TX OFF, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec, 1min, 3min, Selects a time option for the GPS auto-
5min, 10min or 30min matic transmission function.

16-8
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Call Sign In this item, set and display the call signs used in the DV mode. DESCRIPTIONS
Displays the operating call signs.
UR: CQCQCQ, R1: --------, R2: --------, MY: --------
Sets the operating call signs according to the
type of call you want to make.

RX History This item displays the received call history in the DV mode.
RX01: Displays the calls your transceiver received.

DV Memory This item stores Your Call signs or repeater information to use in the DV mode.

Your Call Sign Blank Stores station call signs.

Adds or edits a call sign.
Repeater List* 01: ~ 30: Stores repeater information.
Adds or edits a repeater information.

* See page 9-47 for details of the preloaded data.

NOTE: The Repeater List described on this manual may differ from your preloaded list.

My Station This item stores your own call sign to use in the DV mode.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

My Call Sign 1: ~ 6: Stores your own call signs.

Select or edit a call sign to use in the DV mode.
TX Message 1: ~ 5: or OFF Stores TX Messages.
Select or edit TX Message to use in the DV
mode.

16-9
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
DV Set In this item, set infrequently changed values or functions in the DV mode.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Tone Control RX Bass Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode received audio bass filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
RX Treble Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode received audio treble filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
RX Bass Boost OFF or ON Turns the DV mode received audio Bass Boost
function ON or OFF
TX Bass Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode transmit audio bass filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.

TX Treble Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode transmit audio treble filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.

Auto Reply OFF, ON, Voice or Position Selects the Automatic Reply function between
ON, OFF, Voice and Position.
DV Data TX PTT or Auto Selects manually or automatically to transmit
low speed data.
DV Fast Data Fast Data OFF or ON Selects whether or not to use the DV Fast Data
for data communication in the DV mode.
GPS Data Speed Slow or Fast Sets the GPS data speed to slow or fast when
the DV data is sent by using DV Fast Data.
TX Delay (PTT) OFF or 1sec~2sec~10sec Sets the TX delay time after releasing [PTT]
when the “DV Data TX” is set to “PTT” and the
DV data is sent by using DV Fast Data.
Digital Monitor Auto, Digital or Analog Selects the DV mode RX monitoring when
[SQL] is held down.
Digital Repeater Set OFF or ON Turns the digital repeater setting function ON
or OFF. This function is usable in any DV mode
except the DR function.
RX Call Sign Write OFF or Auto Turns the RX call sign automatic write function
ON or OFF. This function is usable in any DV
mode except the DR function.
RX Repeater Write OFF or Auto Turns the repeater call sign automatic write
function ON or OFF. This function is usable in
any DV mode except the DR function.
DV Auto Detect OFF or ON Turns the DV mode automatic detect function
ON or OFF.
RX Record (RPT) ALL or Latest Only The transceiver can record the data of up to 50
individual calls.
[RX>CS] Key Call Sign Capture or RX>CS List Selects the [RX>CS] key’s operation when held
down.

BK OFF or ON Turns the BK (Break-in) function ON or OFF.

The BK function allows you to break into a con-
versation between two stations with call sign
squelch enabled.

EMR OFF or ON Turns the EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request)

communication mode ON or OFF.
After turning OFF the transceiver, the EMR
mode will be cancelled.

EMR AF Level 0~19~39 Sets the audio output level when an EMR mode
signal is received.

16-10
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
SPEECH In this item, set the Speech functions.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

RX Call Sign SPEECH OFF, ON (Kerchunk) or ON (All) Selects the RX call sign speech function op-
tion while ON, or turn it OFF.
RX>CS SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the RX>CS Speech function ON or
OFF.

DIAL SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the Dial Speech function ON or OFF.

MODE SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the Operating Mode Speech function

ON or OFF.

SPEECH Language English or Japanese Selects either English or Japanese as the de-
sired speech language.
Alphabet Normal or Phonetic Code Selects the alphabet character announcement
type.

SPEECH Speed Slow or Fast Selects Slow or Fast speech speed

SPEECH Level 0~7~9 Sets the volume level for the voice synthe-
sizer.

DTMF/T-CALL In this item, set the DTMF Memory functions.

DTMF Memory T-CALL, d0:~d9:, dA:~dD:, d*: or d#: Shows a list of the DTMF memory channels.
The DTMF memory can store up to 24-digit
DTMF code.
DTMF Speed 100ms, 200ms, 300ms or 500ms Selects the DTMF transfer speed.

QSO/RX Log In this item, set the QSO/RX History Log options.

QSO Log*1 OFF or ON Selects to make a communication log on the

microSD card, or not.

RX History Log*1 OFF or ON Selects to make a DV mode's receive history

log on the microSD card, or not.
CSV Format

Separator/Decimal Sep [,] Dec [.]*2, Sep [;] Dec [.] or Sep [;] Dec [,] Selects the separator and the decimal charac-
ter for the CSV format.

Date yyyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yyyy*2 or dd/mm/yyyy Selects the date format.

*1 Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
*2 The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

16-11
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Function In this item, set other options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Power Save OFF, Auto (Short), Auto (Middle) or Auto Selects the Power Save options to re-
(Long) duce current drain and conserve bat-
tery power.
Monitor Push or Hold Selects the [SQL] monitor function
method.
Dial Speed-UP OFF or ON Turns the dial speed acceleration ON
or OFF.
Auto Repeater OFF or ON (DUP), ON (DUP,TONE) Turns the Auto Repeater function ON
or OFF.
Remote MIC Key

During RX/Standby [A]:BAND [B]:VFO/MR [J]:UP [K]:DOWN Selects the key function to be used
while receiving or in the standby mode.
During TX [A]:T-CALL [B]:– [J]:– [K]:– Selects the key functions to be used
while transmitting.
Key Lock Normal, No SQL, No VOL or ALL Selects the key lock type when the Key
Lock function is turned ON.
PTT Lock OFF or ON Turns the PTT Lock function ON or OFF.
Busy Lockout OFF or ON Turns the Busy Lockout function ON or
OFF.
Time-Out Timer OFF, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min or Selects the Time-Out Timer time op-
30min tions.

Active Band Single or All Allows continuous frequency selection

across all bands by rotating [DIAL].
MIC Gain (Internal) 1~2~4 Sets the internal microphone sensitiv-
ity to suit your preference.
MIC Gain (External) 1~2~4 Sets the external microphone sensitiv-
ity to suit your preference.
Data Speed 4800bps or 9600bps Selects the data transmission speed for
low-speed communication, or between
the [DATA] jack and external modules
like a GPS receiver, and so on.
VOX VOX OFF or ON Turns the VOX function ON or OFF.
VOX Level 1~5~10 or OFF Sets the VOX gain level.
VOX Delay 0.5sec, 1.0sec, 1.5sec, 2.0sec, 2.5sec or Sets the VOX Delay time.
3.0sec
VOX Time-Out Timer OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 10min Sets the VOX Time-Out Timer to pre-
or 15min vent an accidental prolonged transmis-
sion.
Headset Select HS-95 or Other Selects the headset type to be used for
the VOX function to limit the maximum
audio output level to protect the head-
set speaker.
CI-V CI-V (DATA Jack) OFF, ON (Echo Back OFF) or ON (Echo Back ON) Selects whether or not to use the [DATA]
jack to remotely control the ID-51A/E.
CI-V Address 01~86~DF Sets the transceiver's unique CI-V
hexadecimal address code.
CI-V Baud Rate 300bps, 1200bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, Sets the CI-V code transfer speed.
19200bps or Auto
CI-V Transceive OFF or ON Turns the CI-V Transceive function ON
or OFF.

16-12
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Function (Continued) In this item, set other options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Heterodyne Normal or Reverse Sets the 1st Local Oscillator frequency.

Charging (Power ON) OFF or ON When the external DC power cable
is connected, this function enables
charging the battery even with the
power ON.
Display In this item, set the Display options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Backlight OFF, ON, Auto or Auto (DC IN:ON) Selects the transceiver backlight option.
Backlight Timer 5sec or 10sec Selects the backlight ON time period.
LCD Dimmer Bright or Dark Selects the LCD backlight brightness level.
LCD Contrast 1~8~16 Sets the contrast level of the LCD.
Busy LED OFF or ON Turns the TX/RX indicator ON or OFF.
RX Call Sign OFF, Auto or Auto (RX Hold) Selects the call sign display option when
receiving a call.
RX Message OFF or Auto Selects to display and scroll a received
message when receiving a call, or not.
Reply Position Display OFF or ON Selects to display the caller's position
data when the data is included in the Auto
Reply signal, or not.
DV RX Backlight OFF or ON Turns the DV RX Backlight function ON or
OFF.
TX Call Sign OFF, Your Call Sign or My Call Sign Selects whether or not to display My or
Your call sign while transmitting.
Scroll Speed Slow or Fast Selects the scrolling speed of the mes-
sage, call sign, or other text.
Opening Message OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the
opening message at power ON.
Voltage (Power ON) OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the volt-
age of the battery or external DC power
source at power ON.
Display Unit

Latitude/Longitude ddd ºmm.mm' or ddd ºmm'ss'' Selects position format to display the position.
Altitude/Distance m or ft/ml*1 Selects the units to display the distance
and altitude.
Speed km/h, mph*1 or knots Selects the units to display the speed.
Temperature ºC or ºF*1 Selects the units to display the temperature.
Barometric hPa, mb, mmHg, inHg*1 Selects the units to display the barometric
pressure.
Rainfall mm or inch*1 Selects the units to display the rainfall.
Wind Speed m/s, mph*1, knots Selects the units to display the wind speed.

Display Language English or Japanese Selects the display language in the DR

function or Menu mode. When "English"
is selected in System Language, this set-
ting will disappear.
System Language English or Japanese Selects English or Japanese as the sys-
tem language of the transceiver.

*1 The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

16-13
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Sounds In this item, set the Sound options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Volume Select All, BC Radio Separate or Separate Selects to adjust the audio output level of
all bands together, all separately, or just
the BC Radio separately.
BC Radio Level –5~0~+5 Sets the initial audio output level difference
between the BC Radio and the A and B
bands when “All” is set in “Volume Select.”
Earphone Mode OFF or ON Turns the Earphone mode ON or OFF.
Beep Level 0~3~9 Sets the beep output level.
Beep/Vol Level Link OFF or ON Selects whether or not the beep output level
can be adjusted by the [VOL] control.
Key-Touch Beep OFF or ON Turns the confirmation beep tones when
key is pushed, ON or OFF.
Home CH Beep OFF or ON Turns the Home CH Beep ON or OFF.
Band Edge Beep OFF or ON Turns the Band edge beep ON or OFF.
Scan Stop Beep OFF or ON Turns the scan stop beep ON or OFF.
Standby Beep OFF, ON, ON (to me:High Tone) or Turns the standby beep function in the DV
ON (to me:Alarm/High Tone) mode ON or OFF.
Sub Band Mute OFF, Mute, Beep or Mute & Beep Selects to mute the SUB band audio signal
while receiving on the MAIN band, and/or
sound a beep when a signal disappears
on the SUB band.
Scope AF Output OFF or ON Selects the audio output option during a
sweep.

Time Set In this item, set the Time options.

Date/Time Sets the current date and time.

GPS Time Correct OFF or Auto Sets to automatically correct the time us-
ing a GPS signal.
UTC Offset –14:00~±0:00~+14:00 Enters the time difference between UTC
and the local time.
Auto Power OFF OFF, 30min, 60min, 90min or 120min Turns the Auto power OFF function ON or
OFF.

DV Gateway In this item, enter the Terminal mode or Access Point mode.

<<Terminal Mode>> Enters the Terminal mode.

<<Access Point Mode>> Enters the Access Point mode.

16-14
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
SD Card*1 In this item, set the microSD card options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Load Setting File selection ALL, Except My Station, Loads the settings file to the transceiver.
Repeater List Only

Save Setting <<New File>> Saves the settings as a new file.

File selection Saves the settings in a selected file.

Import/Export Import Your Call Sign, Repeater List, Imports data to the transceiver.
GPS memory
Export Your Call Sign, Repeater List, Exports data from the transceiver.
GPS memory
CSV format

Separator/ Sep [,] Dec [.]*2, Sep [;] Dec [.] Selects the separator and the decimal charac-
Decimal or Sep [;] Dec [,] ter that are used in the CSV format data.

Date yyyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yyyy*2 Selects the date format.

or dd/mm/yyyy

SD Card Info Displays the free space and remaining re-

cording time of the card.
Format Formats the card.
Unmount Electronically unmounts the card.

Others
DESCRIPTIONS

Information Voltage Shows the battery voltage.

Version Shows the transceiver’s firmware version
number.
Clone Clone Mode Reads or writes the CS-51PLUS2 data
from or to the PC, and/or to receive data
from a Master transceiver.
Clone Master Mode Writes your ID-51A/E (Master) data to an-
other ID-51A/E (Sub).
Reset Partial Reset Returns all settings to their defaults, with-
out clearing the memory contents, call
sign memories or Repeater List.
Clears all entries and memories, and re-
All Reset
turn all settings to their defaults.

*1 Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
*2 The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

16-15
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■DUP/TONE items
Offset Freq (Default: 0.600.00*)
DUP/TONE... > Offset Freq

Set the frequency offset for duplex (repeater) operation to between 0 and
59.99500 MHz.

• The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used when setting the offset.
• Push [V/MHz] to select 1 MHz or 10 MHz steps.
• The duplex shift direction (DUP-/DUP+) is set in the QUICK MENU screen.
(p. 15-5)

*The default value may differ, depending on the frequency band (selected
as the Main band before entering the Menu screen) and the transceiver
version.

Repeater Tone (Default: 88.5)

DUP/TONE... > Repeater Tone

Select subaudible tone frequencies, for repeater access and other functions.
50 tone frequencies (67.0~254.1 Hz) are selectable.

TSQL Freq (Default: 88.5)

DUP/TONE... > TSQL Freq

Select the tone frequency for the tone squelch or pocket beep. 50 frequen-
cies (67.0~254.1 Hz) are selectable.

• Selectable repeater tone/tone squelch frequencies (Unit: Hz)

67.0 085.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2 210.7 254.1
69.3 088.5 110.9 141.3 167.9 189.9 218.1
71.9 091.5 114.8 146.2 171.3 192.8 225.7
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3

TIP: The transceiver has 50 tone frequencies and consequently their spac-
ing is narrow compared with units having 38 tones. Therefore, some tone
frequencies may receive interference from adjacent tone frequencies.

16-16
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DUP/TONE items (Continued)

Tone Burst (Default: OFF)

DUP/TONE... > Tone Burst

Turn the Tone Burst function ON or OFF in the FM mode when using tone
squelch.

• OFF: When you transmit a signal that superimposes the CTCSS tone, the
other station may hear a short burst of noise from their receiver, just
after you stop transmitting.
• ON:  When you transmit a signal that superimposes the CTCSS tone, the func-
tion mutes the noise from being heard in the other station’s receiver.

DTCS Code (Default: 023)

DUP/TONE... > DTCS Code

Select a DTCS (both encoder/decoder) code for the DTCS squelch. A total of
104 codes (023~754) are selectable.
• Selectable DTCS codes
023 072 152 244 311 412 466 631
025 073 155 245 315 413 503 632
026 074 156 246 325 423 506 654
031 114 162 251 331 431 516 662
032 115 165 252 332 432 523 664
036 116 172 255 343 445 526 703
043 122 174 261 346 446 532 712
047 125 205 263 351 452 546 723
051 131 212 265 356 454 565 731
053 132 223 266 364 455 606 732
054 134 225 271 365 462 612 734
065 143 226 274 371 464 624 743
071 145 243 306 411 465 627 754

DTCS Polarity (Default: Both N)

DUP/TONE... > DTCS Polarity

Select the DTCS polarity to use for transmitting and receiving.

• Both N: Normal polarity is used for both TX and RX.

• TN-RR: Normal polarity is used for TX; Reverse polarity for RX.
• TR-RN: Reverse polarity is used for TX; Normal polarity for RX.
• Both R: Reverse polarity is used for both TX and RX.

DTCS code’s polarity for transmitting or receiving can be independently set

with this item.

Digital Code (Default: 00)

DUP/TONE... > Digital Code
Select the desired digital code for digital code squelch.
A total of 100 codes (00~99) are selectable.

16-17
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Scan items
Pause Timer (Default: 10sec)
Scan > Pause Timer
Select the scan Pause time. When receiving a signal, the scan pauses for the
scan Pause timer Time.

• 2 to 20sec: When a signal is received, the scan pauses for 2 to 20 seconds

(set in 2 seconds steps).
• HOLD: When receiving a signal, the scan pauses until it disappears.

Resume Timer (Default: 2sec)

Scan > Resume Timer
Select the scan Resume Timer time.
When a received signal disappears, the scan resumes according to the scan
Resume Timer setting.

• 0sec: The scan resumes immediately after the signal disappears.

• 1 to 5sec: The scan resumes 1 to 5 seconds after the signal disappears.
• HOLD: The scan remains paused for the Pause Timer setting, even if
the signal disappears.

NOTE: Rotate [DIAL] to resume the scan.

The Resume Timer must be set shorter than the Pause Timer, otherwise
this timer does not work properly.

Temporary Skip Timer (Default: 5min)

Scan > Temporary Skip Timer
Set the Temporary Skip Timer to 5, 10 or 15 minutes.
When the time is set, the specified frequencies are skipped for this set period
during a scan.

16-18
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Scan items (Continued)

Program Skip (Default: ON)

Scan > Program Skip
Turn the Program Skip Scan function ON or OFF for a VFO mode scan.
This function enables the transceiver to skip the unwanted frequencies or
channels that inconveniently stop scanning.
Set the unwanted frequencies or channels to “PSKIP” in the Memory Chan-
nel screen.

• OFF: The transceiver scans all frequencies without skipping.

• ON: The transceiver does not scan frequencies set as “PSKIP” frequen-
cies.

When the skip setting is ON “PSKIP” appears on the channel number.

Bank Link (Default: A:

✔ ~ Z:
✔)
Scan > Bank Link
Select banks to be scanned during a Bank Link Scan.
The Bank Link function scans all channels in the selected banks.
Select a desired bank, A to Z, and then push D-pad(Ent) to turn the link ON
or OFF.

Set Bank A to OFF.

16-19
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Scan items (Continued)

Program Link (Default: Refer to the diagram below)

Scan > Program Link

This item sets the link function for more than two pair of Program Scan Edge
channels to be sequentially scanned during the Program Link Scan.
The link function scans all frequencies in the scan range.

Default settings of the Program Link

The Program Scan Edge channels “01” and “02” are set in the Program Link
number “0” as the Default.
Program Link 0 01 144.000−148.000
Edit Name 02420.000−450.000

1
Blank

...
9

Program Link number (0 9) Program Scan Edge channel

• The Program Link number screen shows the frequency range. (The scan edge fre-
quency may differ, depending on the transceiver version.)
• A link setting can be added when more than two pairs of Program Scan Edge chan-
nels are entered. (p. 13-2)

Push

Program Link number screen

NOTE: The “Add” item will not be displayed when only one pair of pro-
grammed scan edge channels are entered, or no programmed scan chan-
nel (00 to 24) is left to add to the selected link channel.

Adding a Scan Edge channel to the Program Link

qqP
 ush D-pad() to select a Program Link number between 0 and 9, where you
wish to add a Scan Edge channel, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush [QUICK] .
eeP
 ush D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

rrP
 ush D-pad() to select a programmed scan number you wish to assign
to the selected link channel, and then push D-pad(Ent).
 (For example: 00: 144.000-450.000)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.

16-20
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Scan items (Continued)

Deleting the link channel

qqPush D-pad() to select the programmed scan link number that the chan-
nel you wish to delete is assigned to, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush D-pad() to select programmed scan number you wish to delete.

 (For example: 01: 144.000-450.000)
eePush [QUICK] .
rrPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The channel is deleted.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

Entering a Program scan link name

qqPush D-pad() to select a program scan link number between 0 and 9.
wwPush [QUICK] .

eePush D-pad(Ent) to enter the name edit mode.

rrRotate [DIAL] to select the first character of the name you wish to enter.
 (For example: A)
• The selected digit blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or back-
ward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to
change the character to an upper case or lower case
letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open
the input mode selection window.
• A space can be selected in any input mode.
•R  otate [DIAL] counterclockwise to enter a space. Selected character type
•P  ush [CLR] to delete the selected character,
or hold down [CLR] to continuously delete the
characters, first to the right, and then to the left of the
cursor.
• See page 2-8 for entry details.
ttPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second digit.

yyRepeat steps r and t to enter a name of up to 16 characters, including

spaces. (For example: Area 5 D-Star )

uuAfter entering the name, push D-pad(Ent) to save.

iiPush [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.

16-21
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Voice Memo items

<<REC Start>>
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > <<REC Start>>
Push D-pad() to select “<<REC Start>>,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• “Recording started. ” appears and voice recording starts.
“<<REC Stop>>” item is displayed while recording. To stop recording, push
D-pad(Ent).
TIP:
• Insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
•O nce recording has started, the recording will continue, even the trans-
ceiver is rebooted. To stop the recording, select “<<REC Stop>> ” and then
push D-pad(Ent).

Play Files
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files

Performs the following steps to play back the recorded audio on the microSD card.
Push D-pad(Ent), and folders on the microSD card are displayed.
• These folders contain the stored files.

TIP: Insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
Playing back
qqPush D-pad() to select the folder that includes the desired file to play
back, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush D-pad() to select the file to play back, and then push D-pad(Ent).

• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and the selected file is played back.
• See “Operations while playing back” for forwarding or rewinding. (p. 11-5)
eePush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the playback.
• Return to the file list screen.

16-22
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

NOTE:
•T  he folder name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Recording date: 2016/10/1
Folder name: 20161001
• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Recording date: 2016/10/1 15:30:00
File name: 20161001_153000
• The voice audio is recorded onto a microSD card, and saved in the “wav”
format.
The recorded voice audio can also be played back with a PC.
The extension, “wav,” is not displayed on the transceiver’s screen.

REC Mode (Default: TX&RX)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > REC Mode

Records both the transmitted and received audio as the default setting.
• TX&RX: Records both the transmitted and received voice audio.
• RX Only: Records only the received voice audio.

When transmitted while recording

When “OFF” is selected in File Split, the recording is paused. After finishing
the transmission, the recording resumes.
When “ON” is selected in File Split, a new file is automatically created, and
the transmitted voice audio is recorded into the new one.

RX REC Condition (Default: Squelch Auto)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > RX REC Condition

Select whether or not the squelch status affects the RX voice audio record-
ing.
• Always: The transceiver always records the RX voice audio regard-
less of the squelch status.
• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records the RX voice audio only when a sig-
nal is received (the squelch is opened).
When the squelch closes while recording, the recording will
continue for 2 seconds, and then pause.

TIP: When “ON” is selected in File Split, and if the squelch either opens or
closes while recording, a new file is automatically created.

16-23
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

File Split (Default: ON)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > File Split
Turn the File Split function ON or OFF.
• OFF: When the recording starts, a new file is automatically created in the
folder of the microSD card. The voice audio is continuously recorded
into the file, even if transmission and reception, or the squelch status
(open and close) is switched.
If the file size exceeds 2 GB, a new file is automatically created in the
same folder, and the voice audio is recorded there.
• ON: When the recording starts, a new file is automatically created in the
folder of the microSD card. During recording, and if transmission and
reception, or squelch status (open and close) is switched, a new file
is automatically created in the same folder, and the voice audio is
saved into the new one.

PTT Auto REC (Default: ON)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > PTT Auto REC
Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or OFF.
The transmission from the external speaker microphone, VOX function and
CI-V command also starts recording.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: The recording automatically starts when [PTT] is pushed.
The recording will stop when:
• No signal is transmitted for 10 seconds after releasing [PTT].
• No signal is received for 10 seconds after releasing [PTT].
• Frequency or operating mode is changed after releasing [PTT].

Skip Time (Default: 10sec)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Player Set > Skip Time
Select the Skip Timer to 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds to rewind or skip forward for
this set period when you push the fast-rewind or fast-forward key while play-
ing the recorded voice audio.
• See “operations while playing back” for forwarding or rewinding operation. (p. 11-5)

Record
Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Record
The microphone audio can be recorded onto a microSD card, and saved in
the “wav” format.
While recording a QSO voice audio, this function is disabled.
The QSO voice audio (p. 11-2) and BC radio audio cannot be recorded.

TIP: Insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

16-24
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

Record (Continued)
qqPush [PTT] to start recording.
• “Recording” appears and the microphone audio recording starts.

wwPush [PTT] again to stop.

Play Files
Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play Files
➥➥Push D-pad(Ent), and folders on the microSD card are displayed.
• These folders contain the stored files.

TIP: Insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
Do the following steps to play back the recorded audio onto the microSD
card.
Playing back
qqPush D-pad() to select the folder that includes the desired file to play
back, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush D-pad() to select the file to play back, and then push D-pad(Ent).

• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and the selected file is played back.
• See “Operations while playing back” for forwarding or rewinding. (p. 11-5)
eePush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the playback.
• Return to the file list screen.

16-25
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

MIC Gain (Default: 3)

Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Recorder Set > MIC Gain
Set the internal microphone sensitivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity)
and 4 (maximum sensitivity), to suit your needs.
Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to your voice.

Skip Time (Default: 10sec)

Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Player Set > Skip Time
Set the Skip Time to 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds to rewind or skip forward for this
set period when you push the fast-rewind or fast-forward key while playing
the recorded voice audio.
• See “Operations while playing back” for forwarding or rewinding operation. (p. 11-5)

16-26
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

DV Auto Reply
Voice Memo > DV Auto Reply
Up to 10 seconds of audio can be recorded for the automatic reply function
(p. 9-11).

TIP: Insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
qqWhile pushing and holding [PTT], speak into the microphone at your nor-
mal voice level.
• DO NOT hold the transceiver too close to your mouth or speak too loudly. This
may distort your speech.

wwThe recording stops after 10 second or when [PTT] is released.

NOTE: The time display is different, as shown below.

No audio was recorded (No au- While recording (Recording

dio file is saved.) time/Recordable time)

Recorded time While playing back (Playback

(Recording stopped) time/Recorded time)

16-27
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Voice TX items
Record
Voice TX > Record
Up to 1 minute of audio can be recorded onto a microSD card for voice trans-
mission. (p. 17-3)
While recording a QSO voice audio, this function is disabled.

TIP: Insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

qqWhile holding down [PTT], speak at your normal voice level.

• DO NOT hold the transceiver too close to your mouth or speak too loudly. This
may distort your speech.

wwThe recording stops after 10 seconds or when [PTT] is released.

NOTE: The time display is different, as shown below.

No audio was recorded (No au- While recording (Recording

dio file is saved.) time/Recordable time)

Recorded time While playing back (Playback

(Recording stopped) time/Recorded time)

16-28
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Voice TX items (Continued)

Repeat Time (Default: 5sec)

Voice TX > TX Set > Repeat Time
Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 15 seconds (in 1 second steps).
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded voice audio at this inter-
val.

NOTE: The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted for up to 10

minutes. Even if 10 minutes passes while transmitting, the complete voice
audio is transmitted.

TX Monitor (Default: ON)

Voice TX > TX Set > TX Monitor
Turn the TX Monitor function ON or OFF.

• OFF: The TX voice audio is not heard from the speaker.

• ON: The TX voice audio is heard from the speaker.

<<Single TX>>
Voice TX > TX Set > <<Single TX>>
The transceiver transmits the recorded voice audio once.
• To cancel the voice transmission, push [CLR] .

TIP: You can transmit the recorded voice audio also from the QUICK MENU
screen. (p. 17-3)

<<Repeat TX>>
Voice TX > TX Set > <<Repeat TX>>
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded voice audio for up to 10
minutes at the specified interval in the Repeat Time item.
• To cancel the voice transmission, push [CLR] .

TIP: You can transmit the recorded voice audio also from the QUICK MENU
screen. (p. 17-3)

NOTE:
• The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted for up to 10 minutes.
Even if 10 minutes passes while transmitting, the complete voice audio is
transmitted.
• One of the following steps will cancel the transmission.
- Push [PTT].
- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.
- Push any key (except for [POWER]).
- Rotate [DIAL].

16-29
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Broadcast (BC) Radio items

BC Radio Memory
BC Radio > BC Radio Memory
A total of 26 banks are selectable for BC Radio Memory.
You can assign up to 50 BC Radio memory channels (combined FM and AM)
to each bank, for easy memory management. (A maximum of 500 memories
can be assigned to the BC Radio Memory.)

The display of the BC Radio memory

A to Z : Bank Name Shows the banks in the BC Radio memory.
➥ FM BC Radio memories for FM.
➥ AM BC Radio memories for AM.
In the BC radio bank list, push [QUICK] to edit the selected bank name.
(p. 6-9)

BC Radio memory channels

The name of a BC Radio memory channel
NAME Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for each
BC Radio memory channel.
BANK The bank letter and the name of the bank
Entered frequency
For FM: Between 76.0* and 108.0 MHz
FREQUENCY For AM: Between 520 and 1710 kHz
*The frequency range you can enter differs, depending on
the transceiver's version.
Shows the skip status. The Skip channel does not appear
SKIP
in the BC Radio memory.

Auto Mute (Default: 2sec)

BC Radio > BC Radio Set > Auto Mute
Set the Auto Mute timer to between 0 and 10 seconds (in 1 second steps),
or OFF.

• OFF: Even if the transceiver receives a signal on the A band or B

band while listening to the BC Radio, the BC Radio audio is not
muted.
When the transceiver transmits on the A band or B band while
listening to the BC Radio, the BC Radio audio is muted.
• 0 to 10sec: When the transceiver transmits or receives on the A band or
B band while listening to the BC Radio, the BC Radio audio is
automatically muted. After transmitting or receiving, the Auto
Mute timer starts. After the timer period ends, you can listen to
the BC Radio.
16-30
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ BC Radio items (Continued)

FM Antenna (Default: External)

BC Radio > BC Radio Set > FM Antenna
Select the desired antenna for FM radio.

• External: The connected antenna is used.

• Earphone: The earphone cable antenna is used.

Power Save (BC Radio) (Default: ON)

BC Radio > BC Radio Set > Power Save (BC Radio)
Set the power save function to reduce current drain and conserve battery
power when no radio signal is received.

• OFF: The power save function is OFF.

• ON: When the BC Radio is ON, and when no signal is received for 5 sec-
onds, this function is activated in a 1:3 ratio (300 milliseconds: 900
milliseconds) during FM mode, or 1:1 ratio (2000 milliseconds: 2000
milliseconds) during AM mode.

NOTE: This function is disabled when the external power source is used.

<<BC Radio ON>>

BC Radio > <<BC Radio ON>>
Turn ON the BC Radio.
When the transceiver receives 2 amateur bands on the MAIN band and SUB
band, you can still listen to the Broadcast (BC) Radio.
When the BC Radio is ON, <<BC Radio OFF>> appears on the BC RADIO
screen. To turn OFF the BC Radio, select <<BC Radio OFF>>.
• In the QUICK MENU screen, selecting <<BC Radio OFF>> also turns OFF the BC
Radio.

<<BC Radio Mode>>

BC Radio > <<BC Radio Mode>>
The transceiver switches into an exclusive BC Radio mode where only the
BC Radio functions.
While in the BC Radio Mode, <<Normal Mode>> appears on the BC RADIO
screen. To exit from the BC Radio mode, select <<Normal Mode>>.
• In the QUICK MENU screen, selecting <<Normal Mode>> also exits from the BC
Radio mode.

16-31
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■GPS items
GPS Select (Default: Internal GPS)
GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select
Select either an internal or external GPS receiver that the transceiver re-
ceives its position data from.
• OFF: A GPS receiver is not used.
• Internal GPS: Position data from the internal GPS data is used for the
GPS functions.
• External GPS: Position data from the external GPS data is used for the
GPS functions.
• Manual : Manually enter the current Latitude, Longitude and Altitude
in Manual Position.

TIP: The data communication is disabled when “External GPS” is selected.

(p. 9-14)

Power Save (Internal GPS) (Default: Auto)

GPS > GPS Set > Power Save (Internal GPS)
Select whether or not to use the internal GPS receiver power save function.
The power save function turns OFF power to the GPS receiver to conserve
battery power.
When this function is ON, and if the GPS receiver does not receive signals
from a satellite for 5 minutes, the power save function will turn OFF the GPS
receiver for this set period of time.

• OFF: The receiver is continuously ON.

• 1, 2, 4, 8min: When the receiver cannot receive signals from a satellite for
5 minutes, the GPS receiver power is turned OFF for the
selected periods (1, 2, 4 or 8 minutes). After this period, the
receiver resumes receiving.
• Auto: When the receiver cannot receive signals from a satellite for
5 minutes, the GPS receiver power is turned OFF for 1 min-
ute. After this period, the receiver resumes receiving.
The power save interval time extends to 2, 4 and then 8
minutes when receiving no signals for another 5 minutes,
respectively.
Once the GPS receiver receives initial position data, the
power save interval is set back to 1 minute, if it receives no
signals for 5 minutes.

Manual Position (Default: LATITUDE : 0°00’00”N LONGITUDE :

0°00’00”E ALTITUDE : ------ft)
GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position
Manually enter the latitude, longitude and Altitude of your current position.

TIP: The received position data can be captured by selecting “Capture From
GPS” when position data is received from either the internal or an external GPS.
(p. 10-2)

16-32
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Indicator (Default: ON)

GPS > GPS Set > GPS Indicator
Select whether or not to display the GPS icon( ).
• OFF: The GPS icon is not displayed.
• ON: The GPS icon appears* when valid position data is received, and
blinks when no position data is received.
Selected GPS Connected/ Connected/
Not connected
receiver Searching Received
Internal GPS – Blinks Appears
External GPS Not displayed Blinks Appears
*No icon appears when “Manual” is selected in the GPS select item.

GPS Out (To DATA Jack) (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Set > GPS Out (To DATA)
Select whether or not GPS information from either the internal or external
GPS receiver is output at the [DATA] jack.

TIP: No data is output when “OFF” or “Manual” is selected in the GPS Se-
lect item.
Select “OFF” when you want to operate the data communication. (p. 9-14)

16-33
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Information
GPS > GPS Information
Displays the GPS satellite direction, altitude, satellite number and receiving
status.

Example: tracking 5 satellites

 Non tracking satellites

Regular characters
Tracking satellites (weak signal)
(Example: 01)
Reversed characters
Tracking satellites (strong signal)
(Example: 01 )
SAT Number of tracking satellite (between 0 and 12)
------ft (Non-positioning / 2D (Tracking three satellite) /
Altitude
Positioning results (4 or more satellite tracking)
Latitude --°--.--'-(Non-positioning)/Positioning results
Longitude ---°--.--'-(Non-positioning)/Positioning results

GPS Position
GPS > GPS Position
Your current position, received position or GPS memory alarm position infor-
mation is displayed. (p. 10-3)
Push D-pad() to select the screen to see the “MY,” “RX,” “MEM” and “ALM”
screens.

NOTE: The default settings shown on the next page are for the USA ver-
[MY] screen sion. The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

16-34
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Position (Continued)

[MY] screen (MY Position)
Compass* Your direction
Latitude Your latitude
Longitude Your longitude
Shows the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude of
GL
your position.
ALT Your own altitude
SPEED Your speed over ground
TIME Current time received from the GPS
COURSE Your direction heading
When “Manual” is selected in the GPS Select item, the screen shows only latitude,
longitude, altitude, GL (Grid locator), and time (internal clock).

[RX] screen (Received position of the other station)

Depending on the caller’s TX mode or TX format, the displayed items and
these meanings differ.
The following lists describe the items in each category.
Nothing is displayed when no position data is received on your transceiver.

1. When the caller’s TX mode is NMEA

Compass* Displays the caller’s direction from your position.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the caller’s latitude and
GL
longitude.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
DST Displays the caller’s distance from your position
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign
COURSE Displays the caller’s direction over ground
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed
GPS Time Stamp Displays the time that the caller acquired the position data.

2. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position (Mobile station)

Compass* Displays the caller’s direction from your position
Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the caller’s latitude and
GL
longitude.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
DST Displays the caller’s distance from your position
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
COURSE Displays the caller’s direction over ground
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed
GPS Time Stamp Displays the time that the caller acquired the position data.

*These items can be selected in the Quick Menu screen.

16-35
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Position (Continued)

3. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position (Base station)
Compass* Displays the caller’s direction from your position
Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the caller’s latitude and
GL
longitude.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
DST Displays the caller’s distance from your position
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
POWER Displays the caller’s TX power level
HEIGHT Displays the height of caller’s antenna
GAIN Displays the gain of caller’s antenna
DIRECT Displays the direction of caller’s antenna was pointing
GPS Time Stamp Displays the time that the caller acquired the position data.

4. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Object/Item

Compass* Displays the Object/Item station’s direction from your position
Symbol Displays the Object/Item station’s D-PRS symbol
Latitude Displays the Object/Item station’s latitude
Longitude Displays the Object/Item station’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the Object/Item station’s
GL
latitude and longitude.
ALT Displays the Object/Item station’s altitude
DST Displays the Object/Item station’s distance from your position
Object/Item name Displays the Object/Item station’s name
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
COURSE Displays the Object/Item station’s direction over ground
SPEED Displays the Object/Item station’s speed
POWER Displays the Object/Item station’s TX power level
HEIGHT Displays the height of Object/Item station’s antenna
GAIN Displays the gain of Object/Item station’s antenna
Displays the direction that the Object/Item station’s antenna was
DIRECT
pointing
GPS Time Stamp Displays the time that the caller sent the Object station’s data.

When the object or item station is disabled, “KILLED” appears.

*These items can be selected in the Quick Menu screen.

16-36
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Position (Continued)

5. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Weather
Compass* Displays the caller’s direction from your position
Symbol Displays the caller station’s D-PRS symbol
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the caller’s latitude and
GL
longitude
DST Displays the caller’s distance from your position
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
Temperature Displays the temperature at the caller station’s area
Humidity Displays the humidity at the caller station’s area
RAIN Displays the rainfall at the caller station’s area
WIND DIR Displays the wind direction at the caller station’s area
WIND SPD Displays the wind speed at the caller station’s area
BARO Displays the barometric pressure at the caller station’s area
GPS Time Stamp Displays the time that the caller acquired the weather data.

[MEM] screen (GPS memory alarm position)

Displays GPS Memory channel’s direction from your posi-
Compass*
tion
Latitude Displays GPS Memory channel’s latitude
Longitude Displays GPS Memory channel’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude
GL
of GPS Memory channel’s.
DST Displays GPS Memory channel’s distance from your position
GPS memory name* Displays the selected GPS memory name

[ALM] screen (GPS alarm position)

Compass* Displays GPS Alarm area’s direction from your position
Latitude Displays GPS Alarm area’s latitude
Longitude Displays GPS Alarm area’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude
GL
of GPS Alarm area’s.
DST Displays GPS Alarm area’s distance from your position
Displays “RX,” GPS memory group name or GPS memory
GPS Alarm*
name specified for the GPS alarm function.

*These items can be selected in the Quick Menu screen.

16-37
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Memory
GPS > GPS Memory
The transceiver has 200 GPS memory channels to store the received posi-
tion data, or often-used position data, along with an alphanumeric channel
name.

The channels can be divided into the “(No Group)” group and each memory
group for easy memory management.

The display of the GPS memory

(No Group) GPS memories not assigned to any group.

A to Z : Group Name GPS memories assigned to the selected group.

GPS memory groups (A-Z)

The name of a GPS memory group
GROUP NAME Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for each
GPS group.

The GPS memory group name can be edited in the QUICK MENU screen.

(p. 10-18)

GPS memory channels

The name of a GPS memory channel
NAME Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for each
GPS memory channel.
DATE Stored date
TIME Stored time
LATITUDE Stored location (latitude)
LONGITUDE Stored location (longitude)
ALTITUDE Stored altitude
GROUP The group letter and the name of the group

TIP: When the received position data is stored using the “GPS Positon” screen, the
received station’s call sign is used as using the GPS memory name.
GPS memory contents, such as GPS memory name, can be edited in the QUICK
MENU screen. (pp. 10-13 to 10-17)

16-38
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Alarm Select (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Alarm> Alarm Select
Select the target position(s) for the GPS alarm function.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• RX: The last position data received from a station is stored in a tem-
porary memory, and is used for the GPS alarm function.
When the target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds.
The active alarm range is specified in Alarm Area (RX/Memory).
(p. 16-40)
• Group: All memories in the GPS memory, or in the selected GPS memory
group, are used for the GPS alarm function.
When the target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds.
The active alarm range is specified in Alarm Area (Group).
• Memory: Only one memory in the GPS memory is used for the GPS alarm
function.
When the target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds.
When “Group” is selected The active alarm range is specified in Alarm Area (RX/Memory).
(p. 16-40)

Alarm Area (Group) (Default: 0.25')

GPS > GPS Alarm> Alarm Area (Group)
When the Alarm Select is set to “Group” or one of the memory groups, set
the GPS alarm active range.
When a target enters in the specified active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds and the GPS alarm icon blinks.
The values you can enter depend on the setting in Latitude/Longitude.
(MENU > Display > Display Unit > Latitude/Longitude)

• Latitude/Longitude = dddmm.mm' 00.08' to 59.99' (0.01' steps)

• Latitude/Longitude = dddmm'ss'' 00'05'' to 59'59'' (0’01" steps)

Example:
When a target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm sounds.

Point A N
0.25’ 0.25’
0.25’

Your
position
0.25’

Point B

Point C
(Beeps three times)

16-39
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Default: Both)

GPS > GPS Alarm> Alarm Area (RX/Memory)
Select the GPS active alarm range.
When the Alarm Select is set to “RX” or “Memory,” set the GPS alarm active
range to “Both,” “Extended” or “Limited”.
When a target position enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds and the GPS alarm icon blinks.

• Limited: The transceiver sounds 3 beeps and the GPS alarm icon blinks
when the target enters the 500 meter range.
• Extended: The transceiver sounds 3 beeps and the GPS alarm icon blinks
when the target enters the 1 kilometer range.
• Both: The transceiver sounds a beep and the GPS alarm icon blinks
when the target enters the 1 kilometer range, and sounds 3
beeps and the icon blinks when it enters the 500 meter range.
When the target exits the 500 meter range, but is still in the 1 ki-
lometer range, the icon continues to blink, but no beeps sound.

Example:
When a target enters in the active alarm range (500 meter or 1 kilometer
range, depending on the setting), the GPS alarm sounds.

Extended range
(Approximately 1 km/1094 Y)
Your
position

Limited range
(Approximately 500 m/547 Y)

Beeps one times Beeps three times

16-40
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Logger (Default: ON)

GPS > GPS Logger > GPS Logger
Turn the GPS Logger function ON or OFF.
This function logs the position, altitude, course, speed and number of satel-
lites being used.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: The transceiver automatically logs GPS data.
Once this function is turned ON, the GPS data will be continuously
logged until turning it OFF, even if the transceiver power is turned
OFF, then ON again.

To use this function:

1. You must first insert a microSD card into the transceiver.
2. You must select either Internal GPS or External GPS in GPS select.

NOTE:
The log data will be saved on the microSD card.
The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Log start date and time: 2016/10/1 15:30:00
File name: 20161001_153000.log
You can select the GPS record sentence for the GPS Logger function.

Record Interval (Default: 5sec)

GPS > GPS Logger > Record Interval
Select the GPS Logger function record interval of 1, 5, 10, 30 or 60 seconds.

Record Sentence (Default: □

✔RMC/□
✔GGA/□ ✔VTG)
✔GLL/□
GPS > GPS Logger > Record Sentence
Set the GPS Logger function record sentence to RMC, GGA, GLL, or VTG.

NOTE: Select at least one sentence, otherwise an error beep will sound.

16-41
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

<<GPS Logger Only>>

GPS > GPS Logger > <<GPS Logger Only>>
The transceiver switches into an exclusive GPS logger mode where only the
logger is functioning.

TIP:
• Select “Internal GPS” or “External GPS” in GPS Select screen and insert
a microSD card.
• During the exclusive GPS logger mode, the transceiver's transmission
and reception are disabled.
To cancel the exclusive GPS logger mode, reboot the transceiver.

qqPush D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush D-pad()) to select “YES,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

• When the GPS logger function is set to “ON,” the GPS logger mode is started im-
mediately after pushing D-pad(Ent).

16-42
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS TX Mode (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode
Select a GPS transmission mode to send position data received from a GPS
receiver while in the DV mode.
• OFF: Position data is not transmitted.
• D-PRS (DV-A): Transmits position data in the format corresponding to D-
PRS. (the TX GPS mode is “DV-A”)
In the D-PRS (DV-A) mode, the normal D-PRS codes are
transmitted to the PC connected to the transceiver.
D-PRS code is based on APRS® code. (APRS® : Automatic
Packet Reporting System)
• NMEA (DV-G): Transmits position data in NMEA format. (the TX GPS mode
is “DV-G”)

Unproto Address (Default: API51,DSTAR*)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > Unproto Address
Enter an unproto address of up to 56 alphanumeric characters.

Unproto address edit screen

This Unproto Address item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is
selected in “GPS TX Mode.”

16-43
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Symbol (Default: Person)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > Symbol
The symbol is an icon which represents your means of transportation or
location. The stored symbol in the selected symbol memory (1 to 4) is trans-
mitted with position data while in the D-PRS (DV-A) mode.
To change the symbol icon, push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to set.
This symbol item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected in
“GPS TX Mode.”

Symbol memory
A symbol can be set to symbol memory 1 to 4.
You can select a desired symbol different than the set one or other symbol by
entering a 2 character symbol code.

Selecting a symbol with a 2 character symbol code

qqP
 ush D-pad() to select a desired symbol memory between 1 and 4.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush [QUICK] to select “Edit Symbol,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eePush [QUICK] again.
rrP ush D-pad() to select “Direct Input,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
ttRotate [DIAL] to select the first digit.
• Usable characters: /, \, 0 to 9, A to Z
yyPush to select the second digit.

Second digit is selected

uuRotate [DIAL] to select the second digit, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Usable characters: Alphanumeric characters and symbols
iiPush D-pad(Ent) to set the symbol into the memory selected in step q.
• Returns to the SYMBOL screen.

ooPushing D-pad(Ent) again to set the symbol memory, selected in step q,

which is used for D-PRS (DV-A) operation.

16-44
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Selecting a symbol
qqPush D-pad() to select a desired symbol memory between 1 and 4.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush to select “Edit Symbol,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eeP ush D-pad() to select a desired symbol.

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to set the symbol into the memory selected in step q.
• Returns to the SYMBOL screen.
ttPushing D-pad(Ent) again to set the symbol memory, selected in step q,
which is used for D-PRS (DV-A) operation.

Symbol list Selecting “1: Campground”

Sheriff Recreational Vehicle Truck Radio

Digipeater Shuttle Node Icom Radio

Gateway SSTV Rover Aircraft

Small Aircraft Bus Repeater Overlayed WX Station

Red Cross ATV Ship(powerboat) Overlayed Diamond

House QTH (VHF) WX Service Truck(18-wheeler) RACES

X Helicopter Van Gale Flags

Red dot Yacht Yagi @ QTH Ham Store

Fire Person Overlayed Digipeater Work Zone

Campground DF station Overlayed Gateway Speedpost (Value Signpost)

Motorcycle Large Aircraft House (HF) Triangle

Railroad Engine WX Station Big Question Mark Small Circle

Car Dish Antenna Circle Overlayed Ship

Canoe Ambulance Park/Picnic Area Tornado

Eyeball Bicycle Overlayed Car Overlayed Truck

School Fire Truck Lighthouse Overlayed Van

PC User Glider Satellite Wreck

Balloon Hospital Sunny

Police Jeep Overlayed WX Service

16-45
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

SSID (Default: ---)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > SSID
Select an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call sign, to show your op-
erating style to other stations.
The addition methods of the SSID may differ, depending on whether the call sign
includes a space or not.

• ---:
The space in the call sign is converted to “-.”
Text after the space will be used as the SSID.
But if no text is entered after the space, the space will be deleted,
and no SSID is added.
Example: “JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA”
(no SSID is added)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA-A”
(“A” is changed to “-A”, and it is used as the SSID)

• (-0): No SSID is added.

If a call sign includes a space, any text or digit after the space will
be deleted.
Example: “JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA”
(no SSID is added)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA”
(no SSID is added)

• -1 to -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to the call sign.

Even if a call sign includes a space and text, it will be automati-
cally changed to this set numeric ID.
Example(SSID [-9]):
“JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA-9”
(“-9” is added, and used as the SSID)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA-9”
(“A” is changed to “-9”, and it is used as the SSID)

• -A to -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.

Even if a call sign includes a space and a text, it will be automati-
cally changed to this set letter ID.
Example(SSID [-Z]):
“JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA-Z”
(“-Z” is added, and used as the SSID)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA-Z”
(“A” is changed to “-Z”, and it is used as the SSID)

 his SSID item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected in
T
“GPS TX Mode.”

About SSID
To assist in identifying a station’s type, designated call sign SSIDs are used
in D-PRS (APRS®), according to the common guideline.
The guideline may be changed when the infrastructure environment, such
as a product or network, is changed.
Please check the latest guideline in the web site related on the D-PRS or
APRS®, and correctly set.
16-46
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Comment
GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > Comment
Enter a comment of up to 43 characters to transmit with the position data.

Comment edit screen

(In case of up to 43 characters)
The number of characters to enter will differ, depending on the Data Extension
and Altitude settings. (p. 16-48)

Data Extension Altitude The number of characters

OFF OFF Up to 43 characters (Default)
OFF ON Up to 35 characters
Course/Speed OFF Up to 36 characters
Course/Speed ON Up to 28 characters
The symbol “ ” shows the transmittable comment range. Please note that the
characters that exceed the range from the symbol will not be transmitted.

Transmittable comment range display

(In case of up to 36 characters)

This comment item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected
in “GPS TX Mode.”

16-47
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Time Stamp (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > Time Stamp
Sets the transmitting time stamp type to DHM, HMS or OFF. The time stamp
is transmitted with the position data in the D-PRS (DV-A) mode, and UTC
(Universal Time Coordinated) time is used.

• OFF: No time stamp is transmitted.

• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour, and Minute format.
• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Minute, and Second format.

When your position is set manually, the time stamp data will not be transmit-
ted, even if “DHM” or “HMS” is selected.
This Time Stamp item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is se-
lected in “GPS TX Mode.”

Altitude (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > Altitude
Select whether or not to transmit altitude data, in addition to position data.

• OFF: No altitude data is transmitted.

• ON: Transmits altitude data in addition to position data.

This Altitude item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected
in “GPS TX Mode.”

NOTE: When “ON” is selected, and Data Extension option is set to “OFF,”
the number of Comment characters is limited to 35.
When “ON” is selected, and Data Extension option is set to “Course/Speed,”
the number of Comment characters is limited to 28.

Data Extension (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS (DV-A) > Data Extension
Select whether or not to transmit the course and speed data in addition to
the position data.

• OFF: Transmits only the position data.

• Course/Speed: Transmits the course and speed data in addition to the po-
sition data.

The course and speed data will not be transmitted even if “Course/Speed” is
selected, when your position is set manually.
This Data Extension item will be hidden when “NMEA (DV-G)” or “OFF” is
selected in “GPS TX Mode.”

NOTE: When “Course/Speed” is selected, the number of Comment charac-

ters is limited to 36.
When “Course/Speed” is selected, and Altitude option is set to “ON,” the
number of Comment characters is limited to 28.

16-48
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Sentence (Default: □RMC/□

✔GGA/□GLL/□VTG/□GSA/□GSV)
GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA(DV-G) > GPS Sentence
Select sentences to be transmitted in the GPS mode to transmit position
data.
• Select up to 4 of the 6 GPS sentences to transmit at the same time. RMC, GGA,
GLL, VTG, GSA and GSV sentences are selectable.
Even if the GPS Auto TX Timer is set to “5 sec.,” when 4 sentences are selected in
this setting, the time the GPS Auto TX Timer will automatically be changed to “10
sec.”
• “VTG," “GSA” and “GSV” sentences will not be transmitted when your position has
been set manually.
This GPS Sentence item will be hidden when “D-PRS(DV-A)” or “OFF” is selected
in “GPS TX Mode."

• Contents of GPS sentence

The Time Stamp is shown based on the UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
GPS Time
Date COG SOG
Sentence Lat/Lon Alt Stamp Status 2D/3D
(UTC) (True) (knot)
(UTC)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔
VTG ✔ ✔
GSA ✔ ✔
GSV

Sentence Others

RMC Mode Indicator

Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation, Age of
GGA
Differential GPS data
GLL Mode Indicator
VTG COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA ID numbers of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence number, Total number of sat-
GSV
ellites in view, Satellite information (ID, Altitude, Azimuth, S/N)

NOTE:
Set the GSV sentence to OFF when sending the GPS message to con-
ventional digital transceivers (IC-2820H, IC-E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD, IC-
E91, IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H, ID-1).
The GSV sentence is incompatible with them. Those transceivers will not
display GPS messages properly if sent as a GSV sentence from the ID-
51A/E.

16-49
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Message
GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA (DV-G) > GPS Message
Enter a GPS message of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. (p. 10-32)

GPS Message edit screen

This GPS Message item will be hidden when “D-PRS (DV-A)” or “OFF” is
selected in “GPS TX Mode.”

NOTE: When no message transmission is desired, delete the entered mes-

sage in the QUICK MENU screen.

GPS Auto TX (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Auto TX
Select an option for the GPS automatic transmission function.
This function automatically transmits the current position data received from
a GPS receiver, as well as any entered GPS message, at the selected inter-
val.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF. However, you can transmit the po-
sition data manually by pushing [PTT].
• 5 sec to 30 min: Transmits the current position data at the selected interval
(5*, 10, or 30 seconds, or 1, 3, 5, 10, or 30 minutes).
*When four GPS sentences are selected at the same time
in GPS Sentence Mode, “5sec” cannot be selected.

NOTE: When “Manual” is selected in GPS Select, the current position data
will not be automatically transmitted.

16-50
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Call sign items

Call Sign
Call Sign
Sets or displays the “UR,” “R1,” “R2” and “MY” call signs to be used for DV
operation.
Except for the DR function, sets the desired call signs to be used for DV op-
eration in this screen.

For Simplex operation (DV mode)

“UR” (p. 16-52) and “MY” call signs can be set.

For Duplex (repeater) operation (DV mode/DR function)

While in the DR function, only the “MY” call sign can be set.

<To set Duplex (repeater) operation>

Example : While in the DV mode, Making a Gateway call
Making a gateway CQ call to Hamacho repeater (JP1YIU B) from
the Hirano repeater (JP3YHH B)*, while in the DV mode.
*Before starting to set the call sign, set the frequency of your access repeater or du-
plex direction. (See pages 5-8 and 15-5.)

NOTE: When the Digital Repeater Setting function is ON, the repeater call
sign can be automatically set. (p. 16-63)

1. Call sign (“R1”) setting

qqWhile in the DV mode, push D-pad() to select “R1,” and then push
[QUICK] .
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eeRotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
• Letters, numbers, characters, and symbol (“/”) can be entered.
rrPush to move the cursor backward, or push to move the cursor
forward.
ttRepeat steps e and r to enter a name of up to 8 characters, including
spaces.
yyAfter entering, push D-pad(Ent) to set.

☞☞Continued on the next page

16-51
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Call sign items (Continued)

2. Gateway (“R2”) setting

qqPush D-pad() to select “R2,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwPush D-pad() to select “GW,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

• When you manually enter the call sign, push in step q.

About the RPT2 SELECT screen

NOT USED* For local area call
GW To select the gateway call sign from the Repeater List.
To select the repeater that has the same gateway as the “R1”
Repeater name
repeater.

3. Destination (“UR”) setting

qqPush D-pad() to select “UR,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwPush D-pad() to select “Gateway CQ,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eePush D-pad() to select “11:Japan”(repeater group where your destina-
tion repeater is listed), and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Hamacho430,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• When you manually enter the call sign, push in step q.

About the YOUR SELECT screen

CQCQCQ To select “CQCQCQ” to make a non-call sign specific call.
Gateway CQ† To select “Gateway CQ” using the Repeater List.
To select the destination (“UR”) call sign using the Your Call Sign
Your Call Sign
memory.
RX History To select the destination (“UR”) call sign using the RX History.
TX History To select the destination (“UR”) call sign using the TX History.
†Not displayed in the Simplex mode.
16-52
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■RX History items

RX History
RX History
When a call is received in the DV mode, call information such as the caller sta-
tion call sign, used repeater call sign, and so on, are stored in this screen.
Up to 50 records can be stored.
• Even if the transceiver power is turned OFF, the stored records are not
deleted.

You can confirm the RX record contents with D-pad(Ent).

Appears when the Gate-
way call is received.
Appears when the po-
sition data is included.

RX History number “(UP)” appears when the

(01 to 50) uplink signal is received.
Caller station (upper)
Called station (lower)
Message included in
the received call
Repeater call sign
When you receive a
Received date
simplex call, this item
shows the frequency.

Contents of the RX History Top screen

RX01~RX50 RX history number
Displays the call sign of the caller station and any note entered
CALLER*1
after the call sign.
CALLED*1 Displays the call sign of the called station.
MESSAGE Displays any message included in the received call, if entered.
RXRPT2*1 Displays the call sign of the repeater you received the call from.
Displays the frequency the call was received.
FREQUENCY
(This item appears only when the simplex call is received.)
RX TIME Displays the date and time the call was received.
GW Appears when a call is received through the internet.
Appears when position data is included. (NMEA or Mobile/Base
GPS *2
station)
OJB *2 Appears when the object’s data is included.
ITEM *2 Appears when the item’s data is included.
WX *2 Appears when the weather station’s data is included.
(UP) Appears when an uplink signal is received.

*1 These items can be switched to the Name display.

*2 If you have no position data, these items are not displayed.

16-53
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ RX History items (Continued)

To display the RX record contents

qqPush D-pad() to select the desired RX History number “RX01” to “RX50,”
and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwPush D-pad() to switch the RX History contents screen.

• When the received call includes GPS position data, it is displayed after RX
TIME.
• To register the caller station call sign, GPS information, or repeater call sign, push
D-pad() to show the desired contents, and then push [QUICK] .
eePush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

<The contents of the detail screen>

The contents of the detail screen differ on whether the position data is in-
cluded in the received data or not. The position data that is included in the
received data can be divided into five categories. Depending on the caller’s
TX mode or TX format, the displayed items and these meanings differ.
The following lists show the items for each category.
• Nothing is displayed when no position data is received.

Common items
Displays the call sign of the caller station and any note entered
CALLER*1
after the call sign.
CALLED*1 Displays the call sign of the called station.
Displays the call sign of the repeater that was accessed by the
caller station.
RXRPT1*1, *2
If it was a call through a gateway and the internet, this item dis-
plays the gateway repeater call sign of your local area repeater.
RXRPT2*1, *2 Displays the call sign of the repeater you received the call from.
RX MESSAGE Displays any message included in the received call, if entered.
RX TIME Displays the date and time the call was received.

1. When the caller’s TX mode is NMEA

Compass*3 Displays the caller’s direction from your position
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude of the
GL
caller’s position.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
DIST*3 Displays the caller’s distance from your position
*1 These items show the name under Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign
the call sign, if entered. COURSE Displays the caller’s direction over ground
*2 “FREQUENCY” appears instead of SPEED Displays the caller’s speed
these items when the call was not GPS Time Stamp Displays the time that the caller acquired the position data.
through a repeater (Simplex call), to
Displays the GPS message included in the position data of the
show the frequency that was used. GPS MESSAGE
received call.
*3 If you have no position data, these
items are not displayed.
16-54
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ RX History items (Continued)

2. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position 4. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Object/Item
(Mobile station) Displays the Object/Item station’s
Compass*
Displays the caller’s direction from your direction from your position
Compass* Displays the Object/Item station’s D-PRS
position Symbol
Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol symbol
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude Latitude Displays the Object/Item station’s latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude Longitude Displays the Object/Item station’s longitude
Displays the grid locator based on the
Displays the grid locator based on the GL
GL Object/Item station’s latitude and longitude.
caller’s latitude and longitude.
ALT Displays the Object/Item station’s altitude
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
Displays the Object/Item station’s distance
Displays the caller’s distance from your DST*
DIST* from your position
position
Object/Item name Displays the Object/Item station’s name
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
COURSE Displays the caller’s direction over ground
Displays the Object/Item station’s direction
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed COURSE
over ground
Displays the time that the caller acquired SPEED Displays the Object/Item station’s speed
GPS Time Stamp
the position data. Displays the Object/Item station’s TX power
Displays the GPS message included in POWER
GPS MESSAGE level
the position data of the received call. Displays the height of Object/Item station’s
HEIGHT
antenna
3. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position Displays the gain of Object/Item station’s
GAIN
antenna
(Base station)
Displays the direction that the Object/
Displays the caller’s direction from your DIRECT
Compass* Item station’s antenna was pointing
position Displays the time that the caller sent the
Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol GPS Time Stamp
Object station’s data.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude Shows the GPS message included in the
GPS MESSAGE
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude position data of the received call.
Displays the grid locator based on the When the object or item station is disabled, “KILLED”
GL
caller’s latitude and longitude. appears.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude
Displays the caller’s distance from your 5. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Weather
DIST*
position Displays the caller’s direction from your
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID) Compass*
position
POWER Displays the caller’s TX power level Symbol Displays the caller’s D-PRS symbol
HEIGHT Displays the height of caller’s antenna Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude
GAIN Displays the gain of caller’s antenna Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude
Displays the direction that the caller’s an- Displays the grid locator based on the
DIRECT GL
tenna was pointing caller’s latitude and longitude
Displays the time that the caller acquired Displays the caller’s distance from your
GPS Time Stamp DST
the position data. position
Shows the GPS message included in the Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with SSID)
GPS MESSAGE
position data of the received call. Displays the temperature at the caller
Temperature
station’s area
Displays the humidity at the caller sta-
Humidity
tion’s area
Displays the rainfall at the caller station’s
RAIN
area
Displays the wind direction at the caller
WIND DIR
station’s area
Displays the wind speed at the caller sta-
WIND SPD
tion’s area
Displays the barometric pressure at the
BARO
caller station’s area
Displays the time that the caller acquired
GPS Time Stamp
the weather data.
Shows the GPS message included in the
GPS MESSAGE
* If you have no position data, these items are not displayed. position data of the received call.

16-55
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■DV Memory items

Your Call Sign
DV Memory > Your Call Sign
The transceiver has a total of 200 memories to store individual station des-
tination call signs.
The stored call sign and name are displayed on the YOUR CALL SIGN or RX
Record screen.

Your (UR) Call Sign

Memory list

The call sign of the selected station

TIP:
• The Your (UR) Call Sign can be entered to the memory using the RX His-
tory. (p. 50 of the Ba­sic manual)
• See pages 9-43 to 9-46 about how to add, edit or move the Your Call Sign
in the memory.

Repeater List
DV Memory > Repeater List (REPEATER GROUP)
You can store repeater information for quick and simple communication when
using repeaters.
The transceiver has a total of 750 repeater memory channels, storable in 30
groups (01 to 30). DV repeater, DV Simplex, FM repeater, and FM simplex
can be stored.
Repeater group where the selected repeater is listed

Skip setting “ON”

Repeater List

The call sign of the selected repeater

The sub name (regional name) of the selected repeater

NOTE: For easy operation, a Repeater List is preloaded into your trans-
ceiver. However, if the CPU clears all entered contents (All Reset), the
Repeater List is also cleared.
We recommend that memory data be backed up using a microSD card, or
be saved to a PC using the supplied CS-51PLUS2 cloning software.
About the Repeater List:
The Repeater List can be downloaded from the Icom web site.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/index.html
16-56
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Memory items (Continued)

Repeater Group (01 to 30)

Repeater group name of up to 16 alphanumeric charac-
Group name
ters
The Skip setting can be turned ON or OFF in the QUICK MENU screen.

Repeater List
<DV Repeater>
TYPE DV Repeater
NAME Repeater name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters
SUB NAME Repeater sub name of up to 8 alphanumeric characters
CALL SIGN Repeater call sign
GW CALL SIGN Gateway call sign
GROUP Repeater group where the repeater is assigned
Select whether or not to use the repeater as an access repeater
USE(FROM)
(FROM) in the DR function.
FREQUENCY Operating frequency of the access repeater
DUP Duplex setting to use the access repeater
OFFSET FREQ Frequency offset to use the access repeater

POSITION Position data accuracy level (“None,” “Approximate” or “Exact”)

LATITUDE* Latitude position of the repeater

LONGITUDE* Longitude position of the repeater
Time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
UTC OFFSET
and the local time

NOTE: When the repeater is used for a simplex communication, refer to the
list below to set the settings.

<DV Simplex>
TYPE DV Simplex
NAME Enter the desired name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters
SUB NAME Enter the desired sub name of up to 8 alphanumeric characters
GROUP Set the desired repeater group
Select whether or not to use the repeater as an access repeater
USE(FROM)
(FROM) in the DR function
FREQUENCY Frequency to operate simplex
POSITION Position data accuracy level (“None,” “Approximate” or “Exact”)
LATITUDE* Latitude position of the access point
LONGITUDE* Longitude position of the access point
Time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
UTC OFFSET
and the local time

* Appears when POSITION is set to “Approximate” or “Exact.”

16-57
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Memory items (Continued)

<FM Repeater>
TYPE FM repeater
NAME FM repeater name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters
SUB NAME FM repeater sub name of up to 8 alphanumeric characters
CALL SIGN FM repeater call sign
GROUP Repeater group where the repeater is assigned
Select whether or not to use the FM repeater as an access re-
USE(FROM)
peater (FROM) in the DR function
FREQUENCY Operating frequency of the FM repeater
DUP Duplex setting to use the FM repeater
OFFSET FREQ Frequency offset to use the FM repeater
MODE Receiving mode of the FM repeater
TONE Tone function setting of the FM repeater
FM repeater tone frequency (Tone Encoder) setting of the ac-
REPEATER TONE
cess repeater.
POSITION Position data accuracy level (“None,” “Approximate” or “Exact”)
LATITUDE* Latitude position of the FM repeater
LONGITUDE* Longitude position of the FM repeater
Time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
UTC OFFSET
and the local time

<FM Simplex>
TYPE FM Simplex
NAME Enter the desired name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters
SUB NAME Enter the desired sub name of up to 8 alphanumeric characters
GROUP Set the desired repeater group
Select whether or not to use the access repeater (FROM) in the
USE(FROM)
DR function
FREQUENCY Frequency to operate simplex
MODE Receiving mode for simplex FM
TONE Tone function setting for simplex FM
FM simplex tone frequency (Tone Encoder) setting of the ac-
REPEATER TONE
cess repeater
POSITION Position data accuracy level (“None,” “Approximate” or “Exact”)
LATITUDE* Latitude position of the station
LONGITUDE* Longitude position of the station
Time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
UTC OFFSET
and the local time

* Appears when POSITION is set to “Approximate” or “Exact.”

16-58
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■My Station items

My Call Sign
My Station > My Call Sign
The transceiver has a total of 6 memories to store your own (MY) call signs.
A call sign of up to 8 digits can be entered.
Also, a note of up to 4 characters, for operating radio type, area, and so on,
can be entered.
Number (MY1 to MY6)

Call Sign
4 character note

TIP:
• See page 13 of the Ba­sic manual for MY call sign entry.
• To select a different My Call Sign, push D-pad() to select, and then push
D-pad(Ent) to set.

TX Message
My Station > TX Message
The transceiver has a total of 5 memories to store short messages for simul-
taneous transmission in the DV mode.
Enter a message of up to 20 alphanumeric characters for each memory.

TX Message edit screen

TIP:
• See page 9-2 for TX message entry.
• To changing the TX Message, push D-pad() to select, and then push
D-pad(Ent) to set.
• When no message transmission is necessary, select “OFF.”

16-59
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■DV Set items

RX Bass (Default: Normal)
DV Set > Tone Control > RX Bass
Set the DV mode received audio bass filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut: Cuts the bass tone
• Normal: Normal tone level
• Boost: Boosts the bass tone

RX Treble (Default: Normal)

DV Set > Tone Control > RX Treble
Set the DV mode received audio treble filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut: Cuts the treble tone
• Normal: Normal tone level
• Boost: Boosts the treble tone

RX Bass Boost (Default: OFF)

DV Set > Tone Control > RX Bass Boost
Turn the DV mode received audio Bass Boost function ON or OFF.
This function is separate from the “Boost” setting of the RX Bass.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: This function boosts the received audio bass to output it from a
speaker, even if the speaker is small.

TX Bass (Default: Normal)

DV Set > Tone Control > TX Bass
Set the DV mode transmit audio bass filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut: Cuts the bass tone
• Normal: Normal tone level
• Boost: Boosts the bass tone

TX Treble (Default: Normal)

DV Set > Tone Control > TX Treble
Set the DV mode transmit audio treble filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut: Cuts the treble tone
• Normal: Normal tone level
• Boost: Boosts the treble tone

16-60
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

Auto Reply (Default: OFF)

DV Set > Auto Reply
Set the automatic reply function to ON, OFF, Voice or Position.
This function automatically replies to a call addressed to your own call sign,
even if you are away from the transceiver.
When “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the automatic reply function is automati-
cally turned OFF when you push [PTT].
When “Position” is selected, the automatic reply function is kept to ON, even
if you push [PTT].
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Replies with your own call sign. (No audio reply is sent)
• Voice: Replies with your call sign and any Auto Reply message recorded
on the microSD (up to 10 seconds).
If no microSD card is inserted or no message is recorded, only
your call sign is transmitted. The transmitted audio can be moni-
tored.
• Position: Replies with your own call sign and transmits your position using
the internal GPS receiver.
It may take a few seconds to receive your position, and may be
late to send the call.
- When “OFF” or “Manual” is set in “GPS Select,” the internal GPS re-
ceiver is temporarily turned ON.
- When “External GPS” is set in “GPS Select,” the transceiver transmits
your position. But if the external GPS receiver is not connected, the
internal GPS receiver will be activated.

NOTE:
The Power Save function is disabled when “ON” or “Voice” is selected.
The Power Save function is enabled when “Position” is selected.

DV Data TX (Default: Auto)

DV Set > DV Data TX
Select whether to manually or automatically transmit data.
• PTT: Push [PTT] to manually transmit the input data.
• Auto: When data is input from a PC through the [DATA] jack, the transceiver
automatically transmits it.

Fast Data (Default: OFF)

DV Set > DV Fast Data > Fast Data

Select whether or not to use the DV Fast Data for data communication in the
DV mode.
• OFF: Sends data in the slow speed (approximately 950 bps).
• ON: Sends data in the fast speed (approximately 3480 bps).
• While holding down [PTT], the DV data is sent in the slow speed.
• The GPS data speed is depending on the “GPS Data Speed” set-
ting. (p. 16-62)

16-61
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

GPS Data Speed (Default: Slow)

DV Set > DV Fast Data > GPS Data Speed
Set the GPS data speed when the DV data is sent by using the DV Fast
Data.
• Slow: Sends GPS data in the slow speed (approximately 950 bps).
• Fast: Sends GPS data in the fast speed (approximately 3480 bps).

NOTE: When using the DV Fast Data, and if you want to send the GPS data
to other transceivers that can receive only slow speed data, set to “Slow.”

TX Delay (PTT) (Default: 2 sec)

DV Set > DV Fast Data > TX Delay (PTT)

Set the TX delay time.

In the low-speed data communication mode and after releasing [PTT], the
transceiver automatically sends the DV data by using the DV Fast Data for
this set period.

• OFF: After releasing [PTT], the transceiver returns to receive.

• 1~10sec: After releasing [PTT], the transceiver sends data by using the
DV Fast Data for this set period.
When the TX data is completely sent within this set period, the
transceiver automatically returns to receive.

NOTE: This function is usable only when the “DV Data TX” is set to “PTT.”

Digital Monitor (Default: Auto)

DV Set > Digital Monitor
Select the receive mode when [SQL] is held down in the DV operation mode.
• Auto: Receives in the DV mode or the FM mode, depending on the re-
ceived signal.
• Digital: Monitors in the DV mode.
• Analog: Monitors in the FM mode.

16-62
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

Digital Repeater Set (Default: ON)

DV Set > Digital Repeater Set
Turn the digital repeater setting function ON or OFF.
In any DV mode except for the DR function, and when accessing a repeater
that has a call sign that is different than the transceiver’s setting, this function
reads the repeater’s signal and automatically sets the repeater call sign into
R1 and R2.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Automatically sets the repeater call sign.

RX Call Sign Write (Default: OFF)

DV Set > RX Call Sign Write
Set the RX call sign automatic write function to Auto or OFF.
When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign in any DV mode ex-
cept for the DR function, this function automatically sets the caller station call
sign into “UR.”
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• Auto: Automatically sets the call sign of the caller station into “UR.”

RX Repeater Write (Default: OFF)

DV Set > RX Repeater Write
Set the repeater call sign automatic write function to Auto or OFF.
When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign through a repeater in
any DV mode except for the DR function, this function automatically sets the
call sign of the repeater into “R1” or “R2.”
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• Auto: Automatically sets the call sign of the repeater into “R1” and/or “R2.”

DV Auto Detect (Default: OFF)

DV Set > DV Auto Detect
Turn the DV mode automatic detect function ON or OFF.
If you receive a non-digital signal during DV mode operation, this function
automatically switches to the FM mode.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF. The operating mode is fixed to the DV mode.
• ON: Automatically selects the FM mode for temporary operation.

16-63
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

RX Record (RPT) (Default: ALL)

DV Set > RX Record (RPT)
The transceiver can record the data of up to 50 individual calls.
When the received signal includes a status message (“UR?” or “RPT?”) that
is sent back from the access repeater, you can record up to 50 messages or
only the latest one, in the Received Call Record.
• ALL: Records up to 50 calls.
• Latest Only: Records only the latest call.

[RX>CS] Key (Default: Call Sign Capture)

DV Set > [RX>CS] Key
Select the Call Sign Capture key ( ) operation when it is held down.
• Call Sign Capture: While holding down , the RX history is displayed.
After releasing, the last received call station’s call sign
is set to “TO” (destination).
• RX>CS List: When you hold down for 1 second, the RX history
is displayed. Push D-pad() to select a call sign to set
to “TO” (destination), and then push D-pad(Ent).

BK (Default: OFF)
DV Set > BK
The BK (Break-in) function allows you to break into a conversation, where
the two other stations are communicating with call sign squelch enabled.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.
“BK” appears on the display.
NOTE: The BK function is automatically turned OFF when transceiver is
turned OFF.

EMR (Default: OFF)

DV Set > EMR
The EMR communication mode can be used in the digital mode. In the EMR
mode, no call sign setting is necessary.
When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio (voice) will be heard at
the specified level even if the volume setting level is set to minimum level, or
digital call sign/digital code squelch is in use.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.
“EMR ” appears on the display.
NOTE: The EMR function is automatically turned OFF when transceiver is
turned OFF.

16-64
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

EMR AF Level (Default: 19)

DV Set > EMR AF Level
Set the audio output level to between 0 and 39 for when an EMR communi-
cation mode signal is received.
When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be heard at the set level, or
the [VOL] control level, whichever is higher.
To disable the setting, set it to “0.”

NOTE: After an EMR signal disappears, the audio level will remain at the
EMR level. In this case, rotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.

16-65
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■SPEECH items
RX Call Sign SPEECH (Default: ON (Kerchunk))
SPEECH > RX Call Sign SPEECH
Turn the RX call sign speech function ON or OFF for calls received in the DV
mode.
• OFF: No announcement is made even when a call is received.
• ON (Kerchunk): The caller station’s call sign is announced only when it
makes a short transmission.
• ON (All): The caller station’s call sign is always announced.

NOTE: When a call is received during an announcement, the received au-

dio is heard after cancelling the announcement.

RX>CS SPEECH (Default: ON)

SPEECH > RX>CS SPEECH
Turn the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF.
The RX>CS Speech function enables the transceiver to announce the sta-
tion call sign that is selected from a Received Call Record by pushing
and then rotating [DIAL]. (p. 9-17)
• OFF: The station call sign is not announced.
• ON: The station call sign is announced.

NOTE:
• When a call is received during an announcement, the received audio will
be muted, and no audio is recorded onto the microSD card.
• If the call sign is announced while recording, the recorded contents are
silent during the announcement.

DIAL SPEECH (Default: OFF)

SPEECH > DIAL SPEECH
Turn the Dial Speech function ON or OFF.
The Dial Speech function enables the transceiver to announce the frequency
or repeater call sign that is selected by rotating [DIAL].
• OFF: The Dial Speech function is OFF.
• ON: The frequency or repeater call sign is announced, 1 second after
[DIAL] selection.
- In the VFO, Memory and Call channel modes, the frequency is an-
nounced.
- In the DR function, the repeater call sign is announced. If Simplex is
selected, the frequency is announced.

NOTE: When a call is received during an announcement, the received au-

dio is heard after cancelling the announcement.

16-66
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ SPEECH items (Continued)

MODE SPEECH (Default: OFF)

SPEECH > MODE SPEECH
Turn the Operating Mode Speech function ON or OFF.
When this function is ON, the selected operating mode is announced when
the mode switch is pushed.
• OFF: The selected operating mode is not announced.
• ON: The selected operating mode is announced.

NOTE:
• While in the DV mode, the recorded contents are silent during the an-
nouncement, if the operating mode is announced while recording,
• While in the AM, FM or FM-N mode, the received contents are recorded
onto the microSD card, if a call is received during an announcement.
• Even if the VFO scan is running, the operating mode is announced when
[MODE] is pushed.

SPEECH Language (Default: English)

SPEECH > SPEECH Language
Set the desired speech pronunciation to English or Japanese.

Alphabet (Default: Normal)

SPEECH > Alphabet
Select either “Normal” or “Phonetic Code” to announce the alphabet charac-
ter.
• Normal: Normal code is used. (for example: A as eh, B as bee)
• Phonetic Code: Phonetic code is used. (for example: A as Alfa, B as Bravo)

SPEECH Speed (Default: Fast)

SPEECH > SPEECH Speed
Set the speech speed to Low (slow) or High (fast).

SPEECH Level (Default: 7)

SPEECH > SPEECH Level
Enter a volume level number between 0 (OFF), 1 (minimum) and 9 (maxi-
mum) for the voice synthesizer.
The voice synthesizer audio output level from the speaker is linked with [VOL]
setting from the minimum audio volume up to the set level.

16-67
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■DTMF/T-CALL items
Enters and sets the DTMF tone code and DTMF memory channel for DTMF tone operation.
See pages 17-8 to 17-12 for details.

DTMF Memory (Default: d0)

DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Memory
Shows a list of the DTMF memory channels.
• T-CALL: 1750 Hz tone burst signal
• d0 to d#: DTMF memory channel list

DTMF Speed (Default: 100ms)

DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Speed
Select the DTMF transfer speed.
• 100ms: Transfer the DTMF codes at about 100 milliseconds per code.
5 characters per second.
• 200ms: Transfer the DTMF codes at about 200 milliseconds per code.
2.5 characters per second.
• 300ms: Transfer the DTMF codes at about 300 milliseconds per code.
1.6 characters per second.
• 500ms: Transfer the DTMF codes at about 500 milliseconds per code.
1 character per second.

16-68
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■QSO/RX Log items

QSO Log (Default: ON)
QSO/RX Log > QSO Log
Select whether or not to make a communication log on the microSD card.
The communication log can be made, and saved in the “csv” format.
Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before making a com-
munication log.
• OFF: The QSO Log function is OFF.
• ON: The transceiver makes a communication log on the microSD card.
The transceiver starts making a log when you begin talking.

NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created, as [ID-51\QsoLog].
• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Log start date and time: 2016/10/1 15:30:00
File name: 20161001_153000.csv
• The log contents cannot be displayed on the transceiver.
• You can see the log contents on a microSD card on a PC.

The log contents are shown below:

Contents Example Descriptions
TX/RX TX RX Transmission and reception
Date 10/01/2016 10/01/2016 Date and time the call was started.
13:51:48 13:51:48
Frequency 438.010000 438.010000 Operating frequencies
(When Duplex is set, the frequencies of
the called are displayed.)
Mode DV DV Operating mode (FM/FM-N/DV)
My Latitude 34.764667 34.764667 Your latitude (unit: degree)
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
My Longitude 135.375333 135.375333 Your longitude (unit: degree)
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
My Altitude 50.5 50.5 Your altitude (unit: ft)
Records to one decimal place.
RF Power Mid (Blank) TX output power level
S-meter Level (Blank) S0 The relative signal strength of the re-
ceive signal (in twelve levels)
RPT Call Sign JP3YHJ A JP3YHJ A Repeater call sign (DV mode only)
TX Call Sign CQCQCQ (Blank) TX Call sign (DV mode only)
RX Call Sign (Blank) JA3YUA A RX Call sign (DV mode only)
RX Latitude (Blank) 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Records only when you receive in the
DV mode.
RX Longitude (Blank) 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Records only when you receive in the
DV mode.
RX Altitude (Blank) 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)
Records only when you receive in the
DV mode.

16-69
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ QSO/RX items (Continued)

RX History Log (Default: OFF)

QSO/RX Log > RX History Log
Select whether or not to make a DV mode’s receive history log on the mi-
croSD card.
The receive history log can be made on a microSD card, and saved in the
“csv” format. Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before
making a communication log.
• OFF: The RX History Log function is OFF.
• ON: The transceiver makes a DV mode’s receive history log on the mi-
croSD card.
The transceiver starts making a receive history log when you finish to
talk.
NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created, as [ID-51\RxLog].
• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Log start date and time: 2016/10/1 15:30:00
File name: 20161001_153000.csv
• The log contents cannot be displayed on the transceiver.
• You can see the log contents on a microSD card on a PC.

The log contents are shown below:

Contents Example Descriptions
Frequency 438.010000 RX Frequency
Mode DV Operating mode (DV is fixed)
Caller JA3YUA A Call sign of the caller station
/ ID51 Note after the call sign
Called CQCQCQ Call sign of the called station
Rx RPT1 JP3YHH G Access repeater call sign of the caller station or the
gateway repeater call sign of your local area re-
peater.
Rx RPT2 JP3YHJ A Access repeater call sign of the called station
Message Hello CQ D-STAR! Message included in the received call (up to 20
characters)
Status (Blank) Normal: blank, Uplink: UPLINK,
Access repeater reply: “UR?” or “RPT?”
Received 10/01/2016 Date and time the call was received
date 13:51:48 Depending on the setting, the format may differ.
BK * BK call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
EMR * EMR call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
Latitude 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Longitude 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Altitude 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)
SSID -A Records one of 0, -1 to -15 and -A to -Z.
D-PRS Car Icon: Converts to text
Symbol None: Code
Course 123 Caller’s course (unit: degree)
Speed 23.5 Caller’s speed (unit: mph)
Power 49 TX power (unit: W)
☞☞Continued on the next page
16-70
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ QSO/RX items (Continued)

Contents Example Descriptions

Height 24 Antenna height (unit: m)
Gain 6 Antenna gain (unit: dB)
Directivity Omni Antenna directivity
(Omni, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, 315 or 360)
Object/Item HAM FES Object name or Item name (up to 9 characters)
Name
Data Type Live Object Data type of Object or Item (Live or Kill)
Temperature 20.5 Temperature (unit: ç)
Records to one decimal places.
Rainfall 253.7 Rainfall (unit: mm)
Records to one decimal places.
Rainfall 253.7 Rainfall (24 Hours) (unit: mm)
(24 Hours) Records to one decimal places.
Rainfall 253.7 Rainfall (Midnight) (unit: mm)
(Midnight) Records to one decimal places.
Wind 315 Wind Direction (unit: degree)
Direction
Wind Speed 10.0 Wind Speed (unit: m/s)
Records to one decimal place.
Gust Speed 10.0 Gust Speed (unit: m/s)
Records to one decimal place.
Barometric 1013.0 Barometric (unit: hPa)
Records to one decimal place.
Humidity 85 Humidity (unit: %)
GPS Time Time data that the caller station acquires the posi-
Stamp tion data
GPS Osaka City/ID-51 Caller is “NMEA (DV-G)”: Records the GPS mes-
Message sage
Caller is “D-PRS (DV-A)”: Records the comment

Separator/Decimal (Default: Sep [,] Dec [.]*)

QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Separator/Decimal
Select the separator and the decimal character for the CSV format.
• Sep [,] Dec [.] : Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.” for the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [.] : Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.” for the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [;] : Separator is “;” and Decimal is “;” for the CSV format.

* The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

Date (Default: mm/dd/yyyy*)

QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Date
Select the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,” “mm/dd/yyyy” and “dd/mm/
yyyy.” (y: year, m: month, d: day)

* The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

16-71
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN 30 milliseconds

Stand-by

Reception is
disabled
60 milliseconds

■■Function items No signal is received

for 5 seconds

Power Save (Default: Auto (Short))

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Function
Stand-by> Power Save

Set the power

Reception
disabled
is save function to reduce current drain and conserve battery
30 milliseconds
100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 300 milliseconds
power.Stand-by
No signal is received 60 seconds 60 seconds
When the
Reception
for is power save function is activated, the call sign or the beginning of
5 seconds
the signal may not be
disabled received correctly.
60 milliseconds

No signal is received
• for
OFF: 
5 seconds Turns the function OFF.
30 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
• Auto (Short): 
Stand-by
Sets the Power saving time to “Short”
30 milliseconds
Reception is 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Stand-by
disabled
60 milliseconds 120 milliseconds
Reception is
Reception
No signal isisreceived 60 seconds
disabled
disabled
for 5 seconds 60 milliseconds
100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 300 milliseconds
No
No signal
signal is
is received
received 60 seconds 60 seconds
for
for 55 seconds
seconds

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds

• Auto (Middle): Sets the Power saving time to “Middle”
Stand-by
50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Reception is 30 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
Stand-by
disabled
Reception is 100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 600 milliseconds
disabled
signal isisreceived10060
Reception
No seconds 60 seconds
milliseconds 300 milliseconds 300 milliseconds
disabled
for 5 seconds
No signal is received 60 seconds 120 milliseconds
60 milliseconds 60 seconds
for 5 seconds 60 seconds
No signal is received
for 5 seconds

• Auto (Long): Sets

30 the Power30saving
milliseconds time to “Long”
milliseconds
Stand-by 50 30
milliseconds
milliseconds 50 milliseconds
30 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Stand-by
Reception is
disabled
Reception
Reception isis 60 milliseconds 120 milliseconds
disabled
disabled 100 milliseconds
No signal is received milliseconds 300 milliseconds 240 milliseconds
60seconds
60
600 milliseconds
No 5signal
for is received
seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds
No signal is received 60 seconds
for 5 seconds
for 5 seconds

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds

NOTE: The Power Save function is disabled when using an external power
Stand-by 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
source, or if the Auto Reply function in the DV mode is set to “ON” or “Voice.”
Stand-by
Reception is
disabled 30 milliseconds
100 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
300 milliseconds 600 milliseconds
Reception is
Stand-by
disabled 60 seconds
No signal is received 100 milliseconds 60 seconds
300 milliseconds 900 milliseconds
for 5 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds
Reception
No signal isisreceived
disabled
for 5 seconds 60 milliseconds 240 milliseconds

No signal is received 60 seconds

for 5 seconds

30 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
Stand-by 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Reception is
disabled
Reception is 60 milliseconds 240 milliseconds
disabled
100 milliseconds
60 seconds 300 milliseconds 900 milliseconds
No signal is received
for
No 5signal
seconds
is received 60 seconds 60 seconds
for 5 seconds

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds

Stand-by

Reception is
disabled
100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 900 milliseconds
No signal is received 16-72
60 seconds 60 seconds
for 5 seconds
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

Monitor (Default: Push)

Function > Monitor
Select the [SQL] monitor function method.
• Push: Hold down [SQL] to monitor the frequency. Release to stop monitor-
ing.
• Hold: Push [SQL] momentarily to monitor the frequency and push momen-
tarily again to cancel it.

Dial Speed-UP (Default: ON)

Function > Dial Speed-UP
Turn the dial speed acceleration ON or OFF.
The dial speed acceleration automatically speeds up the tuning dial speed
when you rapidly rotate [DIAL].
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.

Auto Repeater
Function > Auto Repeater
This item appears only in the Korean and USA version transceivers
The auto repeater function automatically turns the duplex operation and tone
encoder* ON or OFF.
The offset and repeater tone* are not changed by the auto repeater function.
Reset these setting values, if necessary.

For Korean versions

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder*. (Default)

For USA version

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON (DUP): Turns ON the duplex operation only. (Default)
• ON (DUP, TONE): Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder*.

* The tone encoder will not be turned ON in the DV mode.

16-73
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

Remote MIC Key

Function > Remote MIC Key
The function assignments for keys on the optional HM-75LS SPEAKER-MI-
CROPHONE can be changed for simple remote control operation.

• During RX/Standby:
Function Description
--- No function
Push to increase the frequency, Memory channel, repeater or
UP
station call sign.
Push to decrease the frequency, Memory channel, repeater or
DOWN
station call sign.
VOL UP Push to turn up the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to turn down the volume level.
Hold down [SQL] to monitor the frequency. Release to stop moni-
Monitor (Push)
toring.
Push [SQL] momentarily to monitor the frequency and push mo-
Monitor (Hold)
mentarily again to cancel it.
Default for “During RX/Standby” CALL Push to select a call channel.
MR (000 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select memory channel 000.

Volume level adjustment while MR (001 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select memory channel 001.
monitoring: VFO/MR Push to toggle between the VFO mode and the Memory mode.
DR Push to select the DR function.
• When [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] FROM (DR) In the DR function, push to select “FROM.”
are assigned, push these keys to TO (DR) In the DR function, push to select “TO.”
adjust. Push to directly select the Home CH that is set to the selected
• When [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] are mode (VFO/Memory/DR).
Home CH
not assigned, but [UP]/[DOWN] While in the CALL CH or weather channel mode, or when no
are assigned, push these keys to Home CH is set, an error beep sounds.
adjust. BAND Push to select an operating band.
• When [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]/ Hold down for 1 second to start a scan.
SCAN
[UP]/[DOWN] are not assigned, Push to stop the scan.
Push to set the frequency to be skipped during scanning.
push []/[] to adjust, if [Moni- Temporary
The selected frequencies are temporarily skipped during scan-
tor (Push)] or [Monitor (Hold)] is Skip
ning for faster scanning.
not assigned to []/[]. Hold down for 1 second to display the RX history.
- When the “[RX>CS] Key” item is set to “Call Sign Capture,” after
releasing the key, the last received call station’s call sign is set
to “TO” (destination).
RX>CS - When the “[RX>CS] Key” item is set to “RX>CS List,” push [UP]/
[DOWN] to select a call sign, and then push this key again to set
to “TO” (destination).
- If [UP]/[DOWN] are not assigned, you cannot select the call sign
with the HM-75LS, even if the RX history is displayed.
Hold down for 1 second to announce the frequency, operating
mode or call sign.
- In the VFO, Memory and Call channel mode, the frequency and
SPEECH
the operating mode are announced.
- In the DR function, the call sign is announced. If Simplex is se-
lected, the frequency is announced.
Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD.
Voice TX
Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.

16-74
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

Remote MIC Key (Continued)

• During TX:
Function Description
--- No function
VOL UP Push to turn up the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to turn down the volume level.
Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD.
Voice TX Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.
- To make a repeat transmission, [PTT] must be released.
T-CALL Push to transmit a 1750 Hz tone.
Default for “During TX”

Key Lock (Default: Normal)

Function > Key Lock
Select the key lock type when the Key Lock function is activated.
• Normal: All keys and dials except [SQL] and [VOL] are locked.
• No SQL: All keys and dials except [SQL] is locked.
• No VOL: All keys and dials except [VOL] is locked.
• ALL: All keys and dials are locked.

NOTE: Regardless of the setting, the [PWR], [PTT] and [MENU] (lock func-
tion only) are still accessible when the lock function is activated.

PTT Lock (Default: OFF)

Function > PTT Lock
Turn the PTT lock function ON and OFF.
To prevent accidental transmissions, this function disables [PTT].
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.

Busy Lockout (Default: OFF)

Function > Busy Lockout
Turn the busy lockout function ON or OFF.
This function inhibits transmission while receiving a signal, or when the
squelch is open.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.

Time-Out Timer (Default: 5min)

Function > Time-Out Timer
To prevent accidental prolonged transmission, the transceiver has a time-out
timer.
The function inhibits continuous transmissions longer than the set time pe-
riod.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• 1 to 30min: The transmission is cut OFF after the set time period ends (1,
3, 5, 10, 15 or 30 minutes).
16-75
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

Active Band (Default: All)

Function > Active Band
Allows continuous frequency selection of the operating frequency across all
bands using [DIAL].
• Single: The operating frequency can be selected within the current band.
• ALL: The operating frequency can be continuously selected.

NOTE: When “Single” is selected, push [QUICK] to show the quick

menu, and then select “BAND” for another band selection.
This setting is for the [DIAL] operation, so all frequencies will be scanned.

MIC Gain (Internal) (Default: 2)

Function > MIC Gain (Internal)

Set the internal microphone sensitivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity)

and 4 (maximum sensitivity), to suit your preference.
Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to your voice.

MIC Gain (External) (Default: 2)

Function > MIC Gain (External)
Set the external microphone sensitivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity)
and 4 (maximum sensitivity), to suit your preference.
Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to your voice.
The external microphone is connected to the [MIC/SP] jack.

Data Speed (Default: 9600bps)

Function > Data Speed
Select the data transmission speed for low-speed data communication, or
between the [DATA] jack and external modules like a GPS receiver, and so
on, to 4800 bps or 9600 bps.

VOX (Default: OFF)

Function > VOX > VOX
Turn the VOX function ON or OFF.
The VOX (Voice Operated Transmission) function starts transmission without
pushing [PTT] when you speak into the microphone; then, automatically re-
turns to receive when you stop speaking.
The VOX function requires an optional headset. (p. 18-3)
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Starts transmission without pushing [PTT] when you speak into the
microphone. Then automatically returns to receive when you stop
speaking.

16-76
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

VOX Level (Default: 5)

Function > VOX > VOX Level
Set the VOX gain level to between 1 and 10 or OFF.
Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.
To turn the VOX function OFF, select “OFF.”
• OFF: Turns the VOX function OFF.
• 1 to 10: 1 (The minimum sensitivity)
10 (The maximum sensitivity)

VOX Delay (Default: 0.5sec)

Function > VOX > VOX Delay
Set the VOX Delay to 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 or 3.0 seconds.
The VOX Delay is the amount of time the transmitter stays ON after you stop
speaking before the VOX switches to receive.

VOX Time-Out Timer (Default: 3min)

Function > VOX > VOX Time-Out Timer
Set the VOX Time-Out Timer to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 or 15 minutes to prevent an
accidental prolonged transmission.
To disable the function, set it to “OFF.”
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 or 15min: If a continuous transmission exceeds the set
period, the transmission will be cut off.

Headset Select (Default: Other)

Function > VOX > Headset Select
Select the headset type to be connected.
• HS-95: Select when the HS-95 is connected.
• Other: Select when the HS-94 or HS-97 is connected.

16-77
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

CI-V (DATA Jack) (Default: OFF)

Function > CI-V > CI-V (DATA Jack)

Selects whether or not to use the [DATA] jack to remotely control the transceiver.
• OFF: Do not use the [DATA] jack to remotely control the
transceiver.
• ON (Echo Back OFF): Use the [DATA] jack to remotely control the trans-
ceiver.
- Does not send back the CI-V command input from
the [DATA] jack.
• ON (Echo Back ON): Use the [DATA] jack to remotely control the trans-
ceiver.
- Sends back the CI-V command input from the
[DATA] jack.

TIP: When you use the optional RS-MS1A, select “ON (Echo Back OFF).”

CI-V Address (Default: 86)

Function > CI-V > CI-V Address
To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its own Icom standard
address in hexadecimal code.
The ID-51A/E’s default address is 86.
When 2 or more ID-51A/Es are controlled through a PC at the same time,
set a different address for each device between 01h and DFh (hexadecimal).

CI-V Baud Rate (Default: Auto)

Function > CI-V > CI-V Baud Rate
Set the CI-V data transfer speed to 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps or
Auto.
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automatically set according to the
data rate of the controller.

NOTE:
You can select “300 bps,” “1200bps,” or “Auto” only when “CI-V (DATA
Jack)” (p. 16-78) is set to “OFF.”

CI-V Transceive (Default: OFF)

Function > CI-V > CI-V Transceive
Turn the CI-V Transceive function ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: When you change a setting on the transceiver, the same change is
automatically set on other connected transceivers or receivers, and
vice versa.

TIP: When you use the optional RS-MS1A, select “ON.”

16-78
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Function items (Continued)

Heterodyne (Default: Normal)

Function > Heterodyne
Set the 1st Local Oscillator frequency.
Depending on a combination of the two operating frequencies in the VHF/
UHF Dualwatch mode, the transceiver might generate a spurious signal on
a specific receive frequency. This may cause the S-meter to fluctuate, even
when no signal is received, for example.

TIP: If this occurs, the Heterodyne function may help. The Heterodyne func-
tion shifts the 1st Local Oscillator frequency to the opposite side of the
signal to change the frequency combination.

Charging (Power ON) (Default: OFF)

Function > Charging (Power ON)
When the battery pack is attached, and the optional CP-12L, CP-19R or
OPC-254L external DC power cable is connected, this function enables
charging the transceiver's battery even if the power is ON.

• OFF: The transceiver's battery cannot be charged when the power is ON.
• ON: The transceiver's battery can be charged even if the power is ON.

16-79
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Display items
Backlight (Default: Auto (DC IN:ON))
Display > Backlight
Select the transceiver backlight option.
• OFF: The backlight does not light.
• ON: The backlight lights continuously.
• Auto: The backlight lights when an operation is performed, and
goes out after the time period set in the Backlight Timer.
• Auto (DC IN:ON): The backlight lights when an operation is performed, and
goes out after the time period set in the Backlight Timer,
but lights continuously while operating with an external
DC power source.

NOTE: While in the exclusive GPS logger mode, the transceiver uses the
“Auto” setting even if “ON” or “Auto (DC IN:ON)” is selected.
When [PWR] is pushed, the backlight lights for the set period of time (set in
“Backlight Timer”) when “Auto” or “Auto (DC-IN:ON)” is selected.

Backlight Timer (Default: 5sec)

Display > Backlight Timer
Select the backlight lighting time period to between 5 and 10 seconds.
Depending on the Backlight option, the backlight lights for this set period,
and then automatically goes out.

LCD Dimmer (Default: Bright)

Display > LCD Dimmer
Select the LCD backlight brightness level between Bright and Dark.
• Bright: The LCD backlight brightness level is bright.
• Dark: The LCD backlight brightness level is dim.

LCD Contrast (Default: 8)

Display > LCD Contrast
Set the contrast of the LCD.
Set the level between 1, the lowest contrast, and 16, the highest.

16-80
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

Busy LED (Default: ON)

Display > Busy LED
The TX/RX indicator lights green while receiving a signal, or the squelch is
open. It can be turned OFF to conserve battery power, if desired.
• OFF: The indicator does not light, even if a signal is received.
• ON: The indicator lights green while receiving a signal, or the squelch is
open.

NOTE: The indicator lights red while transmitting, regardless of the setting.

RX Call Sign (Default: Auto)

Display > RX Call Sign
When a call is received, select whether or not to display the call sign of the
caller station.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• Auto: The caller station’s call sign automatically scrolls once,
and then disappears.
• Auto (RX Hold): The caller station’s call sign automatically scrolls once,
and then remains on the LCD until the signal disappears.

(Example : When receiving a call from “JM1ZLK”)

NOTE: When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected, and if the call sign
and name of the caller station is entered in the Your Call Sign screen, the
entered name is displayed after the call sign.

16-81
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

RX Message (Default: Auto)

Display > RX Message
Select whether or not to display and scroll a received message.
• OFF: Does not display the message.
To check the message, hold down [CD] for 1 second to display the
call record.
• Auto: Automatically displays and scrolls the message.
The message is automatically displayed every 30 seconds until the
signal disappears.
When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected in RX Call Sign Dis-
play, the message is displayed after displaying the caller station’s
call sign.

(Example : When receiving a message “HELLO CQ”)

Reply Position Display (Default: ON)

Display > Reply Position Display
Select whether or not to display the caller's position data when the data is
included in the Auto Reply signal.
• OFF: Does not display the caller's position data.
• ON: Automatically displays the caller's position data.

16-82
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

DV RX Backlight (Default: ON)

Display > DV RX Backlight
Turn the DV RX Backlight function ON or OFF.
In the DV mode, this function turns ON the LCD backlight while displaying the
calling station’s call sign or a received message on the LCD.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: The LCD backlight automatically lights while displaying the calling
station’s call sign or a received message on the LCD.
The backlight stays on while the call sign or message is scrolling.

TX Call Sign (Default: Your Call Sign)

Display > TX Call Sign
Select whether or not to display your own or the destination station's call sign
while transmitting.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• Your Call Sign: Displays and scrolls the destination’s call sign.
When the called station’s call sign and name are entered in
your memory, the transceiver shows the name after the call
sign in any DV mode except for the DR function.
• My Call Sign: Displays and scrolls your own call sign.

(Example : Shows the destination’s call sign)

Scroll Speed (Default: Fast)

Display > Scroll Speed
This item sets the scrolling speed of the message, call sign, or other text, that
is displayed on the transceiver's LCD.
• Slow: The speed is set to slow.
• Fast: The speed is set to fast.

16-83
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

Opening Message (Default: ON)

Display > Opening Message
Select the opening message that is displayed on the LCD at power ON.
• OFF: Opening message display is skipped.
• ON: Icom logo, MY call sign and the product model (“ID-51A” or “ID-51E”)*
are displayed at power ON.
* Depending on the transceiver version.

Voltage (Power ON) (Default: ON)

Display > Voltage (Power ON)
Select whether or not to display the voltage of the battery or external DC
power source on the LCD at power ON.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: When the transceiver is turned ON, displays the voltage of the battery
or external DC power source, on the LCD.

(Example : When the voltage is 8.0 V)

NOTE: When the voltage is above 15.6V external DC power source, “HI
Voltage” is displayed.

16-84
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

Latitude/Longitude (Default: ddd ºmm.mm')

Display > Display Unit > Latitude/Longitude
Select either the ddd ºmm.mm' or ddd ºmm'ss'' format to display the latitude
and longitude.

Altitude/Distance (Default: ft/ml*)

Display > Display Unit > Altitude/Distance
Select either the meter or feet/mile format to display the distance and alti-
tude.

Speed (Default: mph*)

Display > Display Unit > Speed
Select either the km/h, mph or knots format to display the speed.

Temperature (Default: ºF*)

Display > Display Unit > Temperature
Select either the degrees ºC or ºF format to display the temperature.

* The default setting may differ, depending on the transceiver’s version.

16-85
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

Barometric (Default: inHg*)

Display > Display Unit > Barometric
Select between the hPa, mb, mmHg, and inHg format to display the baro-
metric pressure.

Rainfall (Default: inch*)

Display > Display Unit > Rainfall
Select either the mm or inch format to display the amount of rainfall.

Wind Speed (Default: mph*)

Display > Display Unit > Wind Speed
Select between the m/s, mph and knots format to display the wind speed.

Display Language (Default: English)

Display > Display Language
This item appears only when the “System Language” is set to “Japa-
nese.” See page 16-87 “Choose your language carefully” about setting
cautions.

Set the screen display language type in the DR function or Menu mode to
English or Japanese.

* The default setting may differ, depending on the transceiver’s version.

16-86
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Display items (Continued)

System Language (Default: English)

Display > System Language
Set the system language of the transceiver to English or Japanese.
• English: The system language of the transceiver is English.
- Only alphabetical characters (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9) and sym-
bols (! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~)
can be displayed. If Japanese characters (Kanji, Hiragana and
Katakana) are included, the LCD shows “=” or “_” instead of
that character. In this case, you can only delete “=” or “_” in the
transceiver's edit mode.
- The Display Language item will be hidden.
• Japanese: The system language of the transceiver is Japanese.
Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters, and the 2-bytes sym-
bols can be displayed on the LCD.
To display such characters in the DR function or Menu mode,
Display Language must be set to “Japanese.”

Choose your language carefully

When the system language of the transceiver is set to Japanese, the ID-
51A/E has the capability to display both English and Japanese characters.
HOWEVER, if you select Japanese as the display language (p. 16-86), all
menu items throughout the ID-51A/E system will be displayed in only Japa-
nese characters. There will be no English item names. Unless you are fluent
in reading Japanese characters, use this feature with extreme caution.
If you change the ID-51A/E’s language to Japanese, and can’t understand
the menu system in the new setting, you will have to change the language
back to English in “Display Language” or “System Language” (this item), or
by doing a partial reset of the ID-51A/E CPU. A partial reset will not clear
your call sign databases.

To do a partial reset of the CPU, do the following steps:

1. Push [MENU] .
2. P
 ush D-pad() to select the bottom item, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

3. Push D-pad() to select the bottom item, and

then push D-pad(Ent).

4. Push D-pad() to select the upper item, and

then push D-pad(Ent).

5. The dialog appears. Push D-pad() to select

the upper option, and then push D-pad(Ent).
- The transceiver displays “PARTIAL RESET,”
then the partial reset is completed.

16-87
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Sounds items
Volume Select (Default: All)
Sounds > Volume Select
Selects to adjust the audio output level of all bands together, all separately,
or just the BC Radio separately.
• All: The audio output level of the BC Radio, A band and B
band are adjusted together.
• BC Radio Separate: The audio output level of the BC Radio is separately
adjusted.
The audio output level of A band and B band are ad-
justed together.
• Separate: The audio output level of the BC Radio, A band and B
band are separately adjusted.

NOTE: When an EMR signal is received, the audio output level for A band
and/or B band may be set to the selected level in the EMR AF Level, de-
pending on this setting.
• The audio output level for the BC Radio is not changed, because the EMR function
is for the DV mode operation.

When “All” or “BC Radio Separate” is selected:

The audio output level for A band and B band is set to the selected level in
EMR AF Level.
When “Separate” is selected:
Either the audio output level for A band or B band that the signal is received
on, is set to the selected level in EMR AF Level.

BC Radio Level (Default: 0)

Sounds > BC Radio Level
Sets the initial audio output level difference between the BC Radio and the A
and B bands when “All” is set in Volume Select.
The adjustable range is +5 higher to –5 lower.
• +5 to +1: The BC Radio audio output level is higher than the VFO mode
audio.
• 0: The BC Radio audio output level is same as the VFO mode audio.
• –5 to –1: The BC Radio audio output level is lower than the VFO mode
audio.

Earphone Mode (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Earphone Mode
Turn the earphone mode ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turn OFF the earphone mode.
• ON: Turn ON the earphone mode.
While in the earphone mode, the audio volume level is automatically
adjusted to the comfortable level when the optional earphone is con-
nected to the [MIC/SP] jack.

16-88
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Sounds items (Continued)

Beep Level (Default: 3)

Sounds > Beep Level
Select a beep audio output level between 0 (OFF), 1 (minimum) and 9 (maxi-
mum).

Beep/Vol Level Link (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Beep/Vol Level Link
Select whether or not the beep output level can be adjusted by the [VOL]
control.
• OFF: The output level is fixed to the level set in Beep Level.
• ON: The output level can be adjusted by rotating [VOL].

Key-Touch Beep (Default: ON)

Sounds > Key-Touch Beep
Turn the confirmation beep tones ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF for silent operation.
• ON: A beep sounds when a key is pushed.

NOTE: The beep tone sounds regardless of this setting when:

- the power is turned ON
- a matched tone signal is received if the pocket beep is activated.
- the transceiver is automatically turned OFF. (The beep sounds before
powering OFF.)
- TOT (Time-Out Timer) function is activated. (Approximately 10 seconds
before the Time-Out Timer cuts off transmission.)
- the cloning read or write operation starts or finishes.
- a received signal stops the scan. (Scan Stop Beep)
- the communicating station finishes transmitting or the receive signal dis-
appears while in the digital mode operation. (Standby Beep)

Home CH Beep (Default: ON)

Sounds > Home CH beep
Turn the Home CH Beep ON or OFF.
• OFF: No beep.
• ON: When the specified Home CH is selected by rotating [DIAL], a beep
sounds.

NOTE: The Home CH frequency, memory or repeater can be respectively

selected. (p. 17-5)

16-89
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Sounds items (Continued)

Band Edge Beep (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Band Edge Beep
Turn the Band edge beep ON or OFF.
• OFF: Band edge beep is OFF.
• ON: When you tune into or out of the AIR, VHF and UHF band’s frequency
range with [DIAL], a beep sounds.

Scan Stop Beep (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Scan Stop Beep
Turn the scan stop beep ON or OFF.
• OFF: No beep sounds.
• ON: A beep sounds when a received signal stops the scan.

Standby Beep (Default: ON (to me:Alarm/High Tone))

Sounds > Standby Beep
Turn the standby beep function ON or OFF.
This function sounds a beep after a received signal disappears.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Turns ON the function to sound a beep.
• ON (to me: High Tone): Turns ON the function to sound a beep.
When a received signal addressed to your
call sign disappears, a high pitched beep
sounds. When any other received signal
disappears, a regular beep sounds.
• ON (to me: Alarm/High Tone): Turns ON the function to sound a beep.
 When a received signal addressed to
your call sign disappears, an alarm sound
(PiRoPiRoPiRo) sounds.
- If you release [PTT] and/or a signal is re-
ceived within 5 seconds, the alarm sound
changes to a high pitch beep sound when
the received signal disappears.
- If no signal is received for 5 seconds af-
ter you release PTT, the next signal ad-
dressed to your call sign will again sound
the alarm sound. When any other received
signal disappears, a regular beep sounds.

TIP:
• The standby beep sounds even when “OFF” is selected in Key-touch beep.
• The standby beep output level follows the Beep level setting.

16-90
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Sounds items (Continued)

Sub Band Mute (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Sub Band Mute
Select whether or not to mute the SUB band audio signal while receiving on
the MAIN band, and/or sound a beep when a signal disappears on the SUB
band.
• OFF: Disables the SUB band mute function.
• Mute: While receiving on the MAIN band, the SUB band audio sig-
nal is muted.
• Beep: When a signal disappears on the SUB band, a beep
sounds.
The beep sounds even if no signal is received on the MAIN
band.
• Mute & Beep: While receiving on the MAIN band, the SUB band audio sig-
nal is muted.
While receiving on the SUB band, and a signal disappears,
a beep sounds.
-
The beep sounds even if no signal is received on the MAIN
band.

Scope AF Output (Default: ON)

Sounds > Scope AF Output
Select the audio output option during a sweep by the Band Scope function.

• OFF: No audio is heard during the sweep.

• ON: The audio is heard during the sweep.

16-91
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Time set items

Date/Time
Time Set > Date/Time
Manually set the date and time that is displayed on the right hand corner of
the screen. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format.

Setting the date

qqPush D-pad(), and then push D-pad(Ent) to select “DATE”.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

wwPush and to move the cursor, and then select between year, month
and day to change.

Cursor

eeRotate [DIAL] to select each number.

rrRepeat steps w and e to enter the year, month and day, and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Setting the time

qqPush D-pad(), and then push D-pad(Ent) to select “TIME”.
wwPush and to move the cursor, and then select between hour and
minute to change.

Cursor

eeRotate [DIAL] to select each number.

rrRepeat steps w and e to enter the hour and minute, and then push D-
pad(Ent).

16-92
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Time set items (Continued)

GPS Time Correct (Default: Auto)

Time Set > GPS Time Correct
This function can correct its time by using the time information that a GPS
sentence contains.
It is corrected by calculating the received UTC (Universal Time of Coordi-
nated) time and the set [UTC Offset].
• OFF: The function is OFF.
• Auto: The function is ON.

UTC Offset (Default: ±0:00)

Time Set > UTC Offset
Set the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) and the
local time to between –14:00 and +14:00 in 00:05 steps.

Auto Power OFF (Default: OFF)

Time Set > Auto Power OFF
This function automatically turns OFF the power after no operation has not
been performed for the preset time.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• 30 ~ 120 min: Select the desired Auto Power OFF time between 30, 60, 90
and 120 minutes.

16-93
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■DV Gateway items

Enters the Terminal mode or Access Point mode.
See “About the DV Gateway function” on the Icom WEB site, http://www.icom.co.jp/world/ for details.
<<Terminal Mode>>
DV Gateway > <<Terminal Mode>>

The Terminal mode enables you to make a Gateway call through the internet
by connecting the optional OPC-2350LU to a PC (Windows®) or Android®
device.
In the Terminal mode, “<<Normal Mode>>” is displayed in “DV GATEWAY”
screen. To cancel the Terminal mode, push D-pad(Ent).
TIP: You can cancel the Terminal mode on the QUICK Menu screen.

<<Access Point Mode>>

DV Gateway > <<Access Point Mode>>

The Access Point mode enables the D-STAR transceiver to make a Gateway
call through an ID-51A/E by connecting the optional OPC-2350LU to a PC
(Windows®) or Android® device.
In the Terminal mode, “<<Normal Mode>>” is displayed in “DV GATEWAY”
screen. To cancel the Terminal mode, push D-pad(Ent).
TIP: You can cancel the Terminal mode on the QUICK Menu screen.

16-94
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■SD Card items

Settings and functions for microSD card.
See Section 2 for details.
Load Setting
SD Card > Load Setting
Select from the list when you load the setting file.

Save Setting
SD Card > Save Setting
Save the setting file.

Import/Export
SD Card > Import/Export

Import or Export Your Call Sign, Repeater List, and GPS memory in the “csv”
format.
• Import: Imports data to the transceiver.
• Export: Exports data to the transceiver.

Separator/Decimal (Default: Sep [,] Dec [.]*)

SD Card > Import/Export > CSV Format > Separator/Decimal

Select the separator and the decimal character for the CSV format.
• Sep [,] Dec [.] : Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.” for the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [.] : Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.” for the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [;] : Separator is “;” and Decimal is “;” for the CSV format.

* The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

Date (Default: mm/dd/yyyy*)

SD Card > Import/Export > CSV Format > Date
Select the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,” “mm/dd/yyyy” and “dd/mm/
yyyy.” (y: year, m: month, d: day)

* The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

16-95
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ SD Card (Continued)

SD Card Info
SD Card > SD Card Info
Displays the SD card’s free space and its remaining recording time.

Format
SD Card > Format
Formats the microSD care, deleting all data.

Unmount
SD Card > Unmount
Electrically unmounts the microSD card while the power is ON.

16-96
Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■Others items
Voltage
Others > Information > Voltage
Shows the battery voltage of the attached Li-ion battery pack or external
power source.
When the Li-ion battery pack is attached, the remaining battery voltage is
shown in eleven level steps.
When the optional battery case is attached, the battery voltage is shown.

Version
Others > Information > Version
Shows the transceiver firmware’s version number.

Clone Mode
Others > Clone > Clone Mode
Select to read or write the CS-51PLUS2 data from or to the PC, and/or to
receive data from a Master transceiver.
See page 17-21 for details.

Clone Master Mode

Others > Clone > Clone Master Mode
Select to write your ID-51A/E (Master) data to another ID-51A/E (Sub).
See page 17-21 for details.

16-97
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Other items (Continued)

Partial Reset
Others > Reset > Partial Reset
A Partial reset resets operating settings to their default values (VFO frequen-
cy, VFO settings, menu contents) without clearing the items below:
• Memory channel contents
• Scan Edge contents
• Call channel contents
• Call sign memories
• Message data
• DTMF memory contents
• GPS Memory contents
• Repeater List
• BC Radio Memory

qqAfter selecting “Partial Reset,” the “Partial Reset?” dialog appears. Push
D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwThe transceiver displays "PARTIAL RESET," then the partial reset is com-
pleted.

16-98
 Previous view

16 MENU SCREEN

■■ Other items (Continued)

All Reset
Others > Reset > All Reset
Reset the CPU, if the internal CPU malfunctions due to static electricity, and
so on. All reset clears all entries and returns all settings to their factory de-
faults.
Therefore, after the All resetting, you cannot use the transceiver in the DR
function until you reprogram the Repeater List.

TIP: Before the All resetting, we recommend you save the data you pur-
chased onto a microSD card. See page 2-6 for details.

qqAfter selecting “All Reset,” the “All Reset?” dialog appears.

Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
wwThe “Clears all settings and memories. Disables the DR function.” dialog
appears. Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eeThe transceiver displays "ALL RESET," then the partial reset is complet-
ed.

16-99
Previous view

Section 17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Voice TX function............................................................... 17-2
DD Recording...................................................................... 17-2
DD The recorded voice audio playing back......................... 17-2
DD To transmit the recorded voice audio............................. 17-3
DD Repeat Time setting...................................................... 17-4
DD TX Monitor function....................................................... 17-4
■■ Home CH Beep function.................................................... 17-5
DD Home CH setting........................................................... 17-5
DD Home CH operation....................................................... 17-5
■■ Speech function................................................................. 17-6
DD [DIAL] speech function setting....................................... 17-6
DD Mode speech function setting........................................ 17-7
■■ Using the DTMF memory.................................................. 17-8
DD DTMF code programming............................................. 17-8
DD Monitoring the stored DTMF code................................. 17-9
DD DTMF code transmission............................................ 17-10
DD DTMF code transmission (Direct Input)....................... 17-11
DD Setting DTMF transfer speed...................................... 17-12
■■ Tone squelch operation................................................... 17-13
DD Tone squelch frequency setting and operation............ 17-13
■■ DTCS squelch operation................................................. 17-15
DD DTCS code setting and operation............................... 17-15
■■ Cloning function............................................................... 17-17
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD card... 17-17
DD Cloning from a PC using a microSD card.................... 17-20
DD Cloning from a PC using an optional data cable......... 17-20
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a cable........ 17-21
■■ CI-V information.............................................................. 17-22
DD CI-V data setting.......................................................... 17-22
DD CI-V connection example............................................ 17-22
DD Data format.................................................................. 17-22
DD Command table........................................................... 17-23

17-1
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Voice TX function
The Voice TX function transmits the recorded audio on
a microSD card once, or repeatedly, for up to 10 min-
utes at a specified interval.

TIP: When the key function [Voice TX] is assigned

to the key on the optional HM-75LS speaker-micro-
phone, the voice audio recorded onto the microSD
can be transmitted when the key is pushed.

NOTE: Be sure to insert a microSD card to the trans-

ceiver’s [micro SD] slot before starting to record a
voice audio.

DDRecording
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice TX”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Record,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
rrPush [PTT] to start recording. While recording
• After releasing [PTT], the recording is cancelled.
• The maximum record time is 1 minute.
• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) from your Audio level is displayed
mouth, then speak at your normal voice level.
• Only one announcement can be recorded. The current
contents will be overwritten if you record again.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDThe recorded voice audio playing back

The recorded voice audio for the Voice TX function can
be played back.
Recording time
qqPush [MENU] . is displayed
wwP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice TX”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “Record,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to start the playback. While playing back
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

When no microSD card is inserted: TIP: You can delete the recorded audio.
When no microSD card is in- ➥➥On the DV AUTO REPLY screen, push [QUICK]
serted, this error message is , and then push D-pad(Ent).
displayed.

17-2
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Voice TX function (Continued)

DDTo transmit the recorded voice audio
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice TX”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “<<Single TX>>” or “<<Re-

peat TX>>,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
<<Single TX>>
The transceiver transmits the recorded voice audio
once.
<<Repeat TX>>
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
voice audio for up to 10 minutes at the interval speci-
fied in “Repeat Time.”
• The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted for up
to 10 minutes. Even if 10 minutes pass while transmitting,
the voice audio is completely transmitted.
•O  ne of the following will cancel the transmission.
Blinks while
- Push [PTT].
transmitting.
- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.
-P  ush any key (except for [POWER]).
- Rotate [DIAL].
• Once the Repeat TX is sent, the transceiver pauses until
the end of the “Repeat Time,” then transmits again. After
the second transmission, the Repeat TX continues paus-
ing, if receiving a signal, even if the Busy Lockout is ON.
But if the squelch is manually opened in the FM mode,
the voice audio is repeatedly transmitted, according to
the repeat time setting. • Voice TX Waiting screen for <<Repeat TX>>
rrPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

The Voice TX can be selected on the QUICK Menu

screen.

➥➥Push [QUICK] , and then push D-pad() to se-

lect “Voice TX.”

17-3
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Voice TX function (Continued)

DDRepeat Time setting
Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 15 seconds (in
1 second steps) for the voice repeat transmission.
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
voice audio at this interval.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice TX),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice TX > TX Set> Repeat Time)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeat interval to be-
tween 1 and 15 seconds (in 1 second steps).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDTX Monitor function

Turn the TX Monitor function ON or OFF. (Default: ON)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice TX),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Voice TX > TX Set> TX Monitor)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above and
push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent) to enter,
one or more times until the last screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to turn the TX Monitor function ON
or OFF.
• OFF: The TX voice audio is not output from the speaker.
• ON: The TX voice audio is output from the speaker.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

17-4
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Home CH Beep function

When the specified Home CH is selected by rotating
[DIAL], a beep sounds.
You will know the Home CH selection without looking
at the display.
Example: Set “146.010 MHz” frequency in the VFO as
DDHome CH setting the Home CH.
The Home CH is set in each of the VFO mode, Memory
mode and DR screen of the transceiver.

qqSelect a frequency to be set as the Home CH. Select a

• While on the DR screen, select “FROM.” frequency
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “Home CH Set,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Set Frequency,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to set the Home CH, and exit the
QUICK Menu.
• While on the DR screen, select “Set Repeater,” or while in
the Memory mode, select “Set Channel.”

DDHome CH operation
After setting the Home CH, rotate [DIAL] in the speci-
fied mode.
When the Home CH is selected, a beep sounds.

Push D-pad(Ent) to
set the Home CH.
Beep

TIP: When the key function [Home CH] is assigned

to the key on the optional HM-75LS speaker-micro-
phone, the specified Home CH can be selected when
the key is pushed.

TIP: You can clear the Home CH setting.

➥➥Push D-pad() to select “Clear” in the step r as
described above, and then push D-pad(Ent).

17-5
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Speech function Example: When “Dallas” (K5TIT B) is selected

in “FROM,” hold down [SPCH]
When holding down [SPCH] , the Speech function
audibly announces the displayed frequency and oper-
ating mode in the VFO, Memory or Call channel modes,
or call sign on the DR screen.
Also, other speech functions, [DIAL] speech function
and Mode speech function can be used.
NOTE: When a call is received during an announce-
ment in the DV mode, the received audio will be mut-
ed, and no audio is recorded onto the microSD card.
Except in the DV mode, the received audio will be re- IT B
K5T
corded, even during an announcement.

DD[DIAL] speech function setting

The Dial Speech function enables the transceiver to
announce the frequency or repeater call sign that is se-
lected by rotating [DIAL].

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “DIAL SPEECH,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

NOTE: If a call is received during an announcement,

the announcement is cancelled, and the received au-
dio is heard.

The detail settings for the Speech functions

You can set the details settings for the Speech func-
tions in the Menu screen.
When rotating [DIAL] after setting
• SPEECH Language (p. 16-67) the Dial Speech function.
Set the speech language to English or Japanese.
(MENU > SPEECH > SPEECH Language)

• Alphabet (p. 16-67)

Select either “Normal” or “Phonetic Code” to announce
the alphabet character.
(MENU > SPEECH > Alphabet)

• SPEECH Speed (p. 16-67)

Set the speech speed to Low (slow) or High (fast).
IT B
(MENU > SPEECH > SPEECH Speed) K5T

• SPEECH Level (p. 16-67)

Enter a volume level number between 0 (minimum)
and 9 (maximum) for the voice synthesizer.
(MENU > SPEECH > SPEECH Level)

17-6
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDMode speech function setting

The Mode Speech function enables the transceiver to
announce the selected operating mode when the mode
switch is pushed.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “MODE SPEECH,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

When pushing [MODE] after setting the

Mode Speech function.

FM

17-7
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Using the DTMF memory

The transceiver can stores up to 16 channels of DTMF Example: Stores the DTMF code, “012345” into the
memory with 24-digit DTMF code. DTMF memory channel “d0.”

DDDTMF code programming

qqPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T-
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “DTMF Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• DTMF memory channel list (d0 to d#) is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired DTMF memory
channel, then push [QUICK] .
ttP ush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter DTMF memory edit mode.
yyRotate [DIAL] to select the desired code, the push
D-pad(Ent) to set the code.
Repeat the above step to enter the desired DTMF
codes.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
When the cursor is on the 24th digit, the cursor can be
moved to backward.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
uuWhen all digits are set, push D-pad(Ent).
•
The entered DTMF codes are stored into the DTMF
memory channel, and the transceiver automatically re-
turns to DTMF memory screen.
iiP
 ush [MENU] to exit the DTMF memory edit
mode.
DTMF memory edit mode

TIP: You can clear the programmed DTMF code.

➥➥Push D-pad() to select “Clear” in the step r as
described above, and then push D-pad(Ent)

Cursor

Stored DTMF code

17-8
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory

DDMonitoring the stored DTMF code

Select the desired DTMF memory channel to be moni-
tored in DTMF memory screen, then push [SQL].
The stored DTMF code sounds.
• DTMF code can also be monitored with the following
steps: Select the desired DTMF memory channel to
be monitored, then push [QUICK] .
P
 ush D-pad() to select “DTMF Monitor,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to monitor the selected DTMF code.

[SQL]

DTMF code sounds

17-9
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory (Continued)

DDDTMF code transmission
qqPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen. Example: Set the DTMF code “012345” stored in DTMF
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T- memory channel “d1” for transmission.
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “DTMF Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• DTMF memory channel list (d0 to d#) is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired DTMF memory
channel, then push D-pad(Ent).
• Beeps sound, and the selected DTMF channel is set for
transmission.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
yyWhile holding down [PTT], push [SQL] to transmit
the selected DTMF code.
•
The transceiver keeps transmitting until the all pro-
grammed DTMF code is transmitted even [PTT] is re-
leased.

About 1750 Hz tone

When “T-CALL” is selected in the DTMF MEMORY
DTMF code to be
screen, 1750 Hz tone can be transmitted. transmitted.
• While holding down [PTT], push [SQL] to transmit 1750
Hz tone is transmitted.
The tone is transmitted while holding down [SQL].
• The 1750 Hz tone can be heard from a speaker.

The DTMF code transmission can be made on the

QUICK Menu screen.

q Push [QUICK] , and then push D-pad() to se-

lect “DTMF TX,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
w Push D-pad() to select the desired DTMF mem-
ory channel, and then push D-pad(Ent).

DTMF code scrolls

during transmission.

17-10
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory (Continued)

DDDTMF code transmission (Direct Input) Example: Directly input the DTMF code “013579AB”
qqPush [QUICK] . for transmission.
wwPush D-pad() to select “Direct Input,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The DTMF code direct input screen is displayed.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eeRotate [DIAL] to select the desired code, then push

D-pad(Ent) to set the code.
Repeat the above step to enter the desired DTMF
codes.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor forward or backward.
When the cursor is on the 24th digit, the cursor can be
Select
moved to backward.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
rrWhen all digits are set, push D-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver automatically transmits the programmed
DTMF code.

DTMF code direct

input screen

DTMF code scrolls

during transmission.

17-11
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory (Continued)

DDSetting DTMF transfer speed
The DTMF transfer speed can be selected. Example: Set the DTMF transfer speed to 300 milli-
seconds.
qqPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T-
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “DTMF Speed,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select a desired transfer speed,
then push D-pad(Ent)
• 100ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 100 millisec-
onds per code.
5 characters per second.
• 200ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 200 millisec-
onds per code.
2.5 characters per second.
• 300ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 300 millisec-
onds per code.
1.6 characters per second.
• 500ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 500 millisec-
onds per code.
1 character per second.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

o, P
a Pa–
Pi, P , Po–,
Pi–

When “100ms” is se- When “500ms” is se-

lected, the DTMF trans- lected, the DTMF trans-
fer speed is fast. fer speed is slow.

17-12
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Tone squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal
containing a matching subaudible tone in the FM or FM Select FM or
narrow mode. You can silently wait for calls from others FM-N mode.
using the same tone. Set a desired op-
Also, reversed tone squelch function is ready to mute erating frequency.
the squelch when a signal containing a matched sub-
audible tone.

DDTone squelch frequency setting and op-

eration
qqPush [V/MHz] once or more times to select the
VFO mode.
wwPush [MODE] once or more times to select the
FM or FM-N (FM narrow) mode.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select a desired operating frequency.
rrPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
ttP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE…”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

yyPush D-pad() to select “TSQL Freq,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The selected tone squelch frequency is displayed.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired tone squelch fre-
quency, then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: 100.0 Hz)
• Select a tone squelch frequency between 67.0 and 254.1
Hz.

TIP: To return to the default tone squelch frequency,

push [QUICK] in the step y as described above,
and then push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued to the step i on the next page

17-13
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Tone squelch operation

DD Tone squelch frequency setting and operation (Continued)
Continued from step u on the previous page.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
ooPush [QUICK] .
!0Push D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!1 Push D-pad() to select the squelch type.

• TSQLS:  Enables the tone squelch with the Pocket
Beep function.
• TSQL: Enables the Tone Squelch function.
• TSQL-R: Enables the Reverse Tone Squelch function.
• TONE(T)/DTCS(R): (“T-DTCS” appears, and “T” blinks.)
When you transmit, the selected subaudible
tone is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the DTCS squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
DTCS code and polarity. (Audio is heard)
• DTCS(T)-TSQL(R): (“D-TSQL” appears, and “D” blinks.)
When you transmit, the selected DTCS code
is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the tone squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
tone frequency. (Audio is heard)
• TONE(T)-TSQL(R) : (“T-TSQL” appears, and “T” blinks.)
When you transmit, the selected subaudible
tone is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the tone squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
tone frequency. (Audio is heard)
!2 Push D-pad(Ent) to set the tone squelch function,
and then close the QUICK Menu screen.
!3 Holding down [PTT] and call a desired station.
Operate in the normal way.

TIP: A beep sounds when a call is received. Appears.

If “TSQLS” is selected in step !1, beeps sound • When reversed tone
for 30 seconds and the icon “S” blinks when a call squelch is selected
with the matched tone signal is received. in step !,1 “TSQL-R”
➥➥After receiving the call, hold down [PTT] within icon appears.
30 seconds then start conversation, or push
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the pocket beep function
(“S” icon disappears). After that, the transceiver
selects regular tone squelch operation.
When a call with “TSQLS”
is received.

...
,Beep
eep
p, B
Bee

17-14
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■DTCS squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a sig-
nal containing a matching DTCS code in the FM or FM
narrow mode. You can silently wait for calls from others
using the same tone. Select FM or
Also, reversed tone squelch function is ready to mutes FM-N mode.
the squelch when a signal containing a matched DTCS Set a desired op-
code. erating frequency.

DDDTCS code setting and operation

qqPush [V/MHz] once or more times to select the
VFO mode.
wwPush [MODE] once or more times to select the
FM or FM-N (FM narrow) mode.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select a desired operating frequency.
rrPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
ttP ush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE…”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

yyPush D-pad() to select “DTCS Code,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• The selected tone squelch frequency is displayed.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired DTCS code, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: 125)
• Select a DTCS code between 023 and 754.

TIP: To return to the default code, push [QUICK]

in the step y as described above, and then push D-
pad(Ent).

☞ Continued to the step i on the next page

17-15
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Tone squelch operation

DD DTCS code setting and operation (Continued)
Continued from step u on the previous page.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
ooPush [QUICK] .
!0Push D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!1 Push D-pad() to select the tone squelch type.

• DTCSS: Enables the DTCS squelch with the Pocket
Beep function.
• DTCS: Enables the DTCS Squelch function.
• DTCS-R: Enables the Reverse DTCS Squelch function.
• DTCS(T): (“DTCS” blinks)
When you transmit, the selected DTCS code
is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the function is OFF.
• TONE(T)/DTCS(R): (“T-DTCS” appears, and “T” blinks.)
When you transmit, the selected subaudible
tone is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the DTCS squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
DTCS code and polarity. (Audio is heard)
• DTCS(T)-TSQL(R): (“D-TSQL” appears, and “D” blinks.)
When you transmit, the selected DTCS code
is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the tone squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
tone frequency. (Audio is heard)
!2 Push D-pad(Ent) to set the DTCS squelch function,
and then close the QUICK Menu screen.
!3 Holding down [PTT] and call a desired station.
• Operate in the normal way.

TIP: Sounds beep when a call is received.

If “DTCSS” is selected in step !1, beeps sound
Appears.
for 30 seconds and the icon “S” blinks when a call
• When reversed tone
with the matched DTCS code signal is received. squelch is selected
➥➥ After receiving a call, hold down [PTT] within in step !,1 “DTCS-R”
30 seconds then start conversation, or push icon appears.
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the pocket beep function
(“S” icon disappears). After that, the transceiv-
er selects regular DTCS squelch operation. If no
operation is performed within 30 seconds, beeps
stop sounding but the “S” icon blinking remains.

When a call with “TSQLS”

is received.

p...
p, Bee
p, Bee
Bee

17-16
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Cloning function
The transceiver has data cloning capability. This func-
TIP: You can convert the “icf” file between the cur-
tion is useful when you want to copy all of the pro-
rent model format (ID-51PLUS2) and the old model
grammed contents from one transceiver to another.
format (ID-51 or ID-51PLUS) with the CS-51PLUS2.
PC cloning is also possible.
See the CS-51PLUS2 INSTRUCTIONS contained in
the CD for details.

•T
 ransceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD • Cloning from a PC using a microSD card
card (described on this page) (see page 17-20)
CS-51PLUS2 CS-51PLUS2

Or

• Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a cable • Cloning from a PC using an optional data cable
(see page 17-21) (see page 17-20)
CS-51PLUS2

DDTransceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD card

In this caption, describes cloning method using the mi-
croSD card. Memory channel contents, MENU item set-
tings and Repeater List can be stored onto a microSD card.
Recorded voice memories are not included in the clon-
ing data. To play back the master transceiver’s voice
memory, insert the microSD card into the sub trans-
ceiver, or make a copy onto the sub transceiver’s mi-
croSD card using a PC.
*Describes when the microSD card has already been inserted.

1. S
aving the master transceiver’s setting data
onto the microSD card.
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()
SAVE SETTING screen
eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then
push D-pad(Ent). Select “<<New File>>”
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The FILE NAME screen is displayed.
ttThe file name is automatically named in the following
format:
•
“Setyyyymmdd_xx” (yyyy:Year, mm:month, dd:day, xx:
serial number)
• Example: When the 2nd file is saved on
1st October, 2016, the file is named
“Set20161001_02.”
• If you want to change the file name, see page 2-8 for
entry details. ☞☞Continued on the next page
17-17
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD
card (Continued)
yyPush D-pad(Ent) to set the file name.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

The confirmation screen “Save file?” appears.

uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to save.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2. Remove the microSD card from the master trans-

ceiver, and then insert it into the sub transceiv- • Removing the microSD card
er.
ooHold down the master transceiver’s [ ] to turn OFF
the power.
!0 Remove the microSD card from the master trans-
ceiver as shown to the right.
!1 Attach the removed microSD card to the sub trans-
ceiver, then hold down the sub transceiver’s [ ] to
turn ON the power.

NEVER forcibly or inversely insert the card.

It will damage the card and/or the slot.

Slot cover Slot cover

Push the microSD card Pull the microSD
until a click sounds. card out.

17-18
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD
card (Continued)
3. Loads the setting data into the sub transceiver.
!2 Push [MENU] .
!3 P
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

!4 Push D-pad() to select “Load Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
!5 Push D-pad() to select the desired setting file, and
then push D-pad(Ent). Selecting the file which
!6 Push D-pad() to select the desired loading content, is saved by the master
as shown below. transceiver.
• ALL: Loads all memory channels, item
settings in the menu list and the
Select “ALL” when all
Repeater List into the transceiv-
memory channels,
er.
MENU item settings
• Except My Station: Loads all memory channels, item
and Repeater List to
settings in the menu list except
be copied.
MY call signs and the Repeater
List into the transceiver.
• Repeater List Only: Loads only the Repeater List into
the transceiver.
!7 Push D-pad(Ent).
• The “Keep ‘SKIP’ setting in Repeater List?” appears.
!8 Push D-pad() to select “YES” or “No.”
• When “Yes” is selected, the skip setting of the Repeater
List is retained. (p. 9-39)
!9 Push D-pad(Ent).
• “Load file?” appears.
@0 Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to start the file check.
• While checking the file, “FILE CHECKING” and a prog-
ress bar are displayed.
@1 After checking, settings data loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-
played.
@2 After loading, “COMPLETED! Reboot the ID-51” ap-
pears.
To complete the loaded, reboot the transceiver.

Reboot the transceiver

to complete the clon-
ing/data loading.

17-19
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function (Continued)

DDCloning from a PC using a microSD card
The cloning can be performed from a PC using a mi- • Connections
CS-51PLUS2 CS-51PLUS2
croSD card.

Set a desired memory channels, MENU item settings

and Repeater List by the CS-51PLUS2 cloning soft-
ware (contained in the CD), and save them in an “icf” Or Card reader
file format. Copy the “icf” file into the “Setting” folder in
the “ID-51” folder of the microSD card.

• microSD card configuration

Attach the microSD card that includes the “icf” file, then
load it to complete the cloning.
Click
Csv GpsMemory

Gps RptList

QsoLog YourMemory
ID-51
Reply

RxLog
Click
Setting

Voice yyyymmdd

yyyymmdd

VoiceRec yyyymmdd

yyyymmdd Click
VoiceTx

Copy the
“icf” file.
DDCloning from a PC using an optional data cable
Cloning can be performed using the CS-51PLUS2
(contained in the CD) and the optional data communi-
cation cable.
See the CS-51PLUS2 instruction manual contained in
the CD and the data communication cable’s instruction
manual (downloaded from the Icom WEB site; http://www.
icom.co.jp/world/). NOTE: When using the optional data communica-
• Connections
tion cable
"Clone Mode" • Before cloning, select “PTT” option in DV Data TX
To the [DATA] jack CS-51PLUS2
item. If “Auto” is selected, the transceiver may trans-
mit with the cloning data.
OPC-2218LU (Option)
(DV Set > DV Data TX)
• Before cloning, select the Clone mode in the MENU
OPC-2350LU (Option)
screen.
Transceiver To a [USB] port
PC (Other > Clone Mode)

17-20
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function (Continued)

DDTransceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a cable
Connects two transceivers (master and sub transceiv- • Connections
er) using a stereo audio cable (purchase separately). Master transceiver Sub transceiver
Use the stereo audio cable (3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8″), purchase (sends the cloning data) (receives the cloning data)
separately.
*Depending on the stereo audio cable, it may not be used for
3.5 mm (d); 1⁄8″
cloning. Stereo plug

1. Transceiver connection
qqHold down [ ] to turn OFF the both master and sub to [SP] jack to [SP] jack
transceivers.
wwConnect a stereo audio cable between master and
sub transceiver, as shown to the right.
eeHold down [ ] to turn ON the both master and sub • Stereo plug (purchase locally)
transceivers.

2. Setting the Sub transceiver Less than 4.5 mm; 0.17″

rrOn the sub transceiver, push [MENU] .

ttP  ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Others”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen. • Screen of the master transceiver
yyP  ush D-pad() to select “Clone,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). “CLONE” screen
uuPush D-pad() to select “Clone Mode,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• “Go to the Clone Mode?” appears.
iiPush D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The clone mode screen appears.

3. Setting the Master transceiver

ooOn the master transceiver, push [MENU] .
!0 Push D-pad() to select the root item (“Others”), “CLONE-OUT” screen
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen. (While sending data)
!1 Push D-pad() to select “Clone,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
!2 Push D-pad() to select “Clone Master Mode,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• “Go to the Clone Master Mode?” appears.
!3 Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The clone master mode screen appears.
!4 Push [PTT] on the master transceiver.
• On the sub transceiver, the “CLONE-IN” screen ap-
Return to the
pears.
• On the master transceiver, the “CLONE-OUT” screen ap-
“CLONE” screen
pears.
!5 When cloning is completed, the master transceiver
returns to the clone master mode screen.
• The sub transceiver displays the “CLONE End” screen.
• If you have another transceiver to clone, connect it and
then push [PTT] of the master transceiver.
!6 Reboot the sub transceiver to enable the cloned set-
tings.

17-21
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■CI-V information
DDCI-V data setting
Power source
Set the ID-51A/E’s address, data transferring speed 9V15VDC
and transceive function. See page 16-78 to set the CI-V
setting using the MENU list screen.
Function > CI-V

DDCI-V connection example

The transceiver can be connected through an optional RS-232C personal
computer
CT-17 ci-v level converter to a PC equipped with an cable
RS-232C port. CT-17
The Icom Communications Interface-V (CI-V) controls
the transceiver.
Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be con-
nected to the PC. 2-conductor 3.5(d) mm
plug must be used.
See the CT-17 instruction manual for details of remotely 3-conductor 3.5(d) mm
controlling a transceivers and receivers. plug must be used.
ID-51A/E

*Use the cable illustrated to the right. No received audio is

heard when the supplied control cable, that comes with CT-
¡Connections (ID-51A/E side)
17, is used for the connection. SP
SP GND
GND
3.5(d)mm SP
I/O
I/O Less than 4.5(d)mm
*No speaker is necessary for the CT-17 side.

DDData format
The CI-V system can be operated using the following
data formats. Data formats differ, depending on the
command numbers. A data area or sub command is
added to some commands.
Controller to ID-51A/E
q w e r t y u

FE FE 86 E0 Cn Sc Data area FD
(see the data content description)
BCD code data such as
Sub command number

for frequency, memory

(see the command table)

(see the command table)

Command number

End of message
default address

default address

number entry
Transceiver’s

Controller’s
code (fixed)

code (fixed)
Preamble

FE FE E0 86 Cn Sc Data area FD
q w e r* t y u
ID-51A/E to controller
*The reply messages from the transceiver are the command “FB” (OK)
or “FA” (NG).

17-22
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

DDCommand table
Cmd. Sub Data Cmd. Sub Data
Description Description
cmd. cmd.
00 see p. 17-24 Send operating frequency for transceive 1B 00 see p. 17-24 Send/read Repeater tone frequency
01 see p. 17-24 Send operating mode for transceive 01 see p. 17-24 Send/read Tone squelch frequency
03 see p. 17-24 Read operating frequency 02 see p. 17-25 Send/read DTCS code and polarity
04 see p. 17-24 Read operating mode 07 see p. 17-25 Send/read CSQL code (DV mode)
05 see p. 17-24 Send operating frequency 1C 00 00 Send/read Transceiver’s status (RX)
06 see p. 17-24 Send operating mode 01 Send/read Transceiver’s status (TX)
07 Select the VFO mode 1F 00 see p. 17-25 Send/read DV MY call sign
D0 Select A band 01 see p. 17-25 Send/read DV TX call signs
Dualwatch: Set the Main band as the A band 02 see p. 17-25 Send/read DV TX message
Single watch: Select the A band
20 00 00 00*3 Send/read Auto DV RX Call signs output OFF
D1 Select B band
Dualwatch: Set the Main band as the B band 01*3 Send/read Auto DV RX Call signs output ON
Single watch: Select the B band 01 see p. 17-26 Output DV RX Call signs
0C see p. 17-24 Read frequency offset*1 02 see p. 17-26 Read DV RX Call signs
0D see p. 17-24 Send frequency offset 01 00 00*3 Send/read Auto DV RX message output OFF
0F Read duplex setting 01*3 Send/read Auto DV RX message output ON
(10= simplex, 11= DUP–, 12= DUP+) 01 see p. 17-26 Output DV RX message
10 Set simplex operation 02 see p. 17-26 Read DV RX message
11 Set DUP– operation 02 00 00*3 Send/read Auto DV RX status output OFF
12 Set DUP+ operation 01*3 Send/read Auto DV RX status output ON
11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF (AIR band) 01 see p. 17-25 Output DV RX status
30 Send/read 30 dB attenuator (AIR band) 02 see p. 17-25 Read DV RX status
14 01 see p. 17-24 Send/read audio output level
03 00 00 Send/read Auto DV RX GPS/D-PRS data
03 see p. 17-24 Send/read squelch level output OFF
0A see p. 17-24 Send/read RF power setting 01 Send/read Auto DV RX GPS/D-PRS data
0B see p. 17-24 Send/read external microphone gain. output ON
16 see p. 17-24 Send/read VOX gain. 01 see p. 17-26 Output DV RX GPS/D-PRS data for transceive
15 01 00 Read noise/S-meter squelch status (squelch ~ p. 17-28
close) 02 see p. 17-26 Read DV RX GPS/D-PRS data for transceive
01 Read noise/S-meter squelch status (squelch ~ p. 17-28
open) 04 00 00 Send/read Auto DV RX GPS/D-PRS mes-
02 0000 to sage output OFF
Read S-meter level (0000= S0, 0170= S9)
0255 01 Send/read Auto DV RX GPS/D-PRS mes-
05 00 Read tone squelch and RF squelch status sage output ON
(squelch close) 01 see p. 17-28 Output DV RX GPS/D-PRS message for transceive
01 Read tone squelch and RF squelch status 02 see p. 17-28 Read DV RX GPS/D-PRS message for transceive
(squelch open) 22 00 see p. 17-28 Send/read DV TX data (Up to 30 bytes)
11 Read RF power meter 01 00 00 Send/read Auto DV RX data output OFF
0000 to
(0005= S-LOW, 0026= LOW1, 0051= LOW2,
0255 01 Send/read Auto DV RX data output ON
0128= MID, 0255= HIGH)
01 see p. 17-28 Send/read DV RX data (Up to 30 byte)
16 42 00 Send/read Repeater tone OFF
02 00, 01 Send/read DV data TX setting (00=PTT, 01=Auto)
01 Send/read Repeater tone ON
03 00, 01 Send/read DV fast data setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
43 00 Send/read Tone squelch OFF
04 00, 01 Send/read GPS Data Speed setting
01 Send/read Tone squelch ON
(00=Slow, 01=Fast)
02 Send/read Reversed Tone squelch ON
05 00~10 Send/read TX Delay (PTT) setting
46 00 Send/read VOX function OFF (00=OFF, 01=1 sec. ~ 10=10 sec.)
01 Send/read VOX function ON
4B 00 Send/read DTCS OFF
01 Send/read DTCS ON
02 Send/read Reversed DTCS ON
59 00 Send/read Sub band OFF *1: Less than 100 Hz is omitted.
01 Send/read Sub band ON *2: When sending the power ON command (18 01), the command
5B 00 Send/read DSQL/CSQL OFF (DV mode only) “FE” must be sent before the basic format.
01 Send/read DSQL ON (DV mode only) • 19200bps: 50 • 9600bps: 26 • 4800bps: 14
02 Send/read CSQL ON (DV mode only) • 1200bps: 5 • 300bps: 3
5C 00, 01, 02 Send/read GPS TX mode Example: When operating with 4800 bps
(00= OFF, 01= D-PRS, 02= NMEA) q w e r t u
5D 00 to 09 Send Tone setting
(00= OFF, 01= TONE, 02= TSQL, 03=DTCS, F E F E F E 8 6 E O 1 8 0 1 F D
04=TSQL-R, 05=DTCS-R, 06=DTCS(T), ×14
07=TONE(T)/DTCS(R), 08=DTCS(T)/TSQL(R),
09=TONE(T)/TSQL(R)) q Preamble code (fixed) w Transceiver’s default address
18 00 Turning the transceiver power OFF e Controller’s default address r Command number
01 Turning the transceiver power ON*2 t Sub command number u End of message code (fixed)
19 00 Read transceiver ID. *3: Output setting is automatically turned OFF after turning the power
OFF, then ON.
17-23
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information
DD Command table (Continued)
Cmd. Sub Data
Description
• Audio output level setting
cmd. Command: 1401
23 00 see p. 17-28 Read the position VOL0 VOL1 VOL2 VOL3 VOL4
01 00 Send/read the internal GPS OFF 0000 ~ 0005 0006 ~ 0012 0013 ~ 0018 0019 ~ 0025 0026 ~ 0031
01 Send/read the internal GPS ON VOL5 VOL6 VOL7 VOL8 VOL9
03 Send/read the manual input 0032 ~ 0037 0038 ~ 0044 0045 ~ 0050 0051 ~ 0057 0058 ~ 0063
VOL10 VOL11 VOL12 VOL13 VOL14
02 see p. 17-28 Send/read manually input position
0064 ~ 0069 0070 ~ 0076 0077 ~ 0082 0083 ~ 0089 0090 ~ 0095
24 00 00 00 Send/read TX output power setting OFF
VOL15 VOL16 VOL17 VOL18 VOL19
01 Send/read TX output power setting ON 0096 ~ 0101 0102 ~ 0108 0109 ~ 0114 0115 ~ 0121 0122 ~ 0127
01 00 TX output power setting OFF for transceive VOL20 VOL21 VOL22 VOL23 VOL24
01 TX output power setting ON for transceive 0128 ~ 0133 0134 ~ 0140 0141 ~ 0146 0147 ~ 0153 0154 ~ 0159
VOL25 VOL26 VOL27 VOL28 VOL29
0160 ~ 0165 0166 ~ 0172 0173 ~ 0178 0179 ~ 0185 0186 ~ 0191
VOL30 VOL31 VOL32 VOL33 VOL34
0192 ~ 0197 0198 ~ 0204 0205 ~ 0210 0211 ~ 0217 0218 ~ 0223
• Receive frequency setting VOL35 VOL36 VOL37 VOL38 VOL39
Command: 00, 03, 05 0224 ~ 0229 0230 ~ 0236 0237 ~ 0242 0243 ~ 0249 0250 ~ 0255

q w e r t
X 0 X X X X X X 0 X

• Squelch level setting

(according to the 100 Hz digit)

Command: 1403
OPEN AUTO LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3
100 Hz digit0,2 , 5, 7

0000 ~ 0022 0023 ~ 0046 0047 ~ 0069 0070 ~ 0092 0093 ~ 0115
LEVEL4 LEVEL5 LEVEL6 LEVEL7 LEVEL8
10 MHz digit 0~9

100 MHz digit0~4

100 kHz digit0~9

1 MHz digit 0~9

1000 MHz digit0

10 kHz digit0~9

0116 ~ 0139 0140 ~ 0162 0163 ~ 0185 0186 ~ 0208 0209 ~ 0232
10H zdigit0, 5

1 kHz digit0~9

LEVEL9
1 Hz digit0

0233 ~ 0255
(Fixed)

(Fixed)

• RF power level setting

*10 Hz digit is fixed to “5” when 100 Hz digit is either “2” or “7,” Command: 140A
and fixed to “0” when 100 Hz digit is other than “2” and “7.” S-LOW LOW1 LOW2 MID HIGH
0000 ~ 0050 0051 ~ 0101 0102 ~ 0153 0154 ~ 0204 0205 ~ 0255

• Operating mode
qCommand:01,
w e 04, 06 • External microphone gain setting
q w Command: 140B
X X X X 1 2 3 4
0000 ~ 0063 0064 ~ 0127 0128 ~ 0191 0192 ~ 0255
Operating mode q Mode w Filter setting
FM 05 01
FM-N 05 02 • VOX gain setting
DV 17 01 Command: 1416
OFF 1 2 3 4
0000 ~ 0022 0023 ~ 0046 0047 ~ 0069 0070 ~ 0092 0093 ~ 0115
5 6 7 8 9
• Duplex Frequency offset setting 0116 ~ 0139 0140 ~ 0162 0163 ~ 0185 0186 ~ 0208 0209 ~ 0232
10
Command: 0C, 0D 0233 ~ 0255
q w e
X X X X X X
q* w e • Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting
Command: 1B 00, 1B 01
100 kHz digit

10 MHz digit
100 Hz digit

10 kHz digit

1 MHz digit

X X 0 X X X
First digit: 0~7 1 kHz digit

q* w e
0 0 X X X X
Second digit: 0~7
Third digit: 0~7

100 Hz digit

0.1 Hz digit
10 Hz digit

1 Hz digit
0 (fixed)

Fixed: 0

Fixed: 0

Receive polarity: 0: Normal

1: Reverse *Not necessary when setting a frequency.
Transmit polarity: 0: Normal
1: Reverse See page 16-16 for tone frequency list.

17-24
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

• DTCS code and polarity setting • Character’s code of the call sign
Command : 1B 02 Character ASCII code
q* w e 0~9 30 ~ 39
X X 0 X X X
A~Z 41 ~ 5A
(Space) 20
/ 2F
Second digit: 0~7
Third digit: 0~7
First digit: 0~7

• DV TX message setting
0 (fixed)

Command : 1F 02
Set the transmit message of up to 20 characters.
Receive polarity: 0: Normal “FF” stops sending or reading messages.
1: Reverse
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
Transmit polarity: 0: Normal
1: Reverse
A~Z 41 ~ 5A a~z 61 ~ 7A
0~9 30 ~ 39 Space 20
*See page 16-17 for DTCS code list.
! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25
• Digital code squelch setting & 26 \ 5C
Command : 1B 07 ? 3F " 22
q w q ’ 27 ` 60
^ 5E + 2B
X X
– 2D ✱ 2A
⁄ 2F . 2E
, 2C : 3A
Second digit: 0~9

; 3B = 3D
First digit: 0~9

< 3C > 3E
( 28 ) 29
[ 5B ] 5D
{ 7B } 7D
¦ 7C _ 5F
• DV MY call sign setting ¯ 7E @ 40
Command : 1F 00
Set your own call sign and note of up to 12 characters.
q–i o–!2 • DV RX Status setting
X X ••• X X X X X X X X X X Command : 20 0201, 20 0202
Data Function Description
q ~ i : Your own call sign setting (8 characters) bit7 0 (Fixed) —
o ~ !2 : Note setting (4 characters) bit6 0/1 Receiving a While receiving a digital voice
voice call signal, select “1.” (Regardless of
DSQL and CSQL setting)
• DV TX call signs setting (24 characters)
bit5 0/1 Last call finisher When the last call was finished
Command : 1F 01
by you, select “1.”
Set “UR,” “R1” and “R2” call signs of 8 characters (fixed). bit4 0/1 Receiving a When the audio tone can be
q–i o–!6 !7–@4 signal heard, select “1.”
X X ••• X X X X ••• X X X X ••• X X bit3 0/1 Receiving a BK While receiving a BK call, select
call “1.”
q ~ i: UR (Destination) call sign setting (8 characters) bit2 0/1 Receiving a While receiving a EMR call,
o ~ !6: R1 (Access/Area repeater) call sign setting EMR call select “1.”
(8 characters) bit1 0/1 Receiving a When “DV” and “FM” are blinking,
!7 ~ @4: 
R2 (Link/Gateway repeater) call sign setting signal other than select “1.”
(8 characters) DV
bit0 0/1 Packet loss While displaying a packet loss.
status

17-25
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

• DV RX call sign setting • GPS/D-PRS data
Command : 20 0001, 20 0002 Command: 20 0301, 20 0302
q Header flag data (First byte)
Data Description Data number and description
bit7 (0: Fixed) — Data number Description
bit6 (0: Fixed) — qw
00 D-PRS— Position
bit5 (0: Fixed) — 01 D-PRS— Object q~i o ~ !7
bit4 0/1 0= Voice, 1= Data X 02 X X X X X X
D-PRS— Item X X X X X X X X X X X X
bit3 0/1 0= Direct, 1= Through repeater 03 D-PRS— Weather
bit2 0/1 0= No Break-in, 1= Break-in GPS/D-PRS DATA
bit1 0/1 0= Data, 1= Control (Position)
bit0 0/1 0= Normal, 1= EMR Position
q~o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6
w Header flag data (Second byte) 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Data Data number
Description
bit2 bit1 bit0
1 1 1 Repeater control
!7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8
1 1 0 Send auto acknowledge X X X X X X X X X X X X
1 0 1 (Not used)
1 0 0 Request to re-transmit
0 1 1 Send acknowledge @9 ~ #1 #2 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1 $2
0 1 0 Receive no reply X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
0 0 1 Repeater disabled
0 0 0 NULL q ~ o: Call sign/SSID
(Object)
*9 ASCII characters (A ~ Z, 0 ~ 9, /, -, space)
e ~ !0: Call sign of the caller station (8 characters; fixed)
!0, !1: Symbol q ~ o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6
!1 ~ !4: Note of the caller station (4 characters; fixed)
*2 ASCII characters (00h ~ EFh)
!5 ~ @2: Call sign of the called station (8 characters; fixed) 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X
@3 ~ #0: Call sign of the access/area repeater (R1) (8 char-
!2 ~ !6: Latitude (ddºmm.mmm format)
Data number
acters; fixed) !7 ~ @2: Longitude (dddºmm.mmm format)
#1 ~ #8: Call sign of the link/gateway repeater (R2) (8 char- @3 ~ @6: Altitude
!7 ~ @2 (0.1 meter
@3 ~steps)
@6 @7 @8
acters; fixed) @7, @8X: XCourseX(1Xdegree
X X
steps)
X X X X X X
@9 ~ #1: Speed (0.1 km/h steps)
• FF” stands for no call sign received after turning ON the #2 ~ #8: Date (UTC: yyyymmddHHMMSS)
transceiver. *y: Year, m: Month, d: Day, H: Hour, M: Minute,
@9 ~ #1 #2 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1
S: Second
• DV RX message X X X
X XPower (see
#9: theX table below)
X X X X X X X X
Command: 20 0101, 20 0102 $0: Height (see the table below)
q ~ @0 @1 ~ @8 @9 ~ #2 $1: Gain (see the table below)
$2 $3 ~ %1 %2
X X ••• X X X X ••• X X X X X X $2: Directivity (see the table below)
X X X X X X X X
q ~ @0: Message (20 characters) Power Height Gain Directivity
@1 ~ @8: Call sign of the caller station (8 characters) Data
(Item) (W) (m/ft) (dB) (deg)
@9 ~ #2: Note of the caller station (4 characters) 0 0 3/10 0 Omni-direction
1 1 q~o 6/20 !0 !11 !6 NE
!2 ~45º
• FF: When no call sign is received since the transceiver pow-
2 0 42 X X X X X X X X
12/40 2 X X 90ºXEX
er ON.
3 9 Data number
24/80 3 135º SE
4 16 49/160 4 180º S
5 25~ @2
!7 98/320
@3 ~ @6 5 @7 @8 225º SW
6 36 195/640 6 270º W
X X X X X X X X X X X X
7 49 390/1280 7 315º NW
8 64 780/2560 8 360º N
9 81 1561/5120 9 —
@9 ~ #1 #2 #3 #4 #5
X X X X X X X X X X X X

#6 ~ $4 $5
X X X X X X

(Weather)
17-26
q~o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6
0 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X
 !7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8
0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Data number
Previous view Variable length

!7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8 !6 !7
17 XOTHER
X FUNCTIONS
X X X X X X X X X X
@9 ~ #1 #2 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1
X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

@9 ~ #1 #2 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1 $2
$2 $3 ~ %1 %2 GPS MANUAL DATA
X X X X
X information
■■ CI-V X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X
• GPS/D-PRS data (Continued) q~t
(Object) (Item)
Object Item X X X X
q~o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6 q~o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6
0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Data number Data number
DV TX/RX DATA
!7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8 !7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X

@9 ~ #1 #2 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1 @9 ~ #1 #2 #3 #4 #5
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

$2 $3 ~ %1 %2 #6 ~ $4 $5
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

(Item)
q ~ o: Call sign/SSID q ~ o: Call sign/SSID
*9 ASCII characters (A ~ Z, 0 ~ 9, /, -, space)
(Weather)*9 ASCII characters (A ~ Z, 0 ~ 9, /, -, space)
q~o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6
!0, !1: Symbol !0, !1: Symbol
2 X X X X X X X X X X X X
*20 ASCII characters (00h ~ EFh) q ~ o (00h!0~ EFh)
*2 ASCII characters !1 !2 ~ !6
Data number
!2 ~ !6: Latitude (ddºmm.mmm format) 0 3 X X X X X X
!2 ~ !6: Latitude (ddºmm.mmm format) X X X X X X
!7 ~ @2: Longitude (dddºmm.mmm format) !7 ~ @2: Longitude
Data (dddºmm.mmm
number format)
!7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8
@3 ~ @6: Altitude (0.1 meter steps) @3 ~ @6: Altitude (0.1 meter steps)
X X X X X X
@7, @8X
: X X X X X
Course (1 degree steps) !7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @9
@7, @8: Course (1 degree steps) #0 #1 #2
@9 ~ #1: Speed (0.1 km/h steps) @9 ~ #1X: Speed
X X Xkm/h
(0.1 X X steps) X X X X X X X X
#2 ~ #8: Date (UTC: yyyymmddHHMMSS) #2: Power (see the table below)
*y@9 ~ #1
: Year, #2 d:#3Day,#4H: Hour,
m: Month, #5 M: Minute,
#3: Height (see the table below)
X XS: SecondX X X X X X X X X X #4: #3 Gain#4(see
#5 the table
#6 ~ below)
#8 #9 $0 $1 $2
#9: Power (see the table below) #5: Directivity (see the table below)
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
$0: Height (see the table below)
$1: Gain $4 the$5
#6 ~(see table below) Power Height Gain Directivity
$2: X Directivity
X X X(see
X Xthe table below) Data $3(W)$4 $5 (m/ft)
$6 $7 ~ $9
(dB) (deg)
0 X X0 X X X X X 3/10
X X X 0X X Omni-direction
Power Height Gain Directivity 1 1 6/20 1 45º NE
(Weather)
Data (W) (m/ft) (dB) (deg) 2 4 12/40 2 90º E
0 0 3 9 24/80 3 135º SE
q ~3/10
o !0 !1 0 Omni-direction
!2 ~ !6 4 16 49/160 4 180º S
1 1 6/20 1 45º NE
2 04 3 X X X X X X X2X X X
12/40 90º XE X 5 25 98/320 5 225º SW
3 9 Data number24/80 3 135º SE 6 36 195/640 6 270º W
4 16 49/160 4 180º S 7 49 390/1280 7 315º NW
5 !7 ~ @2
25 98/320@3 ~ @9 5 #0 #1225º#2 SW 8 64 780/2560 8 360º N
6 36 195/640 9 81 1561/5120 9 —
X X X X X X X X X X X X X XW
6 270º
7 49 390/1280 7 315º NW #6 ~ $4: Name
8 64 780/2560 8 360º N *9 ASCII characters (00h ~ EFh)
9 81 1561/5120 9 —
#3 #4 #5 #6 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1 $2 $5: Type (1= Live, 0= Killed)
$3 ~ %1X: Name
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
*9 ASCII characters (00h ~ EFh)
%2: Type (1= Live, 0= Killed)
$3 $4 $5 $6 $7 ~ $9
X X X X X X X X X X X X

17-27
 X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X X X X

Previous view
@9 ~ #1 GPS/D-PRS
#2 #3 MSG
#4 #5 MY POSITION DATA

!2 ~ !6 17 XOTHER
X X X X X X X X X X X
FUNCTIONS
q~o !0 ~ %2 q~t y ~ !1 !2 ~ !5
X X X X X X X X X X
qw X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
q~i o ~ !7
#6 ~ $4 $5 Variable length
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
@7 @8 ■■ CI-V information !6 !7 !8 ~ @0 @1 ~ @7
GPS/D-PRS DATA
X X X (Position)
• GPS/D-PRS data (Continued) X X X X message
X GPS/D-PRS
• GPS/D-PRS XMSG X X X X X X MY POSITION DATA
(Weather) Command: 20 0401, 20 0402
Weather
#9 $0 $1 $2 qq~ ~oo !0!0 !1!1 !2!2~ ~!6!6 q~o !0 ~ %2 q~t
0 00 3X XX X X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X X XX X GPS MANUAL
X X DATA
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
Data
Datanumber
number Variable length
q~t y ~ !1 !2 ~ !5
!7!7~ ~@2@2 @3@3~ ~@6@9 @7#0 @8#1 #2 q ~ o: Call sign/SSID !6 !7 !
X X
X X Xcharacters
*9 ASCII X X
(AX~ X
Z, X
0 ~ 9, /, -,Xspace)
X
!2 ~ !6 X XX X X XX XX XX X X XX XX XX XX XX X X X X X X X X X
!0 ~ %2: Message
X X X X *Up to 43 ASCII characters (00h ~ EFh)
#3@9 ~#4#1 #5 #6
#2 ~ #8 #9
#9 $0 $1
$1 $2
•DV
DVTX/RX
TX data,
DATADV RX data (transceive) GPS MANUAL DATA
@7 @8 X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Command: 22 00, 22 01 01
X X X q ~ #0 q~t
(Object)
$3 $4
$5 $6 $7 ~ $9 X X X X X X X X
q ~ o
X X X X X X X X X X !0 !1 X X !2 ~ !6 Variable length
#9 $0 $1
0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X
w
X X X X Xq ~ o: Call sign/SSID q ~ #0: Tx, data Rx data (Up to 30 Byte)
Data number *“FA” to “FF” are entered after converted to “FF
~i o ~ !7
*9 ASCII characters (A ~ Z, 0 ~ 9, /, -, space)
DVto
0A” to “FF 0F” automatically. Data of up TX/RX
60 DATA
X ,X!1
X X X !0 X: XSymbol
X ~X@2X
!7 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8
*2 ASCII characters (00h ~ EFh) Byte can be entered in this case.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
!2 ~ !6: Latitude (ddºmm.mmm format)
GPS/D-PRS
!7 ~ @2: Longitude (dddºmm.mmm MSG
format) • MY
MY position
POSITION data
DATA X X
@3 ~ @9: Date (UTC: yyyymmddHHMMSS) Command: 23 00
@9 ~ #1 #2 ~~#8 #9 !0$0 ~ %2
$1
*y: Year, m: Month,q
!2 ~!2!6~ !6 o H: Hour,
d: Day, M: Minute, q~t y ~ !1 !2 ~ !5
X X X
X S: Second X XX X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X
XX XX X XoXX~ !7 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
#0, #1: Wind direction (1 degree steps) Variable length
X X X X X X X X X X
#2, #3: Wind speed (0.1 m/s steps)
$2 $3 ~ %1 %2
@7 @7@8 @8 #4, #5: Gust speed (0.1 m/s steps) !6 !7 !8 ~ @0 @1 ~ @7
X X X X X X X X MSG
XX XX XX X #6 ~ #7: Temperature (0.1ç steps)
GPS/D-PRS MY POSITION
X XDATA
X X X X X X X X X X
#8 : Temperature (0= + degree, 1= – degree)
(Item)
!2 ~ !6 #9, $0: Rainfall (0.1 mm q ~steps)
o !0 ~ %2 q ~ t:q Latitude
~t (ddºmm.mmm
y ~ !1 format) !2 ~ !5
X #9
X $1X, $2
$0 X$1 qX~ X
$2: Rainfall (24 o !0 X mm
hours) (0.1
X !1
X Xsteps) !2 ~X!6X y ~X!1X : Longitude (dddºmm.mmm
X X X X X X X format)
X X X
X X X X X$3X, $4 X :X 0Rainfall
2 X X (Midnight)
X X (0.1
X X mm X steps)
X X length X X
X Variable !2GPS
~ !5MANUAL DATA
: Altitude (0.1 meter steps)
$5, $6: Humidity (1% steps)
Data number !6, !7: Course (1 degree steps)
@8 $7 ~ $9: Barometric pressure (0.1 hPa steps) @0: Speed
!8 ~!6 !7
q ~ t(0.1 km/h y
!8 ~ @0 steps)
~ !1
@1 ~ @7
!2 ~ !5
X X X
!7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @6 @7 @8 @1 ~ @7X: Date
X (UTC:
X XyyyymmddHHMMSS)
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X
!2 ~ !6 X X X X X X X X X X X X *y: Year, m: Month, d: Day, H: Hour, M: Minute,
X X X X X S: Second
$0 $1 $2
@9 ~ #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 • Manually
GPS input position data
MANUAL DATA
X X X X X X X DV TX/RX DATA
@7 @8 Command: 23 02
X X X X X X X X X X X X
!2 !6
X X X~ X q~t y ~ !1 !2 ~ !5
q ~ #0
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
!2 ~ !6 #6 ~ $4 $5
q ~ t: Latitude (ddºmm.mmm format)
Variable length
X #9
X $0 X$1X X X X X X X
#0 #1 #2 y ~ !1: Longitude (dddºmm.mmm format)
X X X X X X
X X X X X !2 ~ !5: Altitude (0.1 meter steps)
DV TX/RX DATA
@8 (Weather)
X X X q~o !0 !1 !2 ~ !6 q ~ #0
$0 $1 $2
0 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
Data number Variable length
$0 $1
X ~X!6
X X X !2 !7 ~ @2 @3 ~ @9 #0 #1 #2
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

@7 @8 #3 #4 #5 #6 ~ #8 #9 $0 $1 $2
17-28
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Previous view

Section 18 OPTIONS
■■ Option list.......................................................................... 18-2
■■ Optional HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone. . 18-4
DD Remote control function setting..................................... 18-4
■■ VOX function...................................................................... 18-5
DD Optional unit connection................................................ 18-5
DD Selecting the headset type............................................ 18-5
DD Turning the VOX function ON or OFF............................ 18-6
DD VOX Level setting.......................................................... 18-7
DD VOX-related settings...................................................... 18-8
■■ SJ-1 silicone jacket. ....................................................... 18-8
■■ Using the RS-MS1A.......................................................... 18-9
DD Required items.............................................................. 18-9
DD Connection.................................................................... 18-9
DD Download procedures................................................... 18-9

18-1
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■Option list
•H M-186LS • HM-75LS • HM-183LS
speaker-microphone remote control speaker microphone
For operation while con- speaker microphone For operation while conveniently hanging the trans-
veniently hanging the 
Allows you to remotely ceiver from your belt, and so on.
transceiver from your select operating chan- Allows you to operate in wet environments.
belt, and so on. nels, and other functions.

•H
 M-153LS/HM-166LS • BC-202 desktop charger+BC-123SA/SE ac adapter
earphone-microphone Rapidly charges the BP-271 li-ion battery pack in ap-

Ideal for hands-free operation: clip the HM-153LS/ proximately 2 hours.
HM-166LS (with integrated PTT switch) to your lapel Rapidly charges the BP-272 li-ion battery pack in ap-
or breast pocket. proximately 3.5 hours.
Allows you to operate in wet environments.

HM-153LS HM-166LS
Power adapter Desktop charger

• CP-12L cigarette lighter cable with noise filter • OPC-254L

• CP-19R cigarette lighter cable with dc-dc con- dc power cable
verter For operation and charging using an external power
You can to operate the transceiver through a 12 V source.
cigarette lighter socket.
You can also charge the attached battery pack.
(By default, the battery pack cannot be charged dur-
Fuse: 4 A
ing power ON.)
CP-19R: A built-in DC-DC converter provides an 11 V
DC output.

CP-12L

Fuse: 4 A

CP-19R

Fuse: 5 A

18-2
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ Option list (Continued)

DD BATTERY PACKS/CASE DD OTHER OPTIONS
• BP-271 li-ion battery pack • HM-75A/HM-153/HM-166/HM-186 microphones or
7.4 V SP-13 earphone +OPC-2144 plug adapter cable
1150 mAh (minimum)/1200 mAh (typical) HM-75A: Remote control Speaker microphone
Battery life: Approximately 4.5 hours* (FM/DV) HM-153: Earphone microphone
• BP-272 li-ion battery pack HM-166: Earphone microphone
7.4 V HM-186: Speaker microphone
1880 mAh (minimum)/2000 mAh (typical) SP-13: Earphone
Battery life: Approximately 8 hours* (FM) OPC-2144: Allows you to connect the HM-75A/HM-
Approximately 7 hours* (DV) 153/HM-166/HM-186/SP-13 to the trans-
• BP-273 battery case ceiver.
Battery case for three LR6 (AA) alkaline batteries. • HS-94/HS-95/HS-97 headset
+OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable
*At High power, TX : RX: Standby = 1:1:8 HS-94: Ear hook type
HS-95: Neck & arm type
DD CHARGERS HS-97: Throat microphone
• BC-167SA/SD/SV battery charger OPC-2006LS: Allows you to connect the HS-94/HS-95/
To regular charge the BP-271 or BP-272 Lithium ion HS-97 to the transceiver. After connect-
battery pack. ing, the VOX function can be used.
Same as the supplied one. (Not supplied with some • LC-179 carrying case
transceiver versions.) Helps protect the transceiver from scratches, and so
on.
DD SOFTWARE/CABLES • SJ-1 silicone jacket
• CS-51PLUS2 cloning software • AD-92SMA antenna connector adapter
Free download software (contained in the CD) Allows you to connect an antenna or antenna cable
Use this software to program settings such as mem- that has a BNC connector.
ory channels and Menu mode contents quickly and • CT-17 ci-v level converter unit
easily. For remote transceiver control using a personal com-
The OPC-2218LU, OPC-2350LU, or microSD card is puter equipped with an RS-232C port. You can change
required. frequencies, operating mode, memory channels, and
• RS-MS1A remote control software so on, using your computer.
Free download software • FA-S270C antenna
Allows using the extended D-STAR functions to ex- Same as the supplied one.
change image files or text messages, or display the • MB-127 belt clip
received D-PRS station data on a map application by Same as the supplied one.
an Android™ device.
The OPC-2350LU is required.
• RS-MS3W r  emote control software
Free download software.
Allows using the DV Gateway function.
See “About the DV Gateway function” on the Icom
WEB site, http://www.icom.co.jp/world/ for details.
The OPC-2350LU is required.
• RS-MS3A remote control software
Free download software.
Allows using the DV Gateway function.
See “About the DV Gateway function” on the Icom
WEB site, http://www.icom.co.jp/world/ for details.
The OPC-2350LU is required. Icom is not responsible for the destruction, damage
• OPC-2218LU data cable to, or performance of any Icom or non-Icom equip-
Allows DV data communication, or data cloning with ment, if the malfunction is because of:
CS-51PLUS2 (contained in the CD). • Force majeure, including, but not limited to, fires,
• OPC-2350LU data cable earthquakes, storms, floods, lightning, other natu-
Allows DV data communication between the trans- ral disasters, disturbances, riots, war, or radioactive
ceiver and an Android™ device, or data cloning with contamination.
CS-51PLUS2 (contained in the CD). • The use of Icom transceivers with any equipment
that is not manufactured or approved by Icom.
18-3
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■Optional HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone

The optional HM-75LS allows you to remotely select Microphone
Transmit LED
operating frequencies, memory channels, and other
functions. PTT switch A
B

The function assignments for keys can be changed in

the MENU screen for simple remote control operation.
(p. 16-74) OFF ON
Speaker
LOCK

(MENU > Function > Remote MIC Key)

 he HM-75LS has a lock switch on the back to prevent

T
Earphone jack
accidental frequency changes, and so on.

TIP: Be sure to turn OFF power when plugging or un- Example: 

To change the remote control function as-
plugging the HM-75LS into or from the [MIC/SP] jack. signed to [A] from “BAND” to “TO(DR).”

DDRemote control function setting

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
()

eePush D-pad() to select “Remote MIC Key,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “During RX/Standby” or
“During TX,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: During RX/Standby
ttPush D-pad() to select the desired key, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: [A]
yyPush D-pad() to select the desired key function,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “TO (DR)”
uuPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.

TIP: Returning to default

All key functions:
Push [QUICK] in the
“During RX/Standby” or Key function
“During TX” screen, then list for [A] key
push D-pad(Ent) to return all
key functions to their default
settings.

Each key function:

Push [QUICK] in the
key function list screen of
each key, and then push
D-pad(Ent) to return to the
key’s default setting.

18-4
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■VOX function
The transceiver has a VOX function, which allows
hands-free operation.
An optional HS-94, HS-95 or HS-97 headset and the
OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable are required.
• The VOX (voice operated transmission) function starts trans-
mission when you speak into the microphone, without need-
ing to push [PTT]. It then automatically returns to reception
when you stop speaking.

Transceiver OPC-2006LS
 OTE: Set the external microphone gain before set-
N
ting the VOX gain in the MENU screen. We recom-
mend you set the microphone gain level to 3.
(MENU > Function > MIC Gain (External))
HS-94

DDOptional unit connection

qqTurn OFF the transceiver.
wwLift up the jack cover. TIP: Be sure to turn OFF power when plugging in or
eeConnect the HS-94, HS-95 or HS-97 and the OPC- unplugging the OPC-2006LS into or from the [MIC/
2006LS, as illustrated to the right. SP] jack.

DDSelecting the headset type

Before using the VOX function, select the headset
type.

qqTurn ON the transceiver.

wwPush [MENU] .
eeP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Function > VOX > Headset Select)

rrRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
ttPush D-pad() to select the option.
HS-95: Select when using the HS-95.
Other: Select when using the HS-94 or HS-97.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

18-5
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ VOX function (Continued)

DDTurning the VOX function ON or OFF
qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• “ VOX” appears.

Appears

18-6
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ VOX function (Continued)

DDVOX Level setting
 OTE: Set the external microphone gain before set-
N
ting the VOX gain in the MENU screen. We recom-
mend you set the microphone gain level to 3.
(MENU > Function > MIC Gain (External))

qqPush [MENU] .
wwP
 ush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
()

(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Level)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrWhile speaking into the headset microphone, rotate
[DIAL] to adjust the VOX Level until “VOX” continu-
ously appears.
• The VOX Level can be adjusted between 1 (minimum)
and 10 (maximum), or turned OFF. Higher values make
the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.
(Default: 5)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

TIP:
• If the TX/RX indicator blinks, set the VOX Delay in
the MENU screen. (p. 18-8)
(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Delay)
• When the VOX function is ON, you can adjust the
VOX level by rotating [DIAL] while transmitting.

Appears when speaking.

Appears if you rotate [DIAL]

while transmitting.

18-7
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ VOX function (Continued)

DDVOX-related settings
The VOX Delay and the VOX time-out timer can be set
in the MENU screen.

• VOX delay
Sets the VOX delay to between 0.5 and 3.0 seconds
(in 0.5 seconds steps). The VOX delay is the amount of
time the transmitter stays ON after you stop speaking.
(Default: 0.5)
(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Delay)

TIP: If “VOX” is intermittent, set the VOX delay long

enough to allow normal pauses in speech, but return
to receive after you finish speaking.

• VOX time-out timer

Sets the VOX Time-Out Timer to between 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 10 and 15 minutes to prevent accidental prolonged
transmission.
To turn OFF the function, select “OFF.” (Default: 3)
(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Time-out Timer)

TIP: The VOX Time-Out Timer must be set shorter

than the transceiver Time-Out Timer, otherwise this
timer will not be activated.

■■SJ-1 silicone jacket

The SJ-1 silicone jacket can be used when the BP-
271 battery pack is attached to the transceiver.
When the BP-272 battery pack or BP-273 battery
case is attached, the jacket cannot be used.

TIP: Before attaching or removing the jacket, be sure

to disconnect the antenna from the transceiver.

To attach:
qqPlace the antenna connector and [DIAL] of the
transceiver into the holes on the top of the jacket, as
shown to the right.
wwPull the jacket around the sides and bottom of the
transceiver.
• When the belt clip is attached, push it out from the hole
on back of the jacket.

To remove:
qqRemove the jacket from bottom of the transceiver.
• If a belt clip is attached, pull the jacket around the bottom
of the clip.
wwPull the antenna connector and [DIAL] from the jack-
et, and remove it from the transceiver.

18-8
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■Using the RS-MS1A

The RS-MS1A is a freeware application for Android™ NOTE: Before starting, be sure to set the following
devices. items in the MENU screen:
With the RS-MS1A, you can use the extended D-STAR • Set the “CI-V (DATA Jack)” option to “ON (Echo Back
functions to exchange image files or text messages, or OFF).”
display the received D-PRS station data on a map pro- (MENU > Function > CI-V > CI-V (DATA Jack))
gram. (p. 16-78)
•S  et the “CI-V Transceive” option to “ON.”
To use the RS-MS1A, download it from the Google™ (MENU > Function > CI-V > CI-V Transceive)
Play store of your Android™ device. (p. 16-78)

DDRequired items DDConnection

• Android™ device Connect the transceiver to your Android™ device using
You can use the RS-MS1A with devices the OPC-2350LU, as illustrated below.
that have Android™ 4.0 or later installed.
NOTE: When the cable is connected, it increases the
The RS-MS1A has been tested with power consumption of Android™ device. To avoid this,
the following Android devices available in Japan. (As of disconnect the cable if it is not used.
September 2016)
• Samsung Galaxy S3 Android™
(NTT docomo SC-06D: Android 4.1.2) device
• Samsung Galaxy S3 Progre
(au SCL21: Android 4.0.4/4.1.2)
• Samsung Galaxy S3α To the [DATA] jack
(NTT docomo SC-03E: Android 4.1.1/4.3)
To a [USB]
• Samsung Galaxy S4 port
(NTT docomo SC-04E: Android 4.2.2/4.3/4.4.2)
• Samsung Galaxy Note Transceiver OPC-2350LU (Option)
(NTT docomo SC-05D: Android 4.1.2)
• Samsung Galaxy Note3
MAKE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver power be-
(NTT docomo SC-01F/au SCL22: Android 4.3/4.4.2)
fore connecting or disconnecting the cable.
• Google Nexus 7 (2012)
(Nexus7-16G: Android 4.2.2/4.4.2/4.4.4)
• Google Nexus 7 (2013)
(Nexus7-16G: Android 4.3/4.4.2/4.4.4/5.0.1/5.0.2/
5.1.1) DDDownload procedures
qqTurn ON your Android™ device.
TIP: Some function may not work correctly, depend- wwTap “Play Store.”
ing on the program installed in your Android™ device eeEnter “RS-MS1A” in the “Search Google Play” field.
or memory capability, even if you use one of the above • Displays “RS-MS1A” in the application list.
products. rrTap “ .”
ttTap “RS-MS1A.”
See the instruction manual for details of the operation • Displays the introduction screen of the RS-MS1A.
or account settings of the Android™ device. yyTap [INSTALL].
The screen shots in this manual may differ, depending uuTap [ACCEPT] in the “App permissions” window.
on your device’s OS or its version. • Installation starts.
• After finishing the installation, the RS-MS1A icon is dis-
Galaxy and Galaxy S are registered trademarks of Samsung Elec- played on the screen.
tronics Co., Ltd.
Google, the Google Logo, Google Play, the Google Play logo, An-
droid and the Android logo are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Google, Inc. RS-MS1A icon

NOTE: While operating Dualwatch, and one band is

scanning, if you receive an image file or text data on NOTE: When the Android™ device does not work cor-
the other band, some of that data may be lost. rectly, increase the distance between the transceiver
This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction. and the Android™ device.
18-9
Previous view

Section 19 SPECIFICATIONS
■■ Transceiver........................................................................ 19-2
DD General.......................................................................... 19-2
DD Transmitter..................................................................... 19-2
DD Receiver........................................................................ 19-3
■■ BC-202 desktop charger................................................ 19-3

19-1
 Previous view

19 SPECIFICATIONS

■■Transceiver
DDGeneral DDTransmitter
• Frequency coverage: (unit: MHz) • Modulation system:
EUR, KOR
TX 144~146, 430~440 FM Variable reactance frequency
RX 144~146, 430~440 modulation
TX 144~146, 430~440 DV GMSK reactance frequency
UK
RX 108~174*1, 380~479*2
modulation
TX 144~146, 430~434, 435~438
ITR
• Output power (at 7.4 V DC): High 5.0 W, Mid. 2.5 W,
108~136.995,*1 144~146,
RX Low2 1.0 W, Low1 0.5 W,
430~434, 435~438
TX 144~148, 430~450*3 S-Low 0.1 W (Typical)
USA
RX 108~174*4, 380~479*3 • Max. frequency deviation: ±5.0 kHz (FM wide)
EXP
TX 137~174*4, 400~479*2 ±2.5 kHz (FM narrow)
RX 108~174*4, 380~479*2 • Occupied bandwidth: Less than 6.0 kHz (DV)
TX 144~148, 430~440
EXP-1 • Spurious emissions: Less than –60 dBc at High/Mid.
RX 108~174*4, 380~479*2
Less than –13 dBm at Low2/
BC band (AM): 0.520~1.710
ALL RX Low1/S-Low
BC band (FM): 76.0~108.0*5
• Ext. mic. impedance: 2.2 kW
*1Guaranteed 144~146 MHz only
*2Guaranteed 430~440 MHz only
*3Guaranteed 440~450 MHz only
*4Guaranteed 144~148 MHz only
*588.0~108.0 MHz for the USA version transceiver.
TIP: The SUB band audio signal may be muted, depend-
ing on the combination of operating band and mode.
• Modes: FM (F2D/F3E), AM (A3E)*,
DV (F7W)
*Rx only
• Number of memory channels:
 554 (including 50 scan edges and 4 call
channels)
• Number of BC band memory channels:
 500
• Usable temp. range: –20°C ~ +60°C, –4°F ~ +140°F
• Tuning steps: 1, 5, 6.25, 8.33, 9, 10, 12.5, 15, 20,
25, 30, 50, 100, 125 and 200 kHz
*The selectable steps may differ, depending on the selected fre-
quency band or operating mode.
• Frequency stability: ±2.5 ppm
(–20°C ~ +60°C, –4°F ~ +140°F)
• Power source : 10 ~16 V DC for external DC pow-
er, or specified Icom’s battery pack
• Digital transmission speed: 4.8 kbps
• Voice coding speed: 2.4 kbps
• Current drain (with BP-271):
TX (at 5 W output) Less than 2.5 A
RX Max. output FM Less than 350 mA (Internal speaker)
Less than 200 mA (External speaker)
DV Less than 450 mA (Internal speaker)
Less than 300 mA (External speaker)
• Antenna impedance: 50 W (SMA)
• Dimensions: 58.0(W)×105.4(H)×26.4(D) mm,
(projections not included) 2.3(W)×4.1(H)×1.0(D) in
• Weight (approximately): 255 g, 9 oz
(including battery pack and antenna)

All stated specifications are subject to change without notice

or obligation.
19-2
 Previous view

19 SPECIFICATIONS

■■ Transceiver (Continued)
■■BC-202 desktop charger
DDReceiver • Power source requirement: 12 ~ 16 V DC or the specified
• Receive system: Double-conversion Icom power adapter (BC-123S)
superheterodyne • Charging temperature range: 0˚C ~ +40˚C, +32˚F ~ +104˚F
• Intermediate frequencies • Weight: Approximately 104 g, 3.7 oz
A Band: 46.35 MHz (1st IF) (without power adapter)
450 kHz (2nd IF) • Dimensions: 88.0(W)×72.6(D)×46.5(H) mm,
B Band: 61.65 MHz (1st IF) 3.5(W)×2.9(D)×1.8(H) in.
450 kHz (2nd IF) (projection is not included)
• Sensitivity (except spurious points)
AM (1 kHz 30% MOD, 10 dB S/N)
0.520 ~ 0.995 MHz: Less than 3.2 μV
1.000 ~ 1.710 MHz: Less than 1.8 μV
108.000 ~ 136.995 MHz: Less than 1.8 μV
FM (1 kHz/±3.5 kHz Dev., 12 dB SINAD)
137.0 ~ 174.0 MHz
Amateur band only: Less than 0.18 μV
Except for Amateur band: Less than 0.32 μV
380.0 ~ 479.0 MHz
Amateur band only: Less than 0.18 μV
Except for Amateur band: Less than 0.32 μV
WFM (1 kHz/±52.5 kHz Dev., 12 dB SINAD)
76.0 ~ 81.9 MHz: Less than 3.2 μV
82.0 ~ 108.0 MHz: Less than 1.8 μV
DV (PN9/GMSK 4.8 kbps, BER 1%)
137.0 ~ 174.0 MHz
Amateur band only: Less than 0.28 μV
380.0 ~ 479.0 MHz
Amateur band only: Less than 0.28 μV
• Audio output power (at 10% distortion)
Internal speaker: More than 0.4 W into a 16 Ω load
External speaker: More than 0.2 W into an 8 Ω load
• Selectivity
FM (Wide): More than 55 dB
FM (Narrow), DV: More than 50 dB
• Ext. speaker impedance: 8 W
(3-conductor 3.5 mm, 1⁄8˝ (d))
• Spurious and image rejection ratio:
More than 60 dB
• Squelch Sensitivity (except spurious points)
AM (1 kHz 30% MOD, 10 dB S/N) (threshold)
0.520 ~ 0.995 MHz: Less than 3.2 μV
1.000 ~ 1.710 MHz: Less than 1.8 μV
108.000 ~ 136.995 MHz: Less than 1.8 μV
FM (1 kHz/±3.5 kHz Dev., 12 dB SINAD) (threshold)
137.0 ~ 174.0 MHz
Amateur band only: Less than 0.18 μV
Except for Amateur band: Less than 0.32 μV
380.0 ~ 479.0 MHz
Amateur band only: Less than 0.18 μV
Except for Amateur band: Less than 0.32 μV
WFM (1 kHz/±52.5 kHz Dev., 12 dB SINAD) (threshold)
76.0 ~ 81.9 MHz: Less than 3.2 μV
82.0 ~ 108.0 MHz: Less than 1.8 μV

19-3
 Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your nearest Icom
Dealer or Service Center.

DD While operating D-STAR

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
After your call, the repeater • The repeater setting is wrong. • Select the correct repeater. p. 8-2
does not return a status re- • T he manually entered repeater fre- • C  orrect the repeater frequency, fre- pp. 9-30, 9-31
ply. quency, frequency offset, or duplex set- quency offset, or duplex setting.
ting is wrong.
• Your transmission did not reach the re- • Wait until you are closer to the repeater —
peater. and try again.
• Try to access another repeater. —
After your call, the repeater • The call was successfully sent, but no • Wait for a while, and try again. —
replies ‘UR?’ and its call station immediately replied.
sign.

After your call, the repeater • Your own call sign (MY) has not been • Set your own call sign (MY). p. 13 of the
replies ‘RX’ or ‘RPT?’ and set. Basic manual
the access repeater’s call • Your own call sign (MY) has not been • R  egister your own call sign (MY) on a p. 15 of the
sign. registered on a gateway repeater, or the gateway repeater, or confirm the regis- Basic manual
registered contents do not match your tration of the call sign.
transceiver’s setting.

After your call, the repeater •  The repeater cannot connect to the •C
 heck the repeater setting. p. 9-23
replies ‘RPT?’ and call sign destination repeater.
of the destination repeater. • The repeater is busy. • Wait for a while, and try it again. —
After your call, the access • The call sign of the destination repeater • Correctly set the destination repeater p. 9-28
repeater replies ‘RPT?’ and is wrong. call sign.
its call sign.
Even holding down , the • There is no Repeater List in your trans- • Reload the Repeater List using the CS- p. 17-20
DR function is not selected. ceiver. 51PLUS2 cloning software on the CD.
• Reload the Repeater List using a mi- p. 8-21
croSD card.
• Enter the Repeater List data directly p. 9-24
into the transceiver.
Even holding down , the • The call sign has not been correctly re- • Try it again, after the transceiver has —
received call sign will not set ceived. correctly received the call sign.
to the destination call sign. • When a received signal is weak, or a
signal is received during scanning, the
call sign may not be received correctly.
In that case, “--------” appears and error
beeps sound, and a reply call cannot be
made.
A Local area call can be • MY call sign has not been registered on • Register your own call sign (MY) on a p. 13 of the
made, but the Gateway call a D-STAR repeater. gateway repeater, or confirm the regis- Basic manual
or destination station call tration of the call sign.
cannot be made.
During transmission, “L” ap- • 
While receiving through the internet, • Wait a while, and try it again. —
pears on the LCD, and the some packets may be lost due to net- When the transceiver receives cor-
received audio is interrupted. work error (poor data throughput per- rupted data, and misidentifies it is as
formance). Packet Loss, “L” is displayed, even if it
is a Local area call.

“DV” and “FM” icons alter- • While in the DV mode, an FM signal is • Use a different operating frequency un- p. 9-10
nately blink. received. til there are no FM signals on the origi-
nal frequency.
20-1
 Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

DD While operating D-STAR (Continued)

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
A call sign is programmed in “CALL • Delete the Call sign in “CALL SIGN”
The simplex operation can- •  p. 9-28
not be made using the DR SIGN” of the Repeater List. setting of the Repeater List.
function. • Duplex mode (DUP+, DUP–) is set. • Select “OFF” in “DUP” setting of the p. 9-31
Repeater List.
• A repeater frequency is programmed. • Set a simplex frequency. p. 9-30
The digital code squelch • The wrong digital code is set. • Set the correct digital code. p. 9-21
(CSQL) does not work.
You don’t know how to up- — • See “Updating the Repeater List” to p. 8-21
date the Repeater List. check.

DDWhile operating GPS Logger

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Position data cannot be re- • “External GPS” is selected in the GPS • Connect an external GPS receiver. p. 10-2
ceived. Set item on the Menu screen, but an ex-
ternal GPS receiver is not connected.
• “OFF” or “Manual” is selected in the • S  elect either “Internal GPS” or “Exter- p. 16-32
GPS Set item on the Menu screen. nal GPS” in the GPS Set item on the
Menu screen.
•A  GPS signal was not received. • Move until the GPS signal is received. —

20-2
Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

DDOthers

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Transceiver does not turn • The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery pack, or replace the pp. 4-3, 4-4
ON. batteries.
• The battery polarity is reversed. • Check the battery polarity in the case. p. 4-4
• Loose connection of a battery pack • Clean the battery terminals. pp. 4-3, 4-4
(case).
No sound comes from the • Volume level is too low. • Rotate [VOL] to adjust to a desired p. 5-2
speaker. level.
• An external speaker or a cloning cable • Check the external speaker connection —
is connected to the [SP] jack. or remove the cloning cable.
Sensitivity is too low, and • The coaxial cable is not connected, or • Check the coaxial cable connection or —
only strong signals are au- shorted. (External antenna is used) replace with the new.
dible.
Transmitting is impossible. • The transmit power level is set to S- • Set the transmit power level to HIGH. p. 5-11
LOW, LOW1 or LOW2
• The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery pack, or replace the pp. 4-3, 4-4
batteries.
• The battery case is attached. • Use the battery pack or external DC pp. 4-6, 5-10
power, and set the transmit power level
to HIGH.
• The PTT Lock function is activated. • Set the PTT Lock function to OFF in p. 16-75
the Function Menu.
• The Busy Lockout function is activated. • Set the Busy Lockout function to OFF p. 16-75
in the Function Menu.
No reply is received after a • The duplex is set, and the receive and • S  et the simplex operation. p. 15-5
call. transmit frequencies are different.
• No station is in range or on the same • Wait for a while, and try again.
frequency.
Transmitting using the VOX • The VOX Level is set to OFF or too low. • S  et the VOX Level to a suitable level. p. 16-77
function is impossible. • The MIC Gain is too low. • Set the MIC Gain to a suitable level. p. 16-76
Contacting another station is • A different tone or code is used for the • Check the tone/DTCS by performing a p. 13-2
impossible. tone/DTCS squelch. tone scan.
Frequency cannot be set. • The Key Lock function is activated. • Hold down [LOCK] for 1 second to p. 5-12
cancel the Key Lock function.
• The memory mode, Call channel mode, • Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO p. 5-10
Weather channel mode* or DR function mode.
is selected.
*USA version transceiver only
A Program Scan does not • The memory mode, Call channel mode, • Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO p. 5-10
start. Weather channel mode* or DR function mode.
is selected.
*USA version transceiver only
• The same frequency has been pro- •  Program different frequencies in the p. 12-4
grammed in the scan edge channels, scan edge channels.
“✱A” and “✱B.”
• Only one scan edge channel has been • P  rogram one or more pair of the scan p. 12-4
programmed. edge channels.
A Memory Scan does not • The Memory mode is not selected. • Push [M/CALL] to select the Mem- p. 5-10
start. ory mode.
• Only one or no memory channel has • Program two or more memory chan- p. 12-4
been programmed. nels.

The displayed frequency is • The CPU has malfunctioned. • Reset the transceiver. p. 16-99
erroneous. • External factors have caused a fault. • Remove and reattach the battery pack/ p. 1-2
case.

20-3
 Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

DD Others (Continued)

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

The SUB band audio signal • T he combination of operating band and • Change the settings. p. 5-4
is muted. mode is incorrect.
A distorted noise is heard • The earphone mode is OFF. • Turn ON the earphone mode. p. 16-88
when the earphone is used.
Charging is impossible at • “Charging (Power ON)” setting is OFF • Set the “Charging (Power ON)” setting p. 16-79
power ON. (default). to ON in the Function Menu.*
*This operation may generate certain spurious signals; the S-meter appears, or noise may be heard.

20-4
 Previous view

INDEX

A Listening while monitoring two ham bands……… 6-3

Active band………………………………………… 16-76 Rearranging the display order…………………… 6-14
Alarm Area (Group)………………………………… 16-39 Searching for a BC Radio signal…………………… 6-5
Alarm Area (RX/Memory)………………………… 16-40 Selecting the AM/FM radio mode………………… 6-5
All Reset…………………………………………… 16-99 Selecting the BC radio mode……………………… 6-3
Alphabet……………………………………………… 16-67 Setting a tuning step (AM Only)…………………… 6-8
Altitude……………………………………………… 16-48 Setting the squelch level…………………………… 6-7
Altitude/Distance…………………………………… 16-85 Turning ON the BC Radio…………………………… 6-2
Antenna………………………………………………… 1-2 Using the BC Radio Memory……………………… 6-9
ATT (AIR) function………………………………… 5-12 Using the BC Radio Mode……………………… 6-16
Attenuator function…………………………………… 6-6 Beep Level…………………………………………… 16-89
Audio level……………………………………………… 5-2 Beep/Vol Level Link………………………………… 16-89
Audio mute during Dualwatch operation…………… 5-4 Belt clip………………………………………………… 1-3
Automatic DV detection…………………………… 9-10 BK ………………………………………………… 16-64
Automatic Reply function………………………… 9-11 Using the BK function……………………………… 9-7
Recording………………………………………… 9-12 Busy LED…………………………………………… 16-81
Auto Mute…………………………………………… 6-18 Busy Lockout………………………………………… 16-75
Auto Position Reply function……………………… 9-13
Auto Power OFF…………………………………… 16-93 C
Auto Repeater……………………………………… 16-73 Call channel
Auto repeater function……………………………… 15-6 Call channel mode………………………………… 5-10
Auto repeater setting……………………………… 15-6 Selecting a call channel………………………… 12-3
Auto Reply…………………………………………… 16-61 Call Sign
Call Sign…………………………………………… 16-51
B Your (destination) call sign
Battery Deleting…………………………………………… 9-45
Battery icon……………………………………… 4-2, 4-3 Entering…………………………………………… 9-43
Battery information…………………………………… 4-2 Rearranging the display order………………… 9-46
Battery life……………………………………… 4-2, 4-4 Your Call Sign…………………………………… 16-56
Battery pack………………………………………… 1-2 My Call Sign……………………………………… 16-59
BATTERY PACK/CASE…………………………… 18-3 RX Call Sign……………………………………… 16-81
Battery replacement………………………………… 4-4 RX Call Sign SPEECH…………………………… 16-66
External DC power operation……………………… 4-6 RX Call Sign Write………………………………… 16-63
Operating note……………………………………… 4-6 TX Call Sign……………………………………… 16-83
Optional battery case……………………………… 4-4 Viewing received call signs………………………… 9-5
Backlight…………………………………………… 16-80 Viewing the call signs…………………………… 9-22
Backlight Timer……………………………………… 16-80 Charging
Band CHARGERS……………………………………… 18-3
Band Edge Beep………………………………… 16-90 Charging (Power ON)…………………………… 16-79
Band Scope function……………………………… 5-13 Charging note…………………………………… 4-3, 4-5
Selecting the operating band……………………… 5-6 Charging through the [DC IN] jack………………… 4-3
Bank Link…………………………………………… 16-19 Charging with the optional desktop charger……… 4-5
Barometric…………………………………………… 16-86 CI-V
BC-202 desktop charger…………………………… 19-3 CI-V (DATA Jack)………………………………… 16-78
BC Radio CI-V Address……………………………………… 16-78
Add a BC Radio memory…………………………… 6-9 CI-V Baud Rate…………………………………… 16-78
Adding or editing a BC Radio memory…………… 6-9 CI-V connection example………………………… 17-22
Basic operation……………………………………… 6-2 CI-V data setting………………………………… 17-22
BC Radio Level…………………………… 6-20, 16-88 CI-V information…………………………………… 17-22
BC Radio settings………………………………… 6-17 CI-V Transceive…………………………………… 16-78
Deleting a BC Radio memory…………………… 6-12 Command table…………………………………… 17-23
Editing a BC radio memory……………………… 6-13
FM Antenna……………………………………… 6-17
☞☞“C” continues on the next page.
20-5
 Previous view

INDEX

Cloning Repeater List……………………………… 9-23, 16-56

Clone Master Mode……………………………… 16-97 About the Repeater List default values……… 9-47
Clone Mode………………………………………… 16-97 Deleting a Repeater List………………………… 9-36
Cloning from a PC Editing a Repeater List………………………… 9-35
Using a microSD card…………………………… 17-20 Entering information into Repeater List……… 9-24
Using an optional data cable……………………… 17-20 Entering the repeater group name…………… 9-41
Cloning function…………………………………… 17-17 New repeater entry……………………………… 9-25
CLONING SOFTWARE………………………… 18-3 Opening the default Repeater List…………… 9-47
Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning Rearranging the repeater display order……… 9-37
Using a cable…………………………………… 17-21 Repeater detail screen………………………… 9-42
Using a microSD card…………………………… 17-17 Repeater List contents………………………… 9-23
Comment…………………………………………… 16-47 Required items for the communication cases… 9-24
Connection…………………………………… 9-14, 18-9 Updating the Repeater List…………………… 8-21
Reflector
D Linking to a reflector…………………………… 8-17
D-PRS……………………………………………… 10-24 Reflector Echo Testing………………………… 8-19
Operating D-PRS (DV-A)………………………… 10-24 Reflector operation……………………………… 8-16
Setting D-PRS (DV-A)…………………………… 10-25 Requesting repeater information……………… 8-20
D-STAR Unlinking a reflector……………………………… 8-19
Automatic Reply function………………………… 9-11 What is the reflector?…………………………… 8-16
Recording………………………………………… 9-12 Data communication……………………………… 9-14
D-STAR Introduction………………………………… 7-2 Data communication application setting………… 9-14
DR function Data communication operation………………… 9-14
“FROM” (Access repeater) setting……………… 8-2 Data Extension……………………………………… 16-48
Using the preloaded Repeater List…………… 8-3 Data format………………………………………… 17-22
Using the DR scan……………………………… 8-4 Data Speed………………………………………… 16-76
Using the Repeater Search function………… 8-5 Date ………………………………………… 16-71, 16-95
Using the TX History…………………………… 8-7 Date/Time…………………………………………… 16-92
“TO” (Destination) setting ………………………… 8-8 DIAL SPEECH……………………………………… 16-66
Directly inputting (RPT)……………………… 8-15 Dial Speed-UP……………………………………… 16-73
Directly inputting (UR)……………………… 8-14 Digital call sign squelch setting…………………… 9-20
Using “Local CQ” (Local Area call)…………… 8-9 Digital Code………………………………………… 16-17
Using “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)………… 8-10 Digital Monitor……………………………………… 16-62
Using “Your Call Sign”………………………… 8-11 Digital Repeater Set………………………………… 16-63
Using the RX History………………………… 8-12 Digital squelch functions…………………………… 9-20
Using the TX History………………………… 8-13 Setting the digital code squelch………………… 9-21
About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) function……… 7-2 Directly inputting (RPT)…………………………… 8-15
DR (D-STAR Repeater) function……………… 5-10 Directly inputting (UR)……………………………… 8-14
Ways to Communicate using the DR function…… 7-3 Display Language…………………………………… 16-86
DR Scan Display type setting…………………………………… 9-9
Group skip setting……………………………… 9-40 Display unit
Individual skip setting…………………………… 9-39 Altitude/Distance………………………………… 16-85
Skip settings……………………………………… 9-39 Barometric………………………………………… 16-86
DV Auto Detect…………………………………… 16-63 Latitude/Longitude………………………………… 16-85
DV Auto Reply…………………………………… 16-27 Rainfall……………………………………………… 16-86
DV Data TX………………………………………… 16-61 Speed……………………………………………… 16-85
DV fast data mode………………………………… 9-15 Temperature……………………………………… 16-85
DV Memory items………………………………… 16-56 Wind Speed……………………………………… 16-86
DV RX Backlight…………………………………… 16-83
DV Set items……………………………………… 16-60
Is your setting correct?…………………………… 9-48

☞☞“D” continues on the next page.

20-6
 Previous view

INDEX

DTCS G
DTCS Code………………………………………… 16-17 GPS
DTCS code setting and operation……………… 17-15 Add a GPS memory……………………………… 10-13
DTCS Polarity……………………………………… 16-17 Alarm Area (Group)……………………………… 16-39
DTCS squelch operation………………………… 17-15 Alarm Area (RX/Memory)………………………… 16-40
DTMF Caller’s TX format………………………………… 10-5
DTMF code programming………………………… 17-8 Changing the Compass Direction……………… 10-10
DTMF code transmission………………………… 17-10 Changing the GPS memory/alarm channel…… 10-10
DTMF code transmission (Direct Input)………… 17-11 Changing the Grid Locator……………………… 10-10
DTMF Memory…………………………………… 16-68 Checking GPS Information (Sky view screen)… 10-12
DTMF Speed……………………………………… 16-68 Checking GPS Position…………………………… 10-3
DTMF/T-CALL items……………………………… 16-68 D-PRS……………………………………………… 10-24
DTMF transfer speed……………………………… 17-12 Operating………………………………………… 10-24
Monitoring the stored DTMF code……………… 17-9 Setting…………………………………………… 10-25
Using the DTMF memory………………………… 17-8 Transmitting……………………………………… 10-24
Dualwatch operation………………………………… 5-3 Data Extension…………………………………… 16-48
Audio mute during Dualwatch operation………… 5-4 Deleting GPS data………………………………… 10-19
MAIN band selection………………………………… 5-3 Displaying Position Data………………………… 10-3
Setting the volume for Dualwatch………………… 5-5 Displaying your position using a mapping program…… 10-29
Single watch operation……………………………… 5-3 Entering a GPS message………………………… 10-32
Duplex operation……………………………… 15-4, 15-5 Entering the GPS group name ………………… 10-18
Setting the duplex direction……………………… 15-5 GPS alarm………………………………………… 10-21
GPS automatic transmission…………………… 10-33
E GPS Auto transmission…………………………… 10-33
Earphone Mode…………………………………… 16-88 GPS Auto TX……………………………………… 16-50
EMR function GPS Data Speed………………………………… 16-62
Adjusting the EMR AF level………………………… 9-9 GPS data sentence……………………………… 10-31
EMR………………………………………………… 16-64 GPS data (D-PRS and NMEA)………………… 10-23
EMR AF Level……………………………………… 16-65 Transmitting……………………………………… 10-23
Using the EMR communication function………… 9-8 Type of position data…………………………… 10-23
Exporting a CSV format file……………………… 2-14 GPS Indicator……………………………………… 16-33
GPS Information…………………………………… 16-34
F GPS items………………………………………… 16-32
Fast-forward while playing………………………… 11-5 GPS Logger……………………………… 10-34, 16-41
File Split……………………………………………… 16-24 <<GPS Logger Only>>………………………… 16-42
FM Antenna………………………………………… 6-17 GPS Logger operating outline………………… 10-34
FM Repeater operation…………………………… 15-2 Record Interval…………………………………… 16-41
Formatting the microSD card………………… 2-3, 16-96 Record Sentence………………………………… 16-41
Frequency Route on a PC Map……………………………… 10-36
Setting a frequency………………………………… 5-8 Using <<GPS Logger Only>> mode…………… 10-38
Setting the frequency offset……………………… 15-4 GPS Memory……………………………… 10-13, 16-38
“FROM” (Access repeater) setting…………………… 8-2 Rearranging the display order………………… 10-20
Using the preloaded Repeater List………………… 8-3 GPS memory operation………………………… 10-13
Using the DR scan…………………………………… 8-4 GPS Message…………………………………… 16-50
Using the Repeater Search function……………… 8-5
Using the TX History………………………………… 8-7
Front panel…………………………………………… 3-2
Function display……………………………………… 3-5

☞☞“G” continues on the next page.

20-7
 Previous view

INDEX

GPS (Continued) M
GPS operation…………………………………… 10-2 MAIN band selection………………………………… 5-3
GPS Out…………………………………………… 16-33 Manual Position…………………………………… 16-32
GPS Position……………………………………… 16-34 Memory bank
GPS record interval……………………………… 10-35 Memory bank scan……………………… 13-2, 13-10
GPS record sentence…………………………… 10-35 Selecting a Memory bank………………………… 12-9
GPS Select………………………………………… 16-32 Selecting the bank in the Memory bank mode…… 6-4
GPS Sentence…………………………………… 16-49 Setting a Memory bank…………………………… 12-7
GPS time correct………………………………… 16-93 Memory mode……………………………………… 5-10
GPS TX Mode……………………………………… 16-43 Memory operation
Data Extension…………………………………… 16-48 Assigning a memory channel to a memory bank…… 12-7
Manual Position…………………………………… 16-32 Clearing a Memory contents…………………… 12-13
NMEA (DV-G)……………………………………… 10-31 Copying memory and Call channel contents…… 12-5
Transmitting……………………………………… 10-31 Directly entering into a memory bank…………… 12-8
Receiving GPS data……………………………… 10-2 Entering a memory/bank/scan name…………… 12-10
Symbol……………………………………………… 16-44 Entering a Memory channel……………………… 12-4
Symbol memory…………………………………… 16-44 General description……………………………… 12-2
Symbol list………………………………………… 16-45 Memory channel contents……………………… 12-2
Saving your own or received position data…… 10-11 Memory or Call channel->Another memory or Call
SSID………………………………………………… 16-46 channel…………………………………………… 12-6
Time Stamp………………………………………… 16-48 Memory or Call channel->VFO………………… 12-5
Unproto Address………………………………… 16-43 Selecting a Memory channel…………………… 12-3
Selecting a memory name display……………… 12-12
H Memory scan………………………………… 13-2, 13-9
Hand strap……………………………………………… 1-3 Memory (skip) scan………………………………… 13-9
Headset Select……………………………………… 16-77 MENU
Heterodyne………………………………………… 16-79 Broadcast (BC) Radio items……………………… 16-30
Home CH Call sign items…………………………………… 16-51
Home CH Beep…………………………………… 16-89 Display items……………………………………… 16-80
Home CH Beep function………………………… 17-5 DUP/TONE items………………………………… 16-16
Home CH operation……………………………… 17-5 Entering the MENU screen and operation……… 16-3
Home CH setting………………………………… 17-5 Function items…………………………………… 16-72
HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone…… 18-4 Menu items and Default settings………………… 16-4
Remote control function setting………………… 18-4 Menu item selection……………………………… 16-2
Remote MIC Key………………………………… 16-74 My Station items…………………………………… 16-59
QSO/RX Log items……………………………… 16-69
I Scan items………………………………………… 16-18
Import/Export……………………………………… 16-95 SD Card items…………………………………… 16-95
Importing a CSV format file……………………… 2-13 Sounds items……………………………………… 16-88
Inserting the microSD card…………………………… 2-3 SPEECH items…………………………………… 16-66
Time set items…………………………………… 16-92
K Voice Memo items………………………………… 16-22
Key Lock…………………………………………… 16-75 Voice TX items…………………………………… 16-28
Key Lock function…………………………………… 5-12 Message operation…………………………………… 9-2
Key-Touch Beep…………………………………… 16-89 Transmitting a message…………………………… 9-3

L
Latitude/Longitude………………………………… 16-85
LCD Contrast……………………………………… 16-80
LCD Dimmer………………………………………… 16-80
Load Setting………………………………………… 16-95

☞☞“M” continues on the next page.

20-8
 Previous view

INDEX

MIC Gain (External)………………………………… 16-76 P

MIC Gain (Internal)………………………………… 16-76 Partial Reset………………………………………… 16-98
MIC Gain setting…………………………………… 11-19 Pause
microSD card Rewind the file…………………………………… 11-5
About the microSD card…………………………… 2-2 Fast forward the file……………………………… 11-5
About the microSD card’s folder………………… 2-11 Pause Timer……………………………………… 16-18
Backing up the data stored on the microSD card Pause while playing……………………………… 11-5
onto a PC………………………………………… 2-11 Phonetic Code setting for the Speech alphabet
Exporting…………………………………………… 2-14 character…………………………………………… 9-18
Format………………………………………… 2-3, 16-96 Play Files…………………………………… 16-22, 16-25
Free space and recordable time………………… 11-22 Playing back the recorded audio………… 11-4, 11-17
Import/Export……………………………………… 16-95 Playing back the recorded voice audio…………… 9-12
Importing…………………………………………… 2-13 Playing back the voice memory data on a PC…… 11-23
Inserting the microSD card………………………… 2-3 Playing the next file………………………………… 11-5
Loading the saved data files that are Playing the previously file………………………… 11-5
on the microSD card………………………………… 2-9 Pocket beep function
Making a backup file on your PC………………… 2-12 With the digital call sign squelch………………… 9-20
Overwriting a file…………………………………… 2-6 With the digital code squelch…………………… 9-21
Removing the microSD card……………………… 2-4 Position
Saving data onto a microSD card………………… 2-5 Displaying Position Data………………………… 10-3
Saving data onto the microSD card……………… 2-2 Displaying your position using a mapping program…… 10-29
Saving with a different file name…………………… 2-7 Manual Position…………………………………… 16-32
Saved as a new file………………………………… 2-5 Power ON……………………………………………… 5-2
Save Setting……………………………………… 16-95 Power Save………………………………………… 16-72
Separator/Decimal………………………………… 16-95 Power Save (BC Radio)…………………………… 6-17
Mode Power Save (Internal GPS)………………………… 16-32
MODE SPEECH…………………………………… 16-67 Priority watch……………………………………… 14-2
Mode speech function setting…………………… 17-7 A frequency in “FROM” on the DR screen and a
Selecting the Mode……………………………… 5-10 priority channel…………………………… 14-3, 14-13
Monitor ……………………………………………… 16-73 DR scan and a priority channel………… 14-3, 14-16
Monitor function……………………………………… 5-9 VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan……… 14-6
Using the Monitor function………………………… 6-7 VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan……… 14-2
My Call Sign………………………………………… 16-59 VFO frequency and a priority channel…… 14-2, 14-4
My Station items…………………………………… 16-59 VFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan…………… 14-2
VFO scan and a priority channel…………… 14-2, 14-8
N VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan……………… 14-10
Name Program Link………………………………………… 16-20
Entering a memory name, bank name or Adding a Scan Edge channel…………………… 16-20
scan name………………………………………… 12-10 Default settings of the Program Link…………… 16-20
Entering the GPS group name ………………… 10-18 Deleting the link channel………………………… 16-21
Entering the repeater group name……………… 9-41 Entering a Program scan link name…………… 16-21
Scan name………………………………………… 13-4 Program Skip……………………………………… 16-19
Selecting a memory name display……………… 12-12 PTT Auto REC……………………………………… 16-24
PTT Lock…………………………………………… 16-75
O
Off band indication………………………………… 15-5 Q
Offset frequency…………………………………… 16-16 QSO/RX Log items………………………………… 16-69
Opening Message………………………………… 16-84 QSO Log…………………………………………… 16-69
Operating mode Separator/Decimal………………………………… 16-71
Selecting the operating mode……………………… 5-9
Optional unit connection…………………………… 18-5
Option list…………………………………………… 18-2
OTHER OPTIONS………………………………… 18-3

20-9
 Previous view

INDEX

R S
Rainfall……………………………………………… 16-86 Save Setting………………………………………… 16-95
REC Mode…………………………………………… 16-23 Saving your own or received position data……… 10-11
Record Interval……………………………………… 16-41 Scan
Record Sentence…………………………………… 16-41 About the scan function………………………… 13-2
<<REC Start>>……………………………………… 16-22 Clearing the skip setting………………………… 13-8
Reflector Memory bank scan……………………… 13-2, 13-10
Linking to a reflector……………………………… 8-17 Memory scan………………………………… 13-2, 13-9
Reflector Echo Testing…………………………… 8-19 Memory (skip) scan……………………………… 13-9
Reflector operation……………………………… 8-16 Pause Timer……………………………………… 16-18
Requesting repeater information………………… 8-20 Receive mode for a scan………………………… 13-3
Unlinking a reflector……………………………… 8-19 Scan function during Dualwatch operation…… 13-4
What is the reflector?…………………………… 8-16 Scan items………………………………………… 16-18
Repeater Scan name………………………………………… 13-4
Checking the repeater input signal……………… 15-3 Scanning direction………………………………… 13-3
Repeater Tone…………………………………… 16-16 Scan Stop Beep…………………………………… 16-91
Repeater List………………………………… 9-23, 16-56 Scan Stop Beep function………………………… 13-4
About the Repeater List default values………… 9-47 Setting and clearing the skip frequencies……… 13-7
Deleting a Repeater List………………………… 9-36 Setting the skip channel………………………… 13-12
Editing a Repeater List…………………………… 9-35 Setting the skip frequencies……………………… 13-7
Entering information into Repeater List………… 9-24 Skip time
Entering the repeater group name……………… 9-41 Changing the skip time………………… 11-7, 11-20
New repeater entry……………………………… 9-25 Squelch setting for a scan……………………… 13-3
Opening the default Repeater List……………… 9-47 Temporary Skip timer…………………………… 13-3
Rearranging the repeater display order………… 9-37 Tuning step for a VFO scan……………………… 13-3
Repeater detail screen…………………………… 9-42 VFO mode scan…………………………………… 13-5
Repeater List contents…………………………… 9-23 VFO scan…………………………………… 13-2, 13-5
Required items for the communication cases… 9-24 When a signal is received………………………… 13-4
Updating the Repeater List……………………… 8-21 Scope AF Output…………………………………… 16-91
Reply Position Display……………………………… 16-82 Scroll Speed………………………………………… 16-83
Resume Timer……………………………………… 16-18 SD Card Info………………………………………… 16-96
RS-MS1A SD Card items……………………………………… 16-95
Download procedures…………………………… 18-9 Separator/Decimal………………………… 16-71, 16-95
Using the RS-MS1A……………………………… 18-9 Side panel……………………………………………… 3-2
Required items…………………………………… 18-9 Single watch operation……………………………… 5-3
RX History Dualwatch operation………………………………… 5-3
Adding Repeater information using RX History… 9-38 SJ-1 silicone jacket………………………………… 18-8
RX History………………………………………… 16-53 Skip function………………………………………… 13-3
RX History items………………………………… 16-53 Changing the skip time…………………… 11-7, 11-20
RX History Log…………………………………… 16-70 Setting the skip channel………………………… 13-12
RX History screen…………………………………… 9-5 Setting the skip frequencies……………………… 13-7
RX Bass……………………………………………… 16-60 Setting the temporary skip function……………… 13-13
RX Bass Boost……………………………………… 16-60 Skip setting for the BC radio memory…………… 6-15
RX Call Sign………………………………………… 16-81 Skip settings for the DR scan…………………… 9-39
RX Call Sign SPEECH…………………………… 16-66 Skip Time…………………………………………… 16-24
RX Call Sign Write………………………………… 16-63 Temporary Skip timer…………………………… 13-3
RX>CS SPEECH…………………………………… 16-66 Sounds items……………………………………… 16-88
RX Message………………………………………… 16-82 Squelch
RX REC Condition………………………………… 16-23 Setting the squelch level……………………… 5-8, 6-7
RX Record (RPT)…………………………………… 16-64 Squelch setting for a scan……………………… 13-3
RX Repeater Write………………………………… 16-63
RX Treble…………………………………………… 16-60

☞☞“S” continues on the next page.

20-10
 Previous view

INDEX

Specifications Selecting a tuning step……………………………… 5-7

Transceiver………………………………………… 19-2 Tuning step for a VFO scan……………………… 13-3
General…………………………………………… 19-2 TX Bass……………………………………………… 16-60
Receiver………………………………………… 19-3 TX Call Sign………………………………………… 16-83
Transmitter……………………………………… 19-2 TX format
BC-202 desktop charger……………………… 19-3 Caller’s TX format………………………………… 10-5
Speech function……………………………… 9-16, 17-6 Displayed items…………………………………… 10-6
[DIAL] speech function setting…………………… 17-6 TX format: D-PRS Item…………………………… 10-8
Announcing the received call sign……………… 9-16 TX format: D-PRS Object………………………… 10-8
Announce the RX>CS call sign………………… 9-17 TX format: D-PRS Position (Base)……………… 10-7
MODE SPEECH…………………………………… 16-67 TX format: D-PRS Position (Mobile)…………… 10-7
Mode speech function setting…………………… 17-7 TX format: D-PRS Weather……………………… 10-9
Phonetic Code setting…………………………… 9-18 TX mode: NMEA………………………………… 10-9
RX>CS SPEECH………………………………… 16-66 TX Message………………………………………… 16-59
Selecting the Speech Language………………… 9-18 Deleting a TX message……………………………… 9-4
SPEECH items…………………………………… 16-66 Entering a TX message……………………………… 9-2
SPEECH Language……………………………… 16-67 TX Monitor function………………………………… 17-4
SPEECH Level…………………………………… 16-67 TX Treble…………………………………………… 16-60
Speech level selection…………………………… 9-19
SPEECH Speed…………………………………… 16-67 U
Speech speed selection………………………… 9-19 Unlinking a reflector………………………………… 8-19
SSID………………………………………………… 16-46 Unmount…………………………………………… 16-96
Standby Beep……………………………………… 16-90 Unproto Address…………………………………… 16-43
Sub Band Mute……………………………………… 16-91 Using a reflector…………………………………… 8-18
Sweep operation…………………………………… 5-13 UTC Offset………………………………………… 16-93
System Language………………………………… 16-87
V
T Version……………………………………………… 16-97
“TO” (Destination) setting …………………………… 8-8 VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan……… 14-6
Directly inputting (RPT)…………………………… 8-15 VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan……… 14-2
Directly inputting (UR)…………………………… 8-14 VFO frequency and a priority channel……… 14-2, 14-4
Using “Local CQ” (Local Area call)………………… 8-9 VFO mode…………………………………………… 5-10
Using “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)…………… 8-10 VFO mode scan…………………………………… 13-5
Using “Your Call Sign”…………………………… 8-11 VFO scan……………………………………… 13-2, 13-5
Using the RX History……………………………… 8-12 VFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan…………… 14-2
Using the TX History……………………………… 8-13 VFO scan and a priority channel…………… 14-2, 14-8
Temperature………………………………………… 16-85 VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan……………… 14-10
Temporary Skip timer……………………………… 13-3 Voice memory
Text entry……………………………………………… 2-7 <<REC Start>>…………………………………… 16-22
Time-Out Timer……………………………………… 16-75 Changing the recording mode…………………… 11-10
Time set items……………………………………… 16-92 Changing the skip time…………………… 11-7, 11-20
Time Stamp………………………………………… 16-48 Continue to record even if no signals are received…… 11-11
Tone Burst…………………………………………… 16-17 Deleting the folder………………………………… 11-9
Tone squelch operation…………………………… 17-13 Deleting the recorded contents (audio)………… 11-8
Tone squelch frequency setting and operation… 17-13 Erasing the recorded audio contents…………… 11-18
Top panel……………………………………………… 3-2 Fast-forward while playing……………………… 11-5
Transmit power levels……………………………… 5-11 File information…………………………………… 11-14
Transmitting………………………………………… 5-11 Folder information………………………………… 11-15
Troubleshooting Operations while playing back…………………… 11-5
Others……………………………………………… 20-3 Pause at the beginning of the next file
While operating D-STAR………………………… 20-1 (Rewind the file)…………………………………… 11-5
While operating GPS Logger…………………… 20-2
TSQL Freq…………………………………………… 16-16
Tuning step…………………………………………… 5-7 ☞☞“V” continues on the next page.
20-11
 Previous view

INDEX

Voice memory (Continued)

Pause at the beginning of the previously file
(Fast forward the file)……………………………… 11-5
Pause while playing……………………………… 11-5
Playing back the recorded audio………… 11-4, 11-17
Playing back the voice memory data on a PC… 11-23
Playing the next file……………………………… 11-5
Playing the previously file………………………… 11-5
Recording a QSO audio………………………… 11-2
Record the transmit and receive audio
into the same file………………………………… 11-12
Rewind while playing……………………………… 11-5
Start to record with [PTT] switch………………… 11-13
To start recording………………………… 11-2, 11-16
To stop recording………………………………… 11-3
VOICE PLAYER screen’s description…………… 11-6
Voice Recorder function…………………………… 11-16
File information…………………………………… 11-21
Voice TX
Voice TX function………………………………… 17-2
Recording………………………………………… 17-2
Repeat Time setting……………………………… 17-4
The recorded voice audio playing back………… 17-2
To transmit the recorded voice audio…………… 17-3
Voice TX items……………………………………… 16-28
Voltage……………………………………………… 16-97
Voltage (Power ON)………………………………… 16-84
Volume Select……………………………… 6-19, 16-88
VOX function………………………………… 16-76, 18-5
Selecting the headset type……………………… 18-5
Turning the VOX function ON or OFF…………… 18-6
VOX Delay………………………………………… 16-77
VOX Level………………………………………… 16-77
VOX Level setting………………………………… 18-7
VOX-related settings……………………………… 18-8
VOX Time-Out Timer……………………………… 16-77

W
Weather channel
Operation…………………………………………… 5-14
Selection…………………………………………… 5-14
Weather channel mode…………………………… 5-10
Weather alert function…………………………… 5-14
Wind Speed………………………………………… 16-86

Y
Your Call Sign……………………………………… 16-56

Other
1750 Hz tone………………………………………… 15-7

20-12
Previous view

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

A
Active Band………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-76
<<Access Point Mode>>…………………………………………………………………………………[DV Gateway>] 16-94
Alarm Area (Group)……………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Alarm>] 16-39
Alarm Area (RX/Memory)……………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Alarm>] 16-40
Alarm Select……………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Alarm>] 16-39
All Reset……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>Reset>] 16-99
Alphabet……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-67
Altitude……………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>D-PRS (DV-A)] 16-48
Altitude/Distance……………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-85
Auto Mute………………………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>BC Radio Set>] 16-30
Auto Power OFF…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Time Set>] 16-93
Auto Repeater……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-73
Auto Reply……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-61

B
Backlight……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-80
Backlight Timer………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-80
Band Edge Beep………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-90
Bank Link………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Scan>] 16-19
Barometric……………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-86
BC Radio………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-30
BC Radio Level…………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-88
BC Radio Memory………………………………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>] 16-30
<<BC Radio Mode>>……………………………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>] 16-31
<<BC Radio OFF>>………………………………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>] 16-31
<<BC Radio ON>>………………………………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>] 16-31
Beep Level……………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-89
Beep/Vol Level Link……………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-89
BK …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-64
Busy LED……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-81
Busy Lockout……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-75

C
Call Sign………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-51
Charging (Power ON)……………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-79
CI-V Address……………………………………………………………………………………………[Function>CI-V>] 16-78
CI-V Baud Rate………………………………………………………………………………………[Function>CI-V>] 16-78
CI-V Transceive………………………………………………………………………………………[Function>CI-V>] 16-78
CI-V (DATA Jack)………………………………………………………………………………………[Function>CI-V>] 16-78
Clone Master Mode…………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>Clone>] 16-97
Clone Mode…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>Clone>] 16-97
Comment…………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>D-PRS (DV-A)] 16-47
CSV Format…………………………………………………………………………………………… [QSO/RX Log>] 16-71
CSV Format…………………………………………………………………………………[SD Card>Import/Export>] 16-95

20-13
 Previous view

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

D
Date …………………………………………………………………………………… [QSO/RX Log>CSV Format>] 16-71
Date ………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>Import/Export/CSV Format>] 16-95
Data Extension……………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>D-PRS (DV-A)] 16-48
Data Speed………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-76
Date/Time…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Time Set>] 16-92
DIAL SPEECH……………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-66
Dial Speed-UP……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-73
Digital Code……………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-17
Digital Monitor………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-62
Digital Repeater Set…………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-63
Display…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-80
Display Language…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-86
Display Unit…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-85
DTCS Code……………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-17
DTCS Polarity…………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-17
DTMF Memory……………………………………………………………………………………… [DTMF/T-CALL>] 16-68
DTMF Speed………………………………………………………………………………………… [DTMF/T-CALL>] 16-68
DTMF/T-CALL…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-68
DUP/TONE...…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-16
During RX/Standby…………………………………………………………………… [Function>Remote MIC Key>] 16-74
During TX……………………………………………………………………………… [Function>Remote MIC Key>] 16-75
DV Auto Detect………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-63
DV Auto Reply………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>] 16-27
DV Data TX…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-61
DV Fast Data………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-61
DV Gateway……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-94
DV Memory……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-56
DV RX Backlight……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-83
DV Set…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-60
D-PRS (DV-A)………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>] 16-43

E
Earphone Mode………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-88
Export…………………………………………………………………………………………[SD Card>Import/Export>] 16-95
EMR …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-64
EMR AF Level………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-65

F
Fast Data…………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>DV Fast Data>] 16-61
File Split……………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>Recorder Set>] 16-24
FM Antenna……………………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>BC Radio Set>] 16-31
Format……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>] 16-96
Function…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-72

20-14
 Previous view

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

G
GPS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-32
GPS Alarm……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-39
GPS Auto TX…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-50
GPS Data Speed…………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>DV Fast Data>] 16-62
GPS Indicator……………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Set>] 16-33
GPS Information………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-34
GPS Logger……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-41
GPS Logger……………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Logger>] 16-41
<<GPS Logger Only>>………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Logger>] 16-42
GPS Memory…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-38
GPS Message…………………………………………………………………[GPS>GPS TX Mode>NMEA (DV-G)] 16-50
GPS Out (to DATA jack)…………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Set>] 16-33
GPS Position……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-34
GPS Select………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Set>] 16-32
GPS Sentence…………………………………………………………………[GPS>GPS TX Mode>NMEA (DV-G)] 16-49
GPS Set…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-32
GPS Time Correct………………………………………………………………………………………… [Time Set>] 16-93
GPS TX Mode…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>] 16-43

H
Headset Select……………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>VOX>] 16-77
Heterodyne………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-79
Home CH Beep………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-89

I
Import…………………………………………………………………………………………[SD Card>Import/Export>] 16-95
Import/Export……………………………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>] 16-95
Information…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>] 16-97

K
Key Lock…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-75
Key-Touch Beep………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-89

L
Latitude/Longitude…………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-85
LCD Contrast………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-80
LCD Dimmer…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-80
Load Setting………………………………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>] 16-95

M
Manual Position…………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Set>] 16-32
MIC Gain (External)………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-76
MIC Gain (Internal)………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-76
MODE SPEECH…………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-67
Monitor……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-73
My Call Sign……………………………………………………………………………………………… [My Station>] 16-59
My Station………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-59

20-15
 Previous view

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

N
<<New File>>……………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>Save Setting>] 16-95
NMEA (DV-G)………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>] 16-49

O
Offset Freq……………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-16
Opening Message…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-84
Others…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-97

P
Partial Reset…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>Reset>] 16-98
Pause Timer……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Scan>] 16-18
Play Files…………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>] 16-22
Play Files…………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>Voice Recorder>] 16-25
Player Set…………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>] 16-24
Player Set…………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>Voice Recorder>] 16-26
Power Save………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-72
Power Save (BC Radio)………………………………………………………………… [BC Radio>BC Radio Set>] 16-31
Power Save (Internal GPS)……………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Set>] 16-32
Program Link……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Scan>] 16-20
Program Skip…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Scan>] 16-19
PTT Auto REC……………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>Recorder Set>] 16-24
PTT Lock…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-75

Q
QSO Log……………………………………………………………………………………………… [QSO/RX Log>] 16-69
QSO Recorder………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>] 16-22
QSO/RX Log……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-69

R
Rainfall………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-86
REC Mode…………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>Recorder Set>] 16-23
<<REC Start>>……………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>] 16-22
Record……………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>Voice Recorder>] 16-24
Record……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice TX>] 16-28
Record Interval…………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Logger>] 16-41
Recorder Set………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>] 16-23
Recorder Set………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>Voice Recorder>] 16-26
Record Sentence………………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS Logger>] 16-41
Remote MIC Key…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-74
Repeat Time……………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice TX>TX Set>] 16-29
<<Repeat TX>>…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice TX>] 16-29
Repeater List……………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Memory>] 16-56
Repeater Tone…………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-16
Reply Position Display………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-82
Reset…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>] 16-98
Resume Timer…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Scan>] 16-18
RX Bass……………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>Tone Control>] 16-60
RX Bass Boost……………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>Tone Control>] 16-60

20-16
 Previous view

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

RX Call Sign…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-81

RX Call Sign SPEECH…………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-66
RX Call Sign Write…………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-63
RX History………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-53
RX History Log………………………………………………………………………………………… [QSO/RX Log>] 16-70
RX Message…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-82
RX REC Condition………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>Recorder Set>] 16-23
RX Record (RPT)……………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-64
RX Repeater Write…………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-63
RX Treble…………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>Tone Control>] 16-60
RX>CS SPEECH…………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-66
[RX>CS] Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-64

S
Save Setting………………………………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>] 16-95
Scan……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-18
Scan Stop Beep………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-90
Scope AF Output………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-91
Scroll Speed…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-83
SD Card…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-95
SD Card Info………………………………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>] 16-96
Separator/Decimal…………………………………………………………………… [QSO/RX Log>CSV Format>] 16-71
Separator/Decimal………………………………………………………… [SD Card>Import/Export/CSV Format>] 16-95
<<Single TX>>……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice TX>] 16-29
Skip Time……………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>QSO Recorder>Player Set>] 16-24
Sound……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-88
SPEECH………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-66
SPEECH Language………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-67
SPEECH Level……………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-67
SPEECH Speed…………………………………………………………………………………………… [SPEECH>] 16-67
Speed…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-85
SSID………………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>D-PRS (DV-A)] 16-46
Standby Beep…………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-90
Sub Band Mute…………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-91
System Language…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-87

T
Temperature…………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-85
Temporary Skip Timer…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Scan>] 16-18
<<Terminal Mode>>………………………………………………………………………………………[DV Gateway>] 16-94
Time Set………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-92
Time Stamp………………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>D-PRS (DV-A)] 16-48
Time-Out Timer……………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-75
Tone Burst………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-17
Tone Control…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>] 16-60
TSQL Freq………………………………………………………………………………………………… [DUP/TONE>] 16-16
TX Bass……………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>Tone Control>] 16-60
TX Call Sign…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-83
TX Delay (PTT)……………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>DV Fast Data>] 16-62
TX Message……………………………………………………………………………………………… [My Station>] 16-59
TX Monitor………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice TX>TX Set>] 16-29
TX Set……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice TX>] 16-29
TX Treble…………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Set>Tone Control>] 16-60

20-17
 Previous view

INDEX FOR MENU ITEMS

U
Unmount…………………………………………………………………………………………………… [SD Card>] 16-96
Unproto Address…………………………………………………………… [GPS>GPS TX Mode>D-PRS (DV-A)] 16-43
UTC Offset………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Time Set>] 16-93

V
Version………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>Information>] 16-97
Voice Memo……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-22
Voice Recorder………………………………………………………………………………………… [Voice Memo>] 16-24
Voice TX………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Root] 16-28
Voltage………………………………………………………………………………………… [Others>Information>] 16-97
Voltage (Power ON)…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>] 16-84
Volume Select…………………………………………………………………………………………………[Sounds>] 16-88
VOX ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>] 16-76
VOX ………………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>VOX>] 16-76
VOX Delay…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>VOX>] 16-77
VOX Level…………………………………………………………………………………………… [Function>VOX>] 16-77
VOX Time-Out Timer……………………………………………………………………………… [Function>VOX>] 16-77

W
Wind Speed…………………………………………………………………………………… [Display>Display Unit>] 16-86

Y
Your Call Sign…………………………………………………………………………………………… [DV Memory>] 16-56

20-18
A-7331-3EX
© 2016 Icom Inc. 1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan